JP7803664B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that variably displays first or second identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can be controlled to create an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result.

Conventional gaming machines have been proposed that display a title to announce the type of reach effect when the reach effect begins (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Also disclosed is a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving mode that selects a variation pattern with a short variation time (Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-118411 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-217007

However, there was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a movable body;
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium entering the start area,
The specific identification information can be variably displayed,
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that control will be made into the advantageous state in a first reach, and when the first command is received, it is possible to execute a previous reach that is different from the first reach before executing the first reach, and then execute the first reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the first reach, and when the second command is received, it is possible to execute the first reach after executing the pre-stage reach before executing the first reach,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be achieved in a second reach, and when the third command is received, it is possible to execute the second reach without executing the preceding reach before executing the second reach,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach will not be controlled to the advantageous state, and when the fourth command is received, it is possible to execute the second reach without executing the previous reach before executing the second reach,
an execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach is shorter than an execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach,
the execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach is longer than the execution time of the title display corresponding to the previous reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are:
a first part from the start of a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach to the display in a specific area;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area;
a third part that ends the display of the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The title display corresponding to the preceding reach is:
a first part from when the title display corresponding to the previous reach starts to when the title is displayed in a specific area;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the previous reach is displayed in the specific area;
a third part that ends the display of the title display corresponding to the previous reach,
The display means
displaying a title display corresponding to the first reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the previous reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
the development pattern to the first reach includes a first pattern in which the movable body develops by moving, and a second pattern in which the movable body develops without moving ,
The display means
After notification that the control will be made to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the first reach ,
the display means displays the title display corresponding to the first reach in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the previous reach ,
a state control means for controlling the game between a normal state and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
The performance control means
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change performance that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The period in which the state of the second special display in the second specific change performance changes is shorter than the period in which the state of the first special display in the first specific change performance changes.
It is characterized by the following.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. This is a diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time reduction in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time reduction state. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving number determination table for each transition trigger. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation level of the reach effect of the super reach. This is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in expectation level between the reach effects of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game control data storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance control data storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the stopping symbols. An explanatory diagram showing the performance control patterns for each variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing the performance control patterns for each variation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the normal state. This figure shows the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state A and special state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base weak reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base weak reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. This figure shows the progression of images showing a bad example of a low-base strong reach A presentation. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the transition of images when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of an image in a modified example of the title display part. This figure shows the progression of images when high-base super reach A to D effects are executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach A to D effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the position where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation time of the super reach presentation. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the presentation times of super reach presentations. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the super reach performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level suggestion display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of images when a selection effect is executed. An explanatory diagram showing the number of operations required to switch to the next title in the selection effect and the execution rate of the super reach effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the execution rate of effects that can be executed during variable display. A figure showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. This is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. A diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect. A diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance A. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance D. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an operation prompting image. A diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect. A diagram showing the display status of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. A diagram showing the execution status of the Yu-time start effect. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text of the super reach effect, the explanatory text, the title text of the jackpot start effect, and the operation prompt text. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the Super Reach effect and the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of game effect lamps. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. FIG. A figure showing a brightness data table used in super reach effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a child table for weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up red child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title common chance up money. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a title-wide chance-up golden child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a child table for a strong reach common title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. This figure shows the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system with strong reach A introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the child table for the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the high base reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach B. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach reach D. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach reach D. This figure shows the relationship between the timing and brightness data that make up the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the characteristic portion 152F. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 10 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small win end processing. An explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for normal conditions. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a high-speed time-saving small win. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of effects related to entry fluctuation misses. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of effects related to pseudo-variation misses. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a pseudo-variable miss. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a pseudo-variable miss. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style for a direct jackpot. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream Rush). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream Rush). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible rush). An explanatory diagram showing a control table after a win for each game state. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. This is a flowchart showing an example of small win end processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the variable display of decorative symbols in Dream Rush. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style relating to the first logo periodic change presentation, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style relating to the second logo periodic change presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to the variable display of decorative symbols in the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH. FIG. 2 is a front view of the movable body, the logo panel, and the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display, and FIGS. 10B1 and 10B2 are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode determination table for change presentations. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first pre-reading effect, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the effects during a jackpot. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining the effects during a small win. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the effect when waiting for the start of a change. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining effects at the start of fluctuation. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the effects during fluctuation. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a normal jackpot of pattern 3R occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal jackpot with pattern 3R occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a time-saving jackpot occurs with pattern 10Ra. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a time-saving jackpot occurs with pattern 10Ra. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a time-saving jackpot occurs with pattern 10Ra. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a normal small win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small win occurs. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and reserved consumption periods. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption periods, and second reserved memory counts. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption periods, and second reserved memory counts. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption periods, and second reserved memory counts.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The feature of this invention is that decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part of the specific reach, attention can naturally be drawn to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
The decorative identification information is displayed in a reach mode of a first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (large)) displayed in the reach mode is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (small)) displayed in the second size.
According to this feature, the decorative identification information that was displayed in the first size becomes the second size, attracting the player's attention, and by using the display position of the decorative identification information in the second size to display a title display corresponding to a specific reach, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state is displayed, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, at the timing when decorative identification information that has become a reach state is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information that has become a reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

A gaming machine of form 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears overlapping with both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that have become reach states.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a more advantageous state than the first reach and the second reach, appears overlapping with the decorative identification information of both of the reach states, so that the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

A gaming machine according to aspect 1-6 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), and the title display corresponding to the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern on the left) or both of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, and then are displayed in a fixed position, and are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has reached the reach state even during the period when they are displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display even after the title display has been displayed in its fixed position.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part in the first reach and second reach to display the title display corresponding to the first reach and second reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
The feature of this invention is that the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) differs between when the first decorative identification information (odd number decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state and when the second decorative identification information (even number decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information has become the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part in the first reach, second reach, and third reach, the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach can be displayed, which naturally draws attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
Displaying decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the title display part in the specific reach so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns) that has become a reach state,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, when decoration identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player focuses on which decoration identification information has reached the reach state, so by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the specific reach, the player can naturally focus on the title display as well. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can emit light in an appropriate lighting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reaches in which a plurality of characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is a reach in which a first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") and a second character in the first reach (enemy character "Boingo") are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally character "Yume Yume") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a reach in which a first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and a second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means (image display device 5)
The introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) starts with a display in which the first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is positioned in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") is positioned in the background,
The introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is characterized in that it starts with a display in which the first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") is not in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") is not in the background.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the first character, which is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, starts from an arrangement in which the first character is at the front and the second character is at the back, which allows the player to empathize and makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the degree of expectation is high, resulting in an appropriate title display.

A gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1,
The first characters are characters who receive a benefit if they win a battle (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana");
The second character is a character (enemy character "robot") to which no benefit is given if the character wins the battle,
At the start of the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in a position in front with their backs to the player, and the second character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position in the back with their backs to the player, with the first and second characters facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the character and to recognize that the expectation is high.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed at a position including the display area where the title display (title characters) was displayed in the title display part.
According to this feature, when a player who has been paying attention to the title display disappears, his or her gaze will naturally be drawn to the first and second characters.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2, PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part of the first reach are continuously displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), no dialogue subtitles are displayed, but the title display (title text) is displayed.
According to this feature, during the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation and a long execution time, the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed so as not to overlap as much as possible, while during the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, the title display is ended first so that the player can also pay attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title display and dialogue subtitles to the player in an appropriate manner, and as a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the performance scene is not switched in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display (title characters) has ended.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the first reach and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the scene of the performance does not change in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display has ended, so that the viewer can focus on the title display and then on the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
When a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when a title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed simultaneously, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title display is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) starts displaying the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in the title display part of the specific reach at a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the plurality of characters is visible, and then gradually reduces the display size from the first size to a second size (reduced size) in which all of the plurality of characters are visible, and displays the title display (title characters) of the specific reach;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, and common titles for the high base reach series);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strongest reach of the strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, the display is performed at a first size in which only some of the characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until all the characters are visible, thereby attracting the player's attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) starts, a movable object (movable body 32) is moved to overlap the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves to when it returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed, and when the movable object returns to its initial position, the title display (title characters) begins to be displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which not all of the multiple characters are visible and the display area of the display means is filled so that the background becomes invisible, and then the title display at a second size (reduced size) and the background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to the title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the method of displaying the reach title makes an impact, while at the same time switching the background can be performed without creating a sense of incongruity, and the title display can be presented to the player in an appropriate manner.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) ends the title display part in the specific reach by enlarging and displaying the plurality of characters (enlarging the characters until the entire display area is filled with some of the title characters) from a state in which the plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which the characters are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position) and displays a display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) so that it can be seen,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, and common titles for the high base reach series);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strongest reach of the strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display during the title display part, and by using the title display appropriately, the player can seamlessly switch to the display corresponding to the next introductory part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the execution time (T2-1 to T2-3) of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are different,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the first part, which takes place before the title display in the fixed position, is made longer than the third part, which takes place from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to tease which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the title display parts can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first, second, and third parts the same.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled by the second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-1 to T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state) and the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in probability variable state) are different,
The first reach (super reach effect in normal state) is a reach executed in normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (the super reach effect in the normal state), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part, which takes place before the title display in the fixed position, is made longer than the third part, which takes place from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to tease which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the title display parts can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part the same.

A gaming machine according to aspect 10-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, so the special state can be advanced at a good pace, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be well hyped.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
the display means (image display device 5) displays a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect) so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed in the fixed position the longest, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Furthermore, by making the first part, which is displayed in the fixed position, longer than the third part, which is displayed from the fixed position until the display ends, it is possible to arouse interest in which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) can be displayed in a first mode (white mode), and the title display corresponding to the specific reach can be displayed in a second mode (red mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
In the title display part (title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects), an expectation suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first size, and then a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a second size larger than the first size,
In both cases of displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the first mode (white mode) and displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the second mode (red mode), the expectation suggestion display is displayed in a common mode,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, strong reach common titles for the strong reach series),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and its appearance suggests the expectation, so it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title display is displayed in the first appearance or the second appearance, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in a common manner, so the player can focus their attention on the appearance of the subsequent title display.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PB2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (four stars),
A highlight display is displayed so that it is common between the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by using the same highlighting whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the first reach or the second mode in the title display part of the second reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach or the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach or the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 13-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-1,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is indicated by N+1 (4) objects,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted.
According to this feature, whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, the highlighting is performed in a common manner, thereby reducing development costs.

A gaming machine of aspect 13-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that the time period during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted and the time period during which 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted are the same.
According to this feature, the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects are common, thereby reducing development costs.

A gaming machine according to aspect 13-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2 or 13-3,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that a common emphasis sound (expectation suggestion sound) is output whether one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted or 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted.
According to this feature, the same sound is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reaches (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) are configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, then, while continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object) is ended and the third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display consisting of multiple objects, and in the expectation suggestion display, the highlighting of the second object begins before the highlighting of the first object ends, but the highlighting of the third object does not begin until the highlighting of the first object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation.

A gaming machine of aspect 14-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1,
The expectation level suggestion display is characterized in that an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and after the output of the emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) has finished, an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) for highlighting the next object is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that suggests the degree of expectation.

A gaming machine of aspect 14-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation");
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (text "Expectation Level").
According to this feature, by highlighting the objects, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple objects and the characters that make up the expectation suggestion display.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reaches (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) are configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a common title for strong reach systems, a common title for strongest reach systems, and a common title for high base reach systems);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, an expectation indication display composed of multiple objects is displayed, while by not displaying the hold indication simultaneously with the expectation indication display, it is possible to prevent the hold indication from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation indication display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 15-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the variable display that has been started is characterized by being equal to the maximum number (five) of objects (star-shaped objects) that make up the expectation indication display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach occurs when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of objects that make up the expectation indication display being displayed.

A gaming machine of aspect 15-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1 or 15-2,
The hold display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) displays in monochrome before the title display part starts.
This feature allows the hold display to end without any discomfort.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation/high base reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be reached is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of objects (star-shaped objects) that is greater than the first number can be displayed,
In the title display part of the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) which is greater than the second number can be displayed,
the difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, the increase in the number of objects is the same as when it increases from the second number to the third number, but when it increases from the second number to the third number, the increase in the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater than when it increases from the first number to the second number.Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state more than the number of objects that has increased, while when the number of objects is small, excessive expectations of being controlled to an advantageous state are not raised.

A gaming machine of aspect 16-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect / high base reach D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means is capable of displaying an expectation suggestion display constituted by a fourth number (4.5) object (star-shaped object) that is greater than the third number in a title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect),
The difference between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number and the third number (1);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, the increase in the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part is smaller when the number of objects increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, but the increase in the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater when it increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, so the more the number of objects increases, the more it can be expected that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state even if the number of added objects is small.

A gaming machine of aspect 16-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, it can be expected that the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part will be controlled in a more advantageous state when it increases from the third number by 0.5 to the fourth number, rather than when it increases from the first number by 1 to the third number.
A gaming machine of aspect 16-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 16-1 to 16-3,
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (high base reach C presentation) is executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (high base reach B presentation) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is executed in the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is executed.
According to this feature, it can be expected that a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state will be controlled to be an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
An expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects),
The expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so the player can intuitively recognize that the expectation is higher in the second reach than in the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 17-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

A gaming machine of aspect 17-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1 or 17-2,
The reach is executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the third reach has a higher expectation than the second reach.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2 to 3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2, 5, 8) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 to PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is a reach that does not result in a notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the effect, and may result in a notification that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the effect, or may result in another reach (super reach effect) being executed.
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is a reach that has, as a result of the effect, a case where it is announced that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) and a case where it is announced that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the other reach will be executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
An expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects),
The expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the second reach, which may directly notify that control will be made into an advantageous state, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, which does not directly notify that control will be made into an advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent excessive expectations from being created by the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be made to be suitable.

A gaming machine of aspect 18-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 18-1,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is characterized in that it is possible to display the title display (title text) in a confirmed state (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach effect) will be executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) may be executed via a selection effect using a title display (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effects) including the specific reach,
The display means
It is possible to display an expectation suggestion display together with the title display (title characters) in the title display part and the selection performance of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach),
When displaying the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach), the expectation suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed in stages,
When the expectation indication display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation indication display made up of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so that the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance that precedes it can be eliminated.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-1,
The selection effect is an effect that changes in stages from a low-expectation reach (super reach effect) to a high-expectation reach (super reach effect) by operating the effect operation means (push button 31B),
The time required for the selection effect to change by one level (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) may be shorter than the time required for the expectation suggestion display of the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) to display by one level (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold).
This feature allows for a sense of speed to be imparted to the gradual changes in the selection presentation.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-2,
The selection effect is an effect that changes step by step from the current reach (super reach effect) to a reach (super reach effect) with one step higher expectation, and is characterized in that the number of times the effect operating means (push button 31B) is operated to change to the next step increases with each step change.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of reaching a winning jackpot, the more impatient the player can be.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so that it is easy for the player to determine which reach has ultimately been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character of the super reach effect) corresponding to the specific reach,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by moving the advantageous state name display more significantly, the game player can celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 20-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D), when the title display (title character) is displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, the background of the advantageous state name display can also be moved more dramatically to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the prompting character display displayed in the introductory part prompts the player to take an action, and by moving it more than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 21-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that prompts the player to take an action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The feature is that both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, whether the prompting character display or the special prompting character display is moved more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action.

A gaming machine of aspect 21-3 is a gaming machine according to aspect 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is less than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the number of characters in the promotional character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, so that the content of the characters can be recognized even if the user moves the display widely.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory character) that is different from the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by displaying the additional explanatory text display in a manner that moves more rapidly than the title display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory text display has been added in addition to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can emit light in a suitable lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 22-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 22-1,
The explanatory text display (explanatory text) is characterized by the content suggesting that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
This feature can draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory text display has been added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is displayed in a larger font size than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, so that the title display alone can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 23-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect), but the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach occupies a larger display area per character, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of a first size is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (small)) of a second size smaller than the first size is displayed in a reach state;
At least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decorative identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be focused on in the title display part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 24-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 24-1,
The present invention is characterized in that all characters of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) are displayed in a size smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decorative identification information can be reliably recognized when a reach state is reached, and thereafter the decorative identification information is reduced in size and each character that makes up the title display is displayed in a size larger than the decorative identification information, so that attention can be drawn to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS");
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") is displayed in the first position (the upper fixed position), and then the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed in the second position (the lower fixed position);
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower fixed position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (lower fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the smallest character size when displayed at the first position (top fixed position) and the second position (bottom fixed position);
The size of the characters when the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the characters that make up the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the promotion character display, so that being controlled in an advantageous state can be more congratulated.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into an advantageous state.

A gaming machine of aspect 25-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 25-1 to 25-3,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)) is characterized by being displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, can be displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

A gaming machine of aspect 25-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized by being displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that the player can celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) (operation prompt effect A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in suitable title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1,
After the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and the title display part of the specific reach begins.
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in the series of steps, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character is focused on, the title display can be focused on.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the title display displayed thereafter larger than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a suitable title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 28-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28-1,
After the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and after it is announced that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is displayed.
According to this feature, a promotional character display is displayed before the title display part in a series of events, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional character display, thereby drawing attention to the title display, and after it is notified that a specific reach will result in control to an advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name is displayed larger than the title display, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 29-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time from when a part of the character string constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until all of the character string disappears.
According to this feature, the time during which the advantageous state name display, which is intended to congratulate the player, is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title display, which is intended to increase the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is switched to an operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) that suggests an operation method during the advantageous state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the switch to the operation suggestion display, control is performed to gain an advantage by operating the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (an operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R),
The time required to switch from the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) to the operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) is shorter than the time required to end the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display switches to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has passed, control is performed to give an advantage by operating using the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the advantageous state name display ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1,
The prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the valid time for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time for which the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed is characterized by being longer than the time for which the prompted action is not taken and the effective time for the prompted action has elapsed after the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the period of time when the prompted action is not taken, thereby making it possible to celebrate the player being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the promotional text display, which is intended to encourage the player to take action, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

A gaming machine of aspect 30-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 30-1 to 30-3,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages operation) displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompt display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed, and the prompt character (character encouraging the operation) is displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)).
According to this feature, the time for which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the subsequent title display is displayed for a longer period of time than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, thereby enabling the title display to be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are displayed until at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the title display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the promotional text display, which is intended to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1 or 31-2,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages operation) displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompt display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed, and the prompt character (character encouraging the operation) is displayed,
The time period during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time period during which the special prompt character display (operation prompt characters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the title display can be drawn to by making the time for which the title display is displayed longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the subsequent title display for a longer period of time than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PB2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are determined as one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-15 to PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-17 to PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) are reaches that are executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The display means
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
The expectation suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
The feature of this invention is that the expectation indication display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, so the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for the second reach, but the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed for the first reach, thereby preventing excessive expectations of the first reach controlling the game to an advantageous state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation level than the fourth reach in the special state, but is higher expectation level than the first reach in the normal state, so by displaying the expectation level suggestion display for both the third reach and the fourth reach, it is possible to expect that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in both the third reach and the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled by the second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (the super reach effect in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (high base reach common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (the super reach presentation in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (introduction of high base reach type reach A, introduction of high base reach type reach B, introduction of high base reach type reach C, introduction of high base reach type reach D) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, allowing the special state to progress at a good tempo. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 34-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 34-1,
The frequency with which the second reach (super reach effect in the special state) occurs in the special state (probable chance state) is higher than the frequency with which the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) occurs in the normal state.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach occurring in the special state increases, the special state can be progressed at a good pace.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of becoming the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach is displayed in a first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area),
In the title display part of the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach is displayed in a second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode,
When the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is entered after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) is displayed in the second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is entered after a specific number of times has been reached, the display indicating that the special state will be entered after a specific number of times has been reached is displayed in the same second display operation mode as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, so that the player can recognize that the special state after a specific number of times has a high degree of advantage.

The gaming machine of aspect 35-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35-1,
When the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state (time-shortening state B (Yu-time)) will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is ended, the display is ended in the same display operation mode as the display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are erased while expanding) when ending the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach effect).
According to this feature, even when the display indicating that control will be made to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is ended, it is ended in the same display operation mode as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that it can be recognized that the special state after a specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the specific number of times is reached and the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled, a display indicating that the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) can be displayed.
The size of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is one in which it is not yet clear whether the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is one in which the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and by making the size of the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach, it is possible to celebrate the player being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached are characterized by being larger than the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so no matter which character you focus on, the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it even more congratulatory that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the specific number of times is reached and the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled, a display indicating that the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) can be displayed.
The display time of the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached is longer than the display time of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is one in which it is not yet clear whether the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is one in which the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and by displaying the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the player can celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 37-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 37-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached to when at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time from when part of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed to when all of the characters disappear.
According to this feature, the time during which the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of congratulatory times is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title display, whose purpose is to increase the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached, it is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters indicating the remaining number of times until Yu-time) is displayed while the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is being executed, but is not displayed while the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is being executed.
According to this feature, in the first reach, which has a low expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached is displayed, making it possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached, while in the second reach, which has a high expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is not displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the presentation and alleviating the player's disappointment when the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is low.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-2,
When it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying again the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
When it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time) is displayed again after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects).
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state will be reached in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is not displayed again, thereby alleviating the player's disappointment when there are only a few times left until the special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, when it is notified that the advantageous state will not be reached in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed again after the second reach ends, so the player can feel relieved quickly when there are only a few times left until the special state after the specific number of times is reached.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation prompting effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display that prompts the player to take an action at a timing related to a specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, it is possible to draw attention to the prompting character display and effectively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, since the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, it is possible to make the light-emitting means emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, it is possible to display the title in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 39-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time character) is displayed at the same time,
When the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed in the introductory part (operation prompt effect D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before the development into a specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed at the same time as the promotion character display, so that the player can be made aware of the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached in the operation promotion display of the introductory part, it is possible to notify whether or not the player is being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and therefore a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached is unnecessary, and therefore the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached is terminated before the advantageous state name display is displayed, and the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the game player to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after reaching the specific number of times, the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time).
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display can be made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is characterized in that it determines a special fluctuation pattern (time-saving B start fluctuation pattern) when the game medium (game ball) first enters the start area (first start winning port, second start winning port) in a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after a specific number of times has been reached.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after reaching a specific number of times, a presentation according to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first mode (white mode) to a second mode (red or gold mode) and displayed.
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode), the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed in the second mode (red or gold mode) is longer than the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed in the first mode (white mode),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode in a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, the change to the second mode can be reliably recognized by making the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or may remain unchanged in the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode), at a specific timing (when a time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period), the title display (title letters) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode) and a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output,
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is not changed from the first state (white state), when the specific timing is reached (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output without being changed from the first state (white state).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first state to the second state at a specific timing, and also when the title display remains in the first state at the specific timing and does not change, so that the output of the specific sound effect can give the player hope that the display will change to the second state.

A gaming machine of aspect 41-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes a plurality of aspects (red and gold aspects),
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red, gold mode), a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output regardless of the type of second mode (red, gold mode) to which it is changed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first state to the second state at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output regardless of the type of second state to which it is changed, so that the output of the specific sound effect can draw attention to the type of second state to which it is changed.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first mode (white mode) to a second mode (red mode) and displayed.
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed and displayed from the first mode (white mode) to a third mode (gold mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), in either case where the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode), the display is characterized in that it is changed from the first mode (white mode) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) and then changed to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to a specific reach, whether the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode or from the first mode to the third mode, the display is changed to a common display mode and then to the second mode or the third mode. Therefore, by changing from the first mode to the common display mode, the player can expect to see a change to the third mode, which has a higher expectation than the second mode, until the change from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode.

The gaming machine of aspect 42-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and is characterized in that when the light clears, the characters change to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the title display light up, thereby encouraging the change to the second or third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part, the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state has been achieved can be appropriately stimulated, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB4) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7 / PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to both the first reach and the second reach,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part which is common to the third reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved can be appropriately stimulated, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PB1-J) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state. A fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6), a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state, a ninth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a tenth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB4) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7 / PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fifth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state than any of the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to both the first reach and the second reach,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part which is common to the third reach,
In the title display part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach title of the strongest reach system) for the third title display part for the fifth reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the fourth reach,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction) for the introductory part of the fifth reach.
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and further, by providing a dedicated brightness data table for the title display part and the introductory part for the reach with the highest expectation, interest is heightened, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be achieved.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first state (white) to a second state (red or gold) and displayed.
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a first brightness data table (weak reach common title (white)),
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is changed to a second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a second brightness data table (weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold)),
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), regardless of whether the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second form (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, whether the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach or whether it is changed to the second mode, the brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title display whether it is not changed to the second mode or whether it is changed to the second mode, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be achieved.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is
A first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach to the display at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the first part (weak reach title start),
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the second part (weak reach title display),
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position in a specific reach, a brightness data table corresponding to the second part after the title display is displayed in the fixed position, and a brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period during which the title display is performed and the period until it is announced whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Example]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the following examples.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 3). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable pieces. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, bringing the tip of the movable pieces close to the prize ball device 6A, creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable pieces of the variable prize ball device 6B are in a tilted position, creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, at the bottom left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 (described below) that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, along with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c described above, may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each constructed using an LED.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching between the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The setting switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and setting switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 31 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratios, winning combination ratios, and base wins. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base wins is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a with a glass window, which allows the gaming area to be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the circuit board case 201, which includes the setting key 51 and setting switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability/low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of the production, etc.]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may also be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Operation]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of the main board 11]
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 4, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc., to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (Step S5). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a setting change process (Step S7). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the clearing process sets initial values in the work area.

The setting confirmation process in step S5 determines whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is pressed ON. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, the setting confirmation condition can only be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, so the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set therein can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may enter a game stop state in which the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is halted. In the game stop state, the firing of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle and the detection of game balls by various switches are halted, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to display a frozen losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with this may also end.

The setting change process in step S7 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting values set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the values displayed on the display monitor 29 are updated sequentially each time operation of the setting change switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an arcade attendant or the like, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 are stored (updated and memorized) in the backup area of RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a play-stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying play-stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, allowing control to the setting change state. If the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, allowing control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off when power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled. If the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set presentation control command is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value consists of six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 representing the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, a setting value of 6 provides the highest advantage to the player, and the advantage decreases progressively as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the payout rate may also change according to the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot remains constant regardless of the setting value, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of several setting values that differ in the degree of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table. Figure 7(A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7(B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result determination table, a win determination value that is compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value used to determine the display result, and its value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 7(A), when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can range from 0 to 65535. Of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot," 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving," and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss." Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot," and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss." Note that when the setting value for the first variable special symbol is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the situation is as shown in Figure 7(A).

As shown in Figure 7(B), when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can range from 0 to 65535. Of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot," 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving," and the rest of the numerical range is assigned to "miss." Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot," and the rest of the numerical range is assigned to "miss." Note that when the setting value for the variable special symbol in the second special symbol is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the results are as shown in Figure 7(B).

Here, if we look at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in Figure 8, in the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the game state is normal or time-saving, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1238, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the setting value is 2 or higher, of the jackpot determination values, values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value used to determine a time-saving loss regardless of the setting value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, when the setting value is 6, the hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value, and the time-saving loss determination value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving losses (time-saving loss reference value), in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination values for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346). This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of jackpot determination values that changes depending on each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result determination table when the game state is in the probability variable state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1347, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in the probability variable state, when the setting value is 1, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the setting value is 2 or greater, of the jackpot determination values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

In the second special chart display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1238, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game state is normal or time-saving, in the second special symbol display result determination table, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, when the set value is 1, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the set value is 2 or greater, of the jackpot determination values, values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value for determining a time-saving loss regardless of the setting value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, when the setting value is 6, the hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346 among the jackpot determination value numerical range, and the time-saving loss determination value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving losses (time-saving loss reference value), in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination values for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346). This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of jackpot determination values that changes depending on each setting value.

In the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the game state is in a probability variable state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the display result determination table for the second special symbol are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special symbol.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the common numerical range for a time-saving miss is set to 65317 to 65535 regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is normal or time-saving. When the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the common numerical range for a time-saving miss is set to 65317 to 65425 regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same regardless of the setting value, preventing the setting value from excessively increasing gambling. Furthermore, for time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the numerical range is set to a continuous range from 65317, the time-saving miss reference value, regardless of the setting value, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss.

Note that while this pachinko gaming machine 1 has six settable values, from 1 to 6, the number of settable values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or fewer, or seven or more. Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value is suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on the set value.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. The performance control CPU 120 also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a preview setting process (step S161). In the preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a preview performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible within the scope of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display stops (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a removable recording medium, but may also be distributed by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communications processing unit, the programs and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communications line, etc.

Games can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line, temporarily storing them in internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game can also be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

[Explanation of characteristic part 131SG]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with respect to the characteristic section 131SG. In the description of each step in the flowchart of the characteristic section 131SG, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "131SG S1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach." In the characteristic section 131SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display." Furthermore, components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or that have similar functions but differ in form or location are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following description, the near side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the surface facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Unlike the description in Figure 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not one that can be set to one of multiple setting values (e.g., 1 to 6) that have different display rates for the jackpot display result, and is described as a gaming machine that does not have a "miss with time reduction" as a variable display result, and has a jackpot probability set to approximately 1/319.

Furthermore, after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in succession in a low probability state but the next jackpot does not occur, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have not won a jackpot despite playing for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games), and in this embodiment is a gaming state also called "play time."

In this embodiment, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot A out of multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are made in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) out of multiple types of time-saving states, leaving 790 variable displays remaining from the end of time-saving state A until the rescue time-saving state is reached. On the other hand, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of either jackpot B or jackpot C out of multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are made in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), leaving 900 variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state until the rescue time-saving state is reached. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter reaching "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a first special symbol reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided in the lower left of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to a first special symbol reserved memory that has been started but for which a variable display has not yet been executed, and a second special symbol reserved memory display area 130SG005U is provided in the lower right of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to a second special symbol reserved memory that has been started but for which a variable display has not yet been executed. And, an active display area 130SG005F is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

In addition, the right side of the image display device 5 can display a fourth symbol 131SG005J to notify the player that a variable display is being executed, and a small symbol 131SG005M, which is variable displayed in the same way as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5.The top right corner of the image display device 5 can display a remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z, which indicates the remaining number of variable displays until control is given to time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described below.

In addition, the left side of the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed as a left gaming area 2L where gaming balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2 is formed as a right gaming area 2R where gaming balls can flow down. Gaming balls that are weakly launched by the launching device flow down a first path as the left gaming area 2L, and gaming balls that are strongly launched by the launching device flow down a second path as the right gaming area 2R.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories for the first special design by the number displayed on the reserved display, and a second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories for the second special design by the number displayed on the reserved display. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5, which displays the reserved display corresponding to the currently active variable display as the active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed in the direction in which the gaming balls flow downstream. The first large winning opening is operable by solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close a large winning opening door (not shown), thereby changing between an open state where gaming balls can enter and a closed state where gaming balls cannot enter. The second large winning opening is operable by solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2) to open and close a large winning opening door (not shown), thereby changing between an open state where gaming balls can enter and a closed state where gaming balls cannot enter.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win in the general prize opening 10 and the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, while game balls flowing down the right game area 2R (second path) can win in the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, the general prize opening 10, and the first or second large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

Multiple obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. As a result, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win in the second start winning slot or the large winning slot, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win in the first start winning slot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special symbol display device 131SG004A capable of variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve indicator 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserve indicator 131SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal symbol display device 131SG020 capable of variable display of normal symbols, a normal symbol reserve indicator 131SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol reserve number, and a jackpot indicator. The game information display unit includes a round indicator 131SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during play, a right-hit lamp 131SG132 that lights up in game states in which the game ball is shot toward the right game region 2R, such as in a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a probability variable lamp 131SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), and a time-saving lamp 131SG134 that lights up in the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the low probability/high base state (time-saving state). Note that, when the game state is normal, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the moment the variable display stops if the variable display results in a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device, such as a management computer of the gaming facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening is provided with a V prize opening and a discharge outlet located downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is also provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device is switched between a closed and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening, but when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state, they cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the discharge outlet.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a gaming ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that a gaming ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 131SG031 for prompting a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 131SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first hold LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 1 to 2, and a first hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 3 to 4. 31SG034B, a second hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory count is 1 to 2, a second hold LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory count is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 11-3(A), in this embodiment, the main board 11 is controlled to count numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, as well as the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the gaming control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR6 are set to the ranges shown in Figure 11-3 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random number values MR1 to MR6 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern judgment table that stores multiple variable patterns that determine the variable display modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special symbols and normal symbols.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special symbol display result determination table is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special symbol display result determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special symbol that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result.

In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state).

In the special symbol display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state. In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state is higher (approximately 1/80.02 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/319.68 in this embodiment). In other words, in the special chart display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that there is a higher probability of determining that the gaming state will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state compared to when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result determination table and the second special symbol display result determination table shown in Figure 7, as well as the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), as well as a variation pattern type determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a normal symbol display result determination table (not shown), and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown).

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the setting value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the setting value.

[Jackpot type determination table]
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to use the variable display result as a jackpot pattern, and determines the type of jackpot as either jackpot A or jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) used to determine the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends. Furthermore, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which probability variable control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends, when the gaming ball enters the V entry port after entering the second large entry port in the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V ball entry device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. Jackpot A causes the variable V ball entry device to enter a short open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpots B and C cause the variable V ball entry device to enter a long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds two through six. Furthermore, with "Jackpot A," the variable V prize entry device enters a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and since the probability variation control cannot be expected to be executed, it essentially results in a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds two through six. Furthermore, with "Jackpot B," the variable V prize entry device enters a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get a game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the probability variable control will be executed, resulting in a virtual probability variable jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in rounds two through ten. Furthermore, with "Jackpot C," the variable V prize entry device enters a long opening state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get a game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that probability variable control will be executed, resulting in a virtual probability variable jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, are provided as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types, may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, even in the case of jackpot A, it is possible but extremely rare for a V win to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of jackpot A, it will be explained as if no V win occurs and the special rate control is not executed. Also, even in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare for a V win not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as if a V win occurs and the special rate control is executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, a random number value used to determine the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random number value used to determine the special chart display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the jackpot types for the second special symbol are jackpots B and C, which allow 110 rounds of probability variable control and time-saving control after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to provide a jackpot D, in which time-saving control is performed 1,009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the jackpot gaming state ends. This increases interest because it is almost certain that the next jackpot will occur. Furthermore, even if no jackpot occurs in the 110-round probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after no jackpot occurs in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), 899 variable displays are performed, and then just one variable display is performed in the normal state, which further increases interest because control is entered into time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described below.

[Time-saving count]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a time reduction state A (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a battle rush (Battle Rush) with 110 time reductions). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a super battle rush (Battle Rush) with 110 time reductions). In addition, if 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, and the game is controlled to time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times). However, even if 900 variations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state B, the game will not be controlled to time-saving state B again based on this.

The rescue time reduction achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to the time-shortened state via rescue time reduction. The time-shortened state via rescue time reduction is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K can be calculated as follows:

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. Furthermore, in the case of gaming machines that allow for setting values, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set higher the lower the jackpot probability setting, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability setting is low.

[Fluctuation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. The fluctuation patterns in this embodiment are roughly divided into a loss fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a jackpot fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-5, miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly divided into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns where no reach effects are executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach), normal reach fluctuation patterns where a normal reach reach effect is executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach), low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns where a low base weak super reach A reach effect or a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach), and normal state (low base The fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach A (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach A) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach B (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach B) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach C (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach C) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state). The fluctuation pattern of the low base strongest super reach C in which the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is finally executed in the normal state (low base state) and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the low base strongest super reach); the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach A in which the reach effect of the high base super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach A); the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach B in which the reach effect of the high base super reach B is finally executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) There are various fluctuation patterns available: a high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach C is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; a high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; and a high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state).

Four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are available: PA1-1, where the special chart fluctuation time is 12,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is two or less in normal state; PA1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 5,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is three in normal state; PA1-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 2,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state A or special probability state); and PA1-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For normal reach fluctuation patterns, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are two types of fluctuation patterns for the low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 43,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss; and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 53,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach A: PA2-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; PA2-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; and PA2-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B: PA2-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; PA2-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; and PA2-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach C: PA2-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; PA2-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; and PA2-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by a reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; PA2-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by a reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; and PA2-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and a reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a miss.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-16, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-17, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach B is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-18, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach C is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach D variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-19, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach D is executed, resulting in a miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that they include the following fluctuation patterns: non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, the non-reach variation pattern type has one variation pattern, PB1-18, in which the special chart variation time is 500 ms + 15,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For normal reach fluctuation patterns, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PB1-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the low base strong Super Reach A variation pattern type, there are three variation patterns: PB1-2, where the special chart variation time is 63,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-3, where the special chart variation time is 73,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A, resulting in a jackpot; and PB-4, where the special chart variation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach A or low base weak Super Reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the low base strong super reach B variation pattern type, there are three variation patterns: PB1-5, where the special chart variation time is 78,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-6, where the special chart variation time is 83,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, where the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern type: PB1-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern type: PB1-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-14, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach A reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-15, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach B reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-16, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach C reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for High Base Super Reach D is a special chart variation time of 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and one variation pattern, PB1-17, is provided, in which the reach effect of High Base Super Reach D is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/fluctuation pattern determination table]
The judgment table stored in ROM 101 includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the type of fluctuation pattern according to the game status and the variable display result, and a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table, the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special patterns that execute the variable display (number of reserved memories that are subject to variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game status and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the value of the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (C) is selected, and the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

Also, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach."

Also, if the game state is in time-saving state A or probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (E) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D."

Also, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (F) is selected, and the value of the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

After determining the type of variation pattern as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-8 to 11-10 is selected depending on the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols that will execute the variable display (number of reserved symbols for variable display), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the type of variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8 (A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is three, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-8 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A or a probability variable state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-9 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state B, the miss variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 11-9 (B) is selected, and the value of the random number value MR4 is compared with the miss variation pattern determination table D to determine the variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, and the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game status is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-10 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state A or a probability variable state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-10 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-10 (C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is non-reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Super Reach Performance Expectations]
The expected probability of a jackpot when the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined as described above is as shown in Figures 11-11 (A) to (C). The expected probability of a jackpot for a Super Reach effect is the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed by the sum of the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed and the percentage of a miss when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), of the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game is in the normal state, the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B do not directly lead to a jackpot, so the expected jackpot probability is 0% for each. However, the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B can develop into reach effects of other Super Reaches (low base strong Super Reach A-C, low base strongest Reach), and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach A to reach effects of other Super Reaches is approximately 44%, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach B to reach effects of other Super Reaches is approximately 68%. The expected rate of development of a Super Reach effect is the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect when executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect by the sum of the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect and the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will be executed and not develop into another Super Reach effect.

In addition, among the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game state is normal, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C is approximately 35%, and the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach is approximately 55%. Furthermore, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effects of low base strong Super Reach A to C and low base strongest Super Reach differs depending on whether it develops from low base weak Super Reach A, develops from low base weak Super Reach B, or is executed directly without going through low base weak Super Reach A or B. The expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 19%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A executed directly without going through B is approximately 21%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 24%, and the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%. The expected jackpot rate for a reach effect is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B executed directly without going through B is approximately 27%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 33%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 35%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C executed directly without going through B is approximately 37%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 53%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 55%, and the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach executed directly without going through B is approximately 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (B), when the game state is time-saving state A, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 14%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 16%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 27%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (C), when the game state is in a probability variable state, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 40%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 45%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 60%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 90%.

As described below, in Super Reach effects, an expectation suggestion display can be displayed that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding Super Reach effect using the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), among the Super Reach effects executed when the game state is normal, no expectation suggestion display is displayed in the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and B, but the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach displays 4.5 stars. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), when the game state is in time-saving state A or probability variable state, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach D displays 4.5 stars.

In the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal and in the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state, the same number of stars may be displayed in the expectation indication display, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation is not the same. In cases where the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state suggests a higher jackpot expectation than the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal.

Furthermore, whether it is a Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal, or a Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state, the suggested probability of a jackpot increases for every 0.5 increase in the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display, and as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), in the expectation suggestion display of a Super Reach reach effect in either game state, the greater the increase in the suggested probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the increase in jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5 is the same for both the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is normal and the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is in a special probability state; however, the increase in jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4, or from 4 to 4.5, is greater for the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is in a special probability state than for the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is normal.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1," and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0." Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-13(A) is only an example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 11-13 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), the variable display result specification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is an initialization specification (power-on specification) command for displaying the initial screen when power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery specification command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from a power outage (power outage) state.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot gaming state.

For the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, for the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. For the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identifiably displayed in the first reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identifiably displayed in the second reserved memory display area 132SG005U, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a jackpot start switch passing notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot start switch 131SG024 when the variable display result is a jackpot, i.e., notifies the start of the jackpot game. Command D200H is a V win notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the V switch 131SG023B1 during the jackpot game state, i.e., notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control attempts in the time-saving state (time-saving state A) excluding rescue time-saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-change count notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-change control attempts in the chance-change state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED 131SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED 131SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time reduction is performed upon power recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifies it when power is restored. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), the command to specify the number of times rescue time reduction is performed upon power recovery sets different EXT data depending on each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value (four-digit value) of the rescue time reduction counter when power is restored.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction command 1, which specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction command 2, which specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction command 3, which specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction command 4, which specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies the remaining number of variable displays (126 or fewer) until rescue time reduction occurs. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), the rescue time reduction count specification command sets different EXT data depending on the remaining number of variable displays (126 or fewer) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A specification command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B specification command that specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C specification command that specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D specification command that specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction count 1 specification command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specification command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data storage area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. In other words, even if power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply capacitor discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (e.g., special game process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to its pre-power outage state based on that data when power is restored after a power outage or other event. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the game progress status.

Such RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150, as shown in FIG. 11-14, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, a game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A stores reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start entry port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start entry (first start entry). As an example, the first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A associates reserved numbers with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order of detection of game balls), and stores, as reserved data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition upon the game ball's passage (entry), until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B stores reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start entry port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a start entry (second start entry). As an example, the second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B associates reserved numbers with the order of entry into the second start entry port (the order of detection of game balls), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition upon the game ball's passage (entry), until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always four, regardless of the game status. In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as first special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as second special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B).

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in a common hold memory unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start entry port data indicating whether the gaming ball passed through (enters) the first or second start entry port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number.

When variable display is being executed, if a second special symbol reserved memory exists during normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), the CPU 103 first reads random number values MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B. In other words, if random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as reserved memory for reserve number 1 in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the values of random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as reserved memory for reserve number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserve number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 2 as reserved memory for reserve number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 3 as reserved memory for reserve number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 4 as reserved memory for reserve number 3.

Furthermore, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a first special chart reserved memory exists. If a first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR4 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A. In other words, if the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserve number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 2 as the reserved memory for reserve number 1, the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 3 as the reserved memory for reserve number 2, and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 4 as the reserved memory for reserve number 3.

The CPU 103 then determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A or the second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B (and also determines the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2 if the variable display result is a jackpot), and then in the variation pattern determination process (see Figure 6), determines the variation pattern type using a variation pattern type determination table that differs depending on the game state, variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that will execute the variable display, and then determines the variation pattern using a variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the determined variation pattern type, game state, number of reserved memories, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 is able to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process based on the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

[Performance control data storage area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190, for example, as shown in Fig. 11-15(A), as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 131SG190 shown in Fig. 11-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 131SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 131SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A shown in Figure 11-15 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of four commands - a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command) - is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol reserved memories in the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A correspond to the reserved memory counts, and storage areas (entries) are reserved for storing these start win slot designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, reserved memory count notification commands, and reserved display flags separately for the first and second special symbol reserved memories.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in Figure 11-15 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are deleted from the start winning time received command buffer 131SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As mentioned above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied into the active display buffer 131SG194B. Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-15 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, an area for storing the start winning specification command, an area for storing the pattern specification command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory count notification command, and an area for storing the reserved display flag is provided.

In this embodiment, if a start win occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory count notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A. The reserved display flag is set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special symbol hit waiting process that is executed when variable display ends.

The pending display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the pending display or the active display corresponding to the variable display currently in progress. Details will be provided later, but in this embodiment, the display mode of these pending displays and active displays (the value of the pending display flag) can indicate the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

[Starting winning determination process]
11-16 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 6. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (131SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (131SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. When the number of reserved memories of the first special chart in 131SGS102 is not the upper limit value (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 131SGS101 is off (131SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 131SGS102 has reached the upper limit (131SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (131SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (131SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. When the second reserved symbol count is not the upper limit value in 131SGS105 (131SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106).

After executing either process 131SGS103 or 131SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 (131SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display results of the special symbol or decorative symbol and the variable display mode, including the variable display time.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (131SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process has finished.

Following processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (131SGS112). Then, it performs settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (131SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in Figure 4 after the special symbol process process has ended.

After executing the processing of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

[Random value determination process when winning]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by the 131SGS112 of FIG. 11-17 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this embodiment, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (FIG. 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" and to set the game state to a jackpot. Furthermore, the variable pattern setting process (FIG. 6) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a game ball is detected in the starting winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at S112 at the time of winning to determine whether or not a jackpot symbol is to be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting winning port begins, that is, before it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120, etc., will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold warning presentations, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game status (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in Figure 11-3 (B) (step 131SGS122). Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the range for determining a jackpot, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss is set to be sent (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the game state is normal (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is normal, the miss variable pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is in time-saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not time-saving state B, that is, if the gaming state is time-saving state A or a special state, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126e). If the gaming state is time-saving state B, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (C) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Also, in step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it determines whether the game state is normal (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is normal, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(D). If the game state is time-saving state A or high probability state, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7(E). If the game state is time-saving state B, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(F), and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (steps 131SGS130b, 131SGS130d, and 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109 and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). For example, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of non-reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be non-reach; if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of normal reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be other (normal reach); and if the random number value MR3 is any of low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category is determined to be super reach. Then, the system sets up the transmission of a variable category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 11-17 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the winning random number determination process (step 131SGS132).

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 5.

[Game control main processing]
11-18 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S1 to S7, steps S8 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when a performance control command instructing restoration from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter, which counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a rescue time reduction count designation command upon restoration to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 125, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction count designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is executed, a rescue time reduction count designation command is transmitted, and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, a command specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time and a command specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time are sent separately from the command at the time of restoration, but this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of restoration (e.g., a power-on command) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time shortening is reached.

In addition, if a RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, the initialization process in step S8 executes a clearing process on the area including the area for the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, if a RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900." That is, in this embodiment, if a jackpot does not occur even after 900 variable displays have been executed after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, rescue time reduction will occur and the machine will be controlled to time reduction state B. Note that in this embodiment, since the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also determine the initial value to set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is "900" in this embodiment), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions during recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed. This means that the variable display will not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be managed reliably.

In this embodiment, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not a limitation; the rescue time reduction counter may be configured not to be initially reset when the RAM clear process is executed. In this configuration, gameplay can be started from the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, which reduces the investment required to trigger the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be designed to avoid any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

[Time-saving flag, probability flag]
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, a time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

Time-saving flag A is set when control is in time-saving state A via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state A, or when 110 times of time-saving control end and control returns to normal state).

Time-saving flag B is set when the game is in time-saving state B, which is controlled via rescue time-saving. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern are executed after RAM is cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern are executed in a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, when 1100 time-saving controls end and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The probability variable flag is set when the game is controlled to the probability variable state. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state when the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag is set accordingly. This probability variable flag is cleared when the probability variable state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the probability variable state, when the 110th probability variable control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the probability variable flag is cleared when a YES determination is made in step 131SGS69A of Figure 11-20 (described below), indicating that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the probability variable state.

[Special pattern normal processing]
11-19 and 11-20 are flowcharts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory count (step 131SGS51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the total reserved memory count counter, which counts the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. If the total reserved memory count is not zero, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count is zero (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it checks whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter, which counts the second reserved memory count, is zero. If the second reserved memory count is not zero, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) to data indicating "second" (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps SGS52 to S54 in step 131, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for initiating the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for initiating the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in the accompanying drawings. For example, the system may be configured to execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 corresponding to first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 corresponding to second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted will always match the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total number of pending memories by 1. That is, it decrements the count value of the total number of pending memories counter by 1 (step 131SGS57). The CPU 103 also stores the value of the total number of pending memories counter before the count value was decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step S131SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is low probability), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low-probability jackpot determination value. Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is high probability), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high-probability jackpot determination value. If the value of the random number for determining a win matches one of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol has been selected as a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 131SGS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has occurred (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing normal special symbol processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this embodiment, time-saving state A is entered based on the occurrence of jackpot A, and time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot occurs even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this embodiment) have been completed. However, it is anticipated that the variable display result of a variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of a variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, control is configured to enter time-saving state A based on the jackpot occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter, which counts the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter (step 131SGS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). If the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to decrement the time-saving count counter before counting the number of variable displays up to the rescue time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onward, but this processing configuration is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving count counter may be decremented after counting the number of variable displays up to the rescue time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onward. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature, if the time-saving count counter is set to "110" (see step 131SGS172) and then the decrement process is executed, the value of the time-saving count counter will be decremented by one. Therefore, in the case of a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature, the time-saving count counter may be incremented by one again after the decrement process. Alternatively, the time-saving count counter may be set to "111" in advance, which is one more than the value of the time-saving count counter.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variable flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variable flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 131SGS69A, if the game is in a probability variable state, the processing of steps 131SGS70 and subsequent steps (particularly the processing of step 131SGSS71) is not performed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a probability variable state (in this embodiment, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the probability variable flag is not set (i.e., if the game is not in a probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS84 without executing the processing from step 131SGSS70 onwards. However, this is not limited to this configuration. When the probability variable flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70 but the processing of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be updated, but a rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter that has not been updated may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, this means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (the game is controlled to time reduction state B, or the game is controlled to the normal state after 1,100 fluctuations in time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not yet occurred, which would have triggered the setting of the rescue time reduction counter to 900. Furthermore, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 131SGS71). Furthermore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 131SGS71, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that a rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 131SGS75). The CPU 103 then proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72; Yes), CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as the EXT data and controls the transmission of command 957FH to the performance control CPU 120 as a rescue time reduction count designation command (step 131SGS76). Next, CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this embodiment, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 131SGS77). Whether the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is reached is in units of 100, CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and performs control to send a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, CPU 103 performs control to send command 9601H as a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, CPU 103 performs control to send command 9608H as a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the hype effects and countdown effects described below.

Also, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (to "900") at the time of rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may be sent only the first time rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it determines that there will be a jackpot A, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "2." If it determines that there will be a jackpot B, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "3." If it determines that there will be a jackpot C, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "7." If it determines that there will be a miss, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "-." The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping symbol of the special symbol in a stopping symbol memory area provided in RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer is running (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not running, the CPU 103 performs a derived display of the special symbol stop symbol (step 131SGS132). Then, it determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, game status flags such as the time-saving A flag, time-saving B flag, and probability variable flag are cleared (step 131SGS134), the time-saving count counter is cleared (step 131SGS135), and a jackpot start command corresponding to the jackpot type is set for transmission, proceeding to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). Note that the set jackpot start command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 131SGS147. If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the rescue time-saving determination flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag, indicating time-saving state B, is set (steps 131SGS141 and 131SGS142). Furthermore, the time-saving count counter is set to 1100, which corresponds to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving), and a time-saving state B designation command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS143 and 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 starts to light up, and the transmission of the right-hit LED lighting notification command is set up (steps 131SGS145 and 131SGS146). The right-hit LED lighting notification command that has been set up for transmission is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

Then, the pattern determination period timer is set to a value corresponding to the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds, and a pattern determination command is set to be sent, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). The pattern determination command set to be sent is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a game state designation command according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. The game state designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 5).

If the symbol determination period timer is running in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 131SGS151). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 131SGS152). If the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 131SGS153). If the derived stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, the state transitions in this embodiment will be described. Figures 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining the state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Furthermore, even if the result is a miss, if the rescue time-saving mode is activated (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the special probability mode, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving mode A), the game will be controlled to time-saving mode B (a time-saving mode via rescue time-saving mode (low probability/high base mode)).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled back to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the state will be controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state will be controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state will be controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1,100 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the game will be controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if the rescue time-saving state is entered (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the probability variable state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A, but this control method is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times can be compared with the number of time-saving times (110 in this embodiment) that would occur if the game ball did not enter the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, this would be a disadvantageous gameplay for the player, so the state transitions are explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

[Performance control process processing/preview notice]
As shown in Figures 11-23 and 11-24, in the advance notice setting process of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display and the reserved display is determined by setting the reserved display flag to either 0 or 2 at the timing when a start winning occurs (the timing when the start winning entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command are newly stored as reserved memory in the start winning entry reception command buffer shown in Figure 11-15 (B)), and the display mode of these active display and reserved display can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach," it is determined with a 95% probability that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the hold display flag is set to "0"), it is determined with a 5% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern α (the value of the hold display flag is set to "1"), and it is determined with a 0% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern β (the value of the hold display flag is set to "2").

Also, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "other (normal reach)", it is determined with a 90% probability that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0"), it is determined with a 10% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1"), and it is determined with a 0% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2").

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach," the predictive preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "0") 70% of the time, the predictive preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "1") 20% of the time, and the predictive preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "2") 10% of the time.

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "jackpot," it is determined that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 5%, that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 30%, and that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 65%.

Furthermore, after the execution of the advance notice setting process, the following processes are executed: pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), remaining number of times rescue time reduction etc. has been reached display update process (step 131SGS163), and rescue time reduction arrival notification effect execution process (step 131SGS164). The pending display/active display update process executes processes such as starting to display the pending display or active display in a display mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag, erasing the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the end of the variable display, and hiding or starting to display the pending display or active display depending on the progress of the effect during the variable display. The remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display update process executes processes such as updating the value of the remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of each variable display, and starting to hide or display the remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display 131SG005Z depending on the progress of the effect during the variable display. The rescue time-saving arrival notification display execution process executes processing to execute a rescue time-saving arrival notification display that notifies players that they have been controlled to time-saving state B, starting from the timing at which the variable display ends when the number of variable displays reaches 900.

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11. In this process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A in association with buffer number "1-1" is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (step 131SGS602). The first special symbol reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1-1" through "1-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one position at a time (step 131SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "1-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift it to.

Furthermore, in step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not on, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS605). Furthermore, the second special symbol reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one position at a time (step 131SGS606). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift it to.

If the second special chart variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the performance control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, it determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols based on the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a non-reach (non-reach miss), the stopped symbols are determined to be a "non-reach" combination such as "124" or "578" (non-reach mode, non-reach miss mode) with a 100% probability. Also, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a normal reach (normal reach miss), the stopped symbols are determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with a 95% probability, and to be an odd number "reach" combination other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 5% probability.

Also, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a super reach (super reach miss), the stopping symbol is determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with an 80% probability, an odd number other than 7 "reach" combination such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 19% probability, and a 7 symbol "reach" combination such as "767" or "787" (7 reach mode, 7 reach miss mode) with a 1% probability.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot," the stopped symbols are determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "222" or "666" (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) with a 20% probability, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" or "555" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach jackpot mode) with a 50% probability, and a "reach" combination of the 7 symbols "777" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) with a 30% probability.

In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol, followed by a reach with an odd symbol other than a "7", a reach with an even symbol, and a non-reach, in that order (expected jackpot likelihood based on decorative symbol: reach with a "7" symbol > reach with an odd symbol other than a "7" > reach with an even symbol > non-reach). For this reason, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the decorative symbol will be in a reach state and which symbol will be in a reach state.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbols are an even-numbered combination or an odd-numbered combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The expected probability of a jackpot may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol combination that results in a jackpot, or the expected probability of a jackpot when a jackpot is reached may differ depending on the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols.

Returning to Figure 11-25, after determining the decorative symbol to be stopped, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display preview effect determination process (step 131SGS609) to determine whether or not to execute a variable display preview effect that suggests the variable display result may be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table (presentation control pattern) according to the variable pattern, game status, variable display result, and the result of the variable display preview presentation determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer (step 131SGS611).

Each process table has a performance control pattern set. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (131SGS612). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (131SGS613). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

[About the effects during variable display]
When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, it determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not to execute a reach effect, the form, the execution start timing, etc. based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command and the variable display results such as special patterns and decorative patterns specified by the variable display result specification command in the subsequent variable display start setting process of step S171, sets an effect control pattern that reflects the determined results, etc., and controls the variable display of the decorative pattern, reach effects, etc. based on the set effect control pattern.

[About the performance control pattern]
As shown in Figures 11-27 and 11-28, the performance control patterns are set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 to PA2-19, and PB1-1 to PB1-18.

Non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set as presentation control patterns corresponding to variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, in which the decorative symbols do not reach a reach state and result in a non-reach miss. Variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are variation patterns designated in the normal state, PA1-3 is a variation pattern selected in time-saving state A or probability variable state, and PA1-4 is a variation pattern selected in time-saving state B. In the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative symbols ends is set to differ depending on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-1 is a pattern in which a normal reach effect ("Normal" in the diagram) is executed, in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state, and then the reach is lost. Variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in the normal state, time-saving state A, and probability variable state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-2 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-4 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach performance ("low base strong A" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-5 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-6 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-7 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach performance ("low base strong B" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-8 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-9 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-10 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-11 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-13 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all fluctuation patterns specified in normal conditions.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-16 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach A reach performance ("High Base A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-17 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach B reach performance ("High Base B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-18 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach C reach performance ("High Base C" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-19 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach D reach performance ("High Base D" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all selected in time-saving mode A and special mode.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-1 is set to execute a normal reach effect followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-2 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-3 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-4 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-5 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-6 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-7 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-8 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-9 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-10 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach C reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-11 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-13 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all fluctuation patterns selected under normal conditions.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-16 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach C reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-17 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach D reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Variation patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all selected in time-saving mode A and special mode.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-18 is a pattern that results in a jackpot without executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach. Variation pattern PB1-18 is the variation pattern selected in time-saving state B.

[About the flow of the effects during variable display]
11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of the effect during variable display in the normal state. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specifying command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, controls so that the decorative pattern does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach presentation in which the decorative symbols are in a reach state, and then controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and so that a jackpot is reached if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-2, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then notifies the user of a miss as the result of the low base weak super reach A reach effect, causing the reach to be a miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-3, it executes a normal reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then notifies the user of a miss as the result of the low base weak super reach B reach effect, causing the reach to be a miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-4, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-2, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-5, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-3, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect, and then controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a miss if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-6, and controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-4, it controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a jackpot if a jackpot is announced, and a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-7, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-5, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, it executes a normal reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-8, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-6, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-9, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is controlled to announce a miss as the effect result, resulting in a reach miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-7, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is controlled to announce a jackpot as the effect result, resulting in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-10, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-8, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-11, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-9, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-12, the effect results in a miss for the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and the effect is controlled so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-10, the effect results in a jackpot for the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and the effect is controlled so that a jackpot is announced.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-13, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-11, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-14, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-12, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot occurs.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the effect of the low base strongest super reach reach effect is controlled so that a miss is announced and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-13, the effect of the low base strongest super reach reach effect is controlled so that a jackpot is announced and the jackpot is achieved.

In this way, under normal conditions, a jackpot is announced as the result of the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, and is not controlled to a jackpot. Only the reach performance of low base strong super reach A-C, which is executed via the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, low base strongest reach, and low base strong super reach A-C, which is executed without going through the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, and low base strongest super reach, will announce a jackpot as the result of the performance and be controlled to a jackpot.

Figure 11-30 shows the flow of effects during variable display in time-saving state A and probability variable state. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state A and probability variable state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-3, it controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach reach presentation, and then controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16 or PB1-14, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a high base super reach A reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16, it controls so that a miss is announced as the result of the high base super reach A reach effect, resulting in a reach miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-14, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the result of the high base super reach A reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-17 or PB1-15, it executes a normal reach reach presentation, then executes a high base super reach B reach presentation. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-17, the high base super reach B reach presentation results in a miss, and the CPU 120 controls the high base super reach B reach presentation to result in a reach miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-15, the high base super reach B reach presentation results in a jackpot, and the CPU 120 controls the high base super reach B reach presentation to result in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-18 or PB1-16, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a high base super reach C reach effect, and then controls the high base super reach C reach effect so that a miss is announced as the result of the high base super reach C reach effect if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-18, resulting in a reach miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-16, it controls the high base super reach C reach effect so that a jackpot is announced as the result of the high base super reach C reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19 or PB1-17, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a high base super reach D reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19, the high base super reach D reach effect is controlled to announce a miss and result in a reach miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-17, the high base super reach D reach effect is controlled to announce a jackpot and result in a jackpot.

In this way, in the time-saving mode A and the probability variable mode, the result of a jackpot or miss is announced in the normal performance or in the reach performance of high-base super reaches A to D, which are controlled after the normal performance, and then the performance is controlled to a jackpot or miss; no further reach performance is executed from the high-base super reaches A to D, which are controlled after the normal performance.

Figure 11-31 shows the flow of effects during variable display in time-saving state B. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-4, it controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, it controls the decorative symbols so that they do not become ready to win and result in a jackpot.

In this way, in time-saving state B, the game is controlled so that misses and jackpots always result in a non-reach state.

[About the Super Reach Effects]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute reach effects for super reaches during variable display. The reach effects for super reaches include reach effects for low base weak super reaches A and B, low base strong super reaches A to C, and low base strongest super reaches that are executed in the normal state as described above, as well as reach effects for high base super reaches A to D that are executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. In the following, the reach effects of normal reaches and super reaches may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively; the reach effects of low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, and low base strongest super reach may be simply referred to as low base weak reach A effects, low base weak reach B effects, low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, low base strong reach C effects, and low base strongest reach effects, respectively; and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D may be simply referred to as high base reach A effects, high base reach B effects, high base reach C effects, and high base reach effects, respectively.

The Super Reach effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and also announces the final result of whether or not a jackpot will occur (for Low Base Weak Super Reach A and B, the result will be whether the jackpot will develop into Low Base Strong Super Reach A-C or Low Base Strongest Super Reach, or whether it will be a miss).

In addition, each type of Super Reach effect has a title assigned to it, and each Super Reach effect is made up of a title display part where the title of the Super Reach effect is displayed, and an introductory part that follows the title display part and ends when the result of the effect is announced.

[Variations of Low Base Weak Reach A and B Effects]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect does not include a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, but it may also be a fluctuation pattern PB1-JA in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A effect, or a fluctuation pattern PB1-JB in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach B effect.

In this configuration, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach A presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach A presentation, resulting in a jackpot; and when it receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JB, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach B presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in a jackpot. Therefore, in this configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, it is either announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach effect, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B effect, it is either announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach effect.

Furthermore, the configuration may not include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B effect. In such a configuration, during the introductory part of the low base weak reach A or B effect, it will be announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the following examples, a configuration may be applied that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after the execution of a low base weak reach A or B effect without developing into another super reach effect.In this case, the configuration determines the probability of a jackpot for the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, so that the jackpot expectation for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach A effect is higher than the jackpot expectation for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach A effect.

[About the low base weak reach A effect]
Figure 11-32 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A effect is executed, and Figure 11-33 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and, when a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the relatively large decorative symbols (decorative symbols (large)). As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a1), at a predetermined timing, the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5, resulting in a normal reach effect. Thereafter, it executes the operation prompt effect A described below. As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), it executes a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (daytime sky background) displayed during the changing of the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state before the white flash performance changes to the background (corridor background) of the low-base weak reach A performance after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) displayed in reach mode before the white flash performance changes to reach mode of a decorative pattern (small) that is smaller than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in Figure 11-33, the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" of the low base weak reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative pattern of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" moves toward its fixed position and stops at that position. When the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative patterns of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears behind the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in a fixed position, and a subtitle "Try and catch him if you can!", corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-33, no audio is output reading the title. Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low-base weak reach A effect runs for a longer period of time than the title start period of the low-base weak reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in their fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the expectation indication display, described below, is not displayed during the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect. As shown in Figures 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect is the same as the background of the title display part (the background of the hallway), the animated scene that started in the title display part (the scene featuring the enemy character "Bakuchu") also continues throughout the introductory part, the line displayed in the title display part "Try and catch him if you can!" also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a7) to (a8), when the audio output of the line displayed in the title display part "Try and catch him if you can!" ends, the scene switches to the next animated scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that develops from a low base weak super reach A to one of low base strong super reaches A-C or a low base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introductory part, and then develops the effect into a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base weak super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and the low base weak reach A effect does not result in a jackpot. Then, the image display device 5 displays a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached after the execution of a low base weak reach A effect without progressing to another super reach effect, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached after the execution of a low base weak reach A effect after a low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command without progressing to another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will notify the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" has captured the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low base weak reach A effect has resulted in a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then cause the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base weak reach B effect]
Figure 11-34 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and Figure 11-35 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and specifies a variable pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach B using the variable pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative symbols (large), and executes a normal reach effect in which, at a predetermined timing, the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5, resulting in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1). It then executes operation prompt effect A, described below, and, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), executes a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach B effect.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (daytime sky background) displayed during the change of the decorative symbol (large) in the normal state before the white flash effect changes to the background of the low-base weak reach B effect after the white flash effect (a background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table), and the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode before the white flash effect changes to the reach mode of a decorative symbol (small) that is smaller than the decorative symbol (large) after the white flash effect.

As shown in Figure 11-35, the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect includes a title start period from when part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left small decorative pattern of the left and right small decorative patterns of the reach state, and then the entire title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is moved toward its home position and stopped there. When the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stopped in its home position, part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative patterns of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), a subtitle "Let's have a hockey match! I won't lose!", corresponding to a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face off on either side, is displayed below the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-35, no audio is output reading the title. Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect runs for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the expectation indication display, described below, is not displayed during the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background showing the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" facing each other on either side of a hockey table), the video scene that started in the title display part (the scene showing the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other on either side) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line that was displayed in the title display part "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figure 11-34 (b7) to (b8), when the audio output of the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!", ends, the video switches to the next scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the teammate character "Yume Yume" hits the puck back).

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that develops from a low base weak super reach B to one of low base strong super reaches A-C or a low base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introductory part, and then develops the effect into a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base weak super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to win against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part, and the low base weak reach B effect does not result in a jackpot, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without progressing to other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B effect, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without progressing to other super reach effects is specified by a variation pattern specification command after the execution of a low base weak reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 will notify the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the game against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part and that a jackpot has been reached as a result of the low base weak reach B effect (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then cause the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base strong reach A effect]
Figure 11-36 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach A effect is executed, and Figure 11-37 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, and develops it into a low base strong reach A specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach A specification.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" of the low base strong reach A effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period following the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background for the low-base strong reach A effect (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period following the selection effect, the selection result image displayed before the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" filled the entire display area will switch to the background of the low-base strong reach A effect (the background displaying ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends. The display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state will remain even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect will remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low-base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative symbol (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" moves toward its fixed position and stops in that position. When the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is stopped in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" will be displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base-strong reach A effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c4), the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indicator hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11-37, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), an expectation indicator is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!". As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low-base-strong reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base-strong reach A effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu Together!" displayed in its fixed position is moved from its fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title text disappears. The expectation indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title text until all of it disappears. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-37, during the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base-strong reach A effect. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base-strong reach A effect is the same as the background after the title start period in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway), and the video scene that started in the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) also continues throughout the introductory part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introductory part starts, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and a subtitle corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, "Try and catch me if you can!", is displayed, and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A performance, during the title display part, speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" will capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low base strong reach A effect (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" will not capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low base strong reach A effect, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach A effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" As shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), the expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. Meanwhile, the expectation level indication displayed in the title display part also indicates the expectation level using multiple objects, so if the reserve and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserve and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserve and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserve and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, since it is rare for a game ball to enter the second start entry port under normal circumstances, when the number of reserved balls in the first special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being variable displayed, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating maximum expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. Therefore, even if the low base strong reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, and to prevent the expectation indication display from being mistakenly interpreted as indicating maximum expectation.

In the example shown in Figure 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part. However, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period. Even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects that make up the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level suggestion display.

Furthermore, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending display and active display, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. In the example shown in Figure 11-36, characters are displayed on a layer in front of the pending and active displays, and are enlarged until the entire display area is filled, thereby hiding the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled. However, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c4), the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5) to (c6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c6), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach A effect is changed from black to gold, thereby suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach A effect.

When a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation develops into a low base strong reach A presentation, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x1) to (x2), if there are any remaining reserved numbers, the reserved and active displays are displayed during the prologue display period until the entire display area is filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume." In the subsequent title display part, the expectation indication display is hidden, and the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!" is not displayed in its fixed position. Instead, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x3) to (x4), five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously with the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!". If the color of the star-shaped objects is then changed from black to gold, the objects that constitute the expectation indication display will be displayed immediately after the objects that constitute the reserved and active displays are hidden, which could result in confusion between the reserved and active displays and the expectation indication display. In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation indication display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation indication display is hidden during the title display period, and the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" is displayed in a fixed position and maintained for a predetermined time, and then the expectation indication display is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!", thereby preventing the pending display and active display from being confused with the expectation indication display.

[About the low base strong reach B effect]
Figure 11-39 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B effect is executed, and Figure 11-40 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, and develops it into a low base strong reach B specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach B specification.

When a low-base weak reach A or B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A or B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A or B effect is switched to a background specifically for the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period following the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioning from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B effect (a background where ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4), part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" appear from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative pattern of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" move toward their fixed position and come to a standstill in that position. When the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative patterns of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level indication hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level indication is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle." As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle," which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. The expectation indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title characters until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-40, during the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right). At the start of the introductory part, the background dedicated to title display in the title display part switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" face off in town). The introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect starts with an animated scene in which the enemy character "Robo" faces forward in a position farther back from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face off in a position nearer to the player with their backs to each other. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo," located at the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana," located at the front as seen from the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the regular positions where the title text "Shocking Robo Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I won't lose!" is displayed, corresponding to the scene in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face off against the enemy character "Robo," and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B performance, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display part, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach B, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the low base strong reach B presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach B, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a low base strong reach B presentation result that the jackpot is not, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach B effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" together with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle." The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5), and the expectation suggestion display is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low base strong reach B effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation level suggestion display from being mistakenly recognized as being at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach B performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d2) to (d3), the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending and active displays during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. Furthermore, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, allowing the pending and active displays to be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base-strong reach B effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d4), the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indicator hidden. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5)-(d6), the expectation indicator is displayed below the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle." At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indicator are displayed in black. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d6), the color of 3.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base-strong reach B effect is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base-strong reach B effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active indicators and the expectation indicator.

[About the low base strong reach C effect]
As the low base strong reach C effect has many things in common with the aforementioned low base strong reach B effect, we will omit the diagram for the low base strong reach C effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, and develops it into a low base strong reach C effect. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a selection effect described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach C effect.

When a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. During the drop effect, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect is switched to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" of the low base strong reach C effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

During the prologue display period following the fall effect, the background dedicated to the fall effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background for the low-base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioning from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach C effect (a background where ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode, and then the entire title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" moves toward its fixed position and stops in that position. When the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is stopped in its fixed position, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9," part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C effect, first, the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication display hidden, and during this time, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, an expectation level indication display is displayed below the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle." The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed for a longer period of time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C effect, the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle", which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation level indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title characters until all of it disappears. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, during the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect. The background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and at the start of the introductory part, it switches from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect (a background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" face off in town). The introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect starts with an animated scene in which the enemy character "Dai Robo" is facing forward on the far side from the player's perspective, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" are facing each other on the near side from the player's perspective. At this time, both the enemy character "Big Robo", located at the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana", located at the front as seen from the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the regular positions where the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle for the line "I'll never lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" face off against the enemy character "Big Robo", and the audio of the line displayed in subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C performance, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display part, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the low base strong reach C presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach C, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a reach miss as the presentation result of the low base strong reach C presentation, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach C effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle." The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is made up of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low base strong reach C effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation suggestion display from being mistakenly perceived as having the highest expectation.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending and active displays during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. The pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, allowing the pending and active displays to be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach C effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle." At this time, in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication are displayed in black, and then the color of four of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach C effect is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C effect. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the Low-Base Strongest Reach Performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, developing it into a low base strongest reach specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, developing it into a low base strongest reach specification.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect includes a title start period from when part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e3), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, while the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained. At this time, the display area is completely filled with a portion of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In addition, the portion of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is displayed in the display area appears overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are stopped in their fixed position, with the reduced size so that all of the characters are visible in the display area. When the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is reduced in size and stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" for the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach effect.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is stationary in its fixed position will be displayed with a portion overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period transitioning from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!", and when the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in a reduced size in its fixed position, the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Additionally, during the title start period that transitions from the drop effect, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are hidden while the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". Note that the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the title start period ends.

Furthermore, during the title start period following the selection effect, the selection result image (here, the title image of the low-base strongest reach effect) of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", and when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is stationary in its fixed position at a reduced size, the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" in a reduced size in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the display of the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during this time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" in a smaller size than the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In this case, the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when they are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the reverse manner to when they are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In other words, the trajectory of each part of the title characters as the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory of each part of the title characters as the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with parts of the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" in a manner that differs from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-42, during the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low-base weak reach A effect and the low-base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right). After the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title text "Catch Bakuchu with six people!" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect. The introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect starts with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu." Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle is displayed in response to the scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu", saying "Try and catch him if you can!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach performance, during the title display part, speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and speakers 8L and 8R do not output audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low-base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters will capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low-base strongest reach effect (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a reach miss after a low-base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters will not capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a low-base strongest reach effect not resulting in a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the low-base strongest reach effect expectation indication]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" As shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), the expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation suggestion display from being mistakenly perceived as having the highest expectation.

Furthermore, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e2) to (e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, so that only a portion of the text is visible in the display area. It is then reduced to a size where all of the text is visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six Players!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden. Then, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six Players!". In this case, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication are displayed in black. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), the color of 4.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base strongest reach effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation indication.

[Modifications of the title display part]
Figure 11-43 shows the image transition in modified title display parts of low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach C effect, and low base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect, it first executes a blackout effect, displaying the entire display area in black, except for the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the Reach state, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f1). If the pending and active displays were displayed before the blackout effect was executed, the pending and active displays will be hidden when the blackout effect begins.

After the blackout effect continues for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation indication display (in FIG. 11-43 (f2), an expectation indication display for the low-base strongest reach effect) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2).

The effect control CPU 120 then displays the expectation indication display with the background of the entire display area displayed in black for a predetermined period of time, and displays the title character of the corresponding super reach effect (the title character of the low-base strongest reach effect in Figures 11-43 (f3) (f5)) in a fixed position at a size larger than the expectation indication display, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f3) (f5).

When the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach effect are displayed in their regular positions, portions of the title letters are displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state. The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state are any of the numbers "1" to "9," when the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach effect are displayed in their regular positions, portions of the title letters are displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state.

In addition, the title characters are displayed in either a white mode (Figure 11-43 (f3)) or a red mode (Figure 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode is determined in the variable display preview effect determination process of step 131SGS609 described above. In the variable display preview effect determination process, when a variable pattern including the execution of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode with a probability corresponding to whether a jackpot has occurred, and it is also determined whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode with a probability such that the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in a red mode is higher than the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in a white mode. Therefore, when the title text is displayed in red during the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when the title text is displayed in white.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation indication display and the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect, and then, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f4) and (f6), while maintaining the expectation indication display and the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect, displays a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect and outputs audio reading the title from speakers 8L and 8R. Meanwhile, in the title display part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, in the title display part, the title text is displayed for a longer period of time after the start of the blackout effect than the time until the title text is displayed (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as for each of the super reach effects described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this modified version of the title display part, the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect is larger than the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level is indicated by whether it is white or red, which attracts the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation level indication display before the title text, the player's attention can be drawn to the expectation level indication first.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach effect is the same, the expectation level indication is displayed in the same manner. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the title characters are displayed in white or red after the expectation level indication is displayed.

[About high base reach A to D effects]
Figure 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the high base reach A to D effects are being executed, and Figure 11-44 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base reach A to D effects. Note that the high base reach A to D effects are all the same except for the type of enemy character that appears, the title name, and the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, the high base reach A effect will be explained here, and an explanation of the high base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to a high-base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative pattern (large), and as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), executes a normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stops at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing, resulting in a reach mode. Then, the title display part of the high-base reach A effect begins.

As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A effect includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" of the high base reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Battle Reach A" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the high base reach A effect, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high-base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state is maintained, and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed so that part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" fills the entire display area. In addition, the portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears to overlap both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state. Then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced in size, and the reduced size title characters "Battle Reach A" are stopped in their fixed position so that all of the characters are visible in the display area. When the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a reduced size and stationary in a fixed position, part of the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the high base reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title letters "Battle Reach A" that are stationary in their fixed position will appear overlapping with parts of both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the background (night sky background) displayed during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (large) in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state before the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the high-base reach A effect (a background in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A," and when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are stationary in a reduced size and in their fixed positions, a background dedicated to the title display of the high-base reach A effect is displayed as its background. Furthermore, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A." Furthermore, the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the title start period ends.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at the fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A effect, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during this time, as shown in Figure 11-45, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a smaller size than the title characters "Battle Reach A." As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A," which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A." In this case, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A." In other words, the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they expand during the title end period. Therefore, unlike the state in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A." As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the high bass reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high bass reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the high bass reach A effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low bass weak reach A effect and the low bass weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance (the background showing the ally character "Yume Yume" fighting the enemy character "Masked Man") is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background showing the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" on the left and right). After the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance. The introductory part of the high bass reach A performance starts with a video scene showing the ally character "Yume Yume" fighting the enemy character "Masked Man." Also, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle for the line "Fight!" is displayed in response to a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting, and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high bass reach A performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a high base super reach A, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the fight against the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the high base reach A presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a high base super reach A, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" is defeated by the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the high base reach A presentation, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for high base reach A to D effects]
The expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A to D effects are all the same except for the differences in the expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion displays. Therefore, here we will explain the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A effect and omit explanations of the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach B to D effects.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Battle Reach A" along with an expectation level indication in a smaller size than the title text "Battle Reach A." The expectation level indication displayed in the title display part, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

When in time-saving state A or probability variable state in which the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect in which the expectation indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

Furthermore, since it is almost impossible for a game ball to enter the first start entry slot in the time-saving mode A or the probability variable mode, when the number of reserved balls in the second special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed in a variable manner, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating the highest expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. Therefore, even if the high base reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, and to prevent the expectation indication display from being mistakenly interpreted as the highest expectation.

Furthermore, when a high base reach A effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, so that only a portion of the characters are visible in the display area. They are then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect is displayed, the hold and active displays that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the hold and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a high base reach A effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the hold and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the hold and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title letters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication display hidden, and then, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g4) to (g5), the expectation indication display is displayed below the title letters "Battle Reach A." At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A effect (3.5 for the high base reach B effect, 4 for the high base reach C effect, and 4.5 for the high base reach D effect) is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the high base reach A effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation level indication display.

[Title text display position]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where the title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIG.

As shown in Figures 11-46 (A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L. However, since the game board 2 is placed in front of it, the visible area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is the area that is visible through the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, i.e., the area that is not covered by the components that make up the game board 2.

As mentioned above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect. In this case, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed is the position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-46(A), and the position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in Figure 11-46(B).

Similarly, the title text for the low base weak reach B effect is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low base strong reach A effect is "Two people catch the explosive chocolate!", the title text for the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle", the title text for the low base strong reach C effect is "Super Shocking Robot Battle", the title text for the low base strongest reach effect is "Six people catch the explosive chocolate!", the title text for the high base reach A effect is "Battle Reach A", the title text for the high base reach B effect is "Battle Reach B", and the title text for the high base reach C effect is " For both the title characters "Battle Reach C" and the title characters "Battle Reach D" for the high base reach D effect, the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), and where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in Figure 11-46 (B).

Gaming machines are often subject to design changes during the development stage, and changes to the design of the gaming board 2 can change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, thereby changing the visible area of the display area 5L. Gaming machines installed in gaming parlors are sometimes taken back, refurbished, and resold, and in such cases, changes to the design of the gaming board 2 can change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, thereby changing the visible area of the display area 5L. In such cases, if the placement of the title characters in the super reach effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters will be significantly off from the center of the visible area.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any Super Reach performance, the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and also overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2.As a result, the title characters displayed at the fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position where they overlap with both the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S.This prevents the display position of the title characters from deviating significantly from the center of the visible area even if the design of the game board 2 is changed due to design changes or when the game machine is reused.

[Super Reach performance duration]
Figure 11-47 is a diagram showing the presentation time of each super reach presentation, and Figure 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the presentation times of each super reach presentation.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introductory part) is T1-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall presentation time for the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt1c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect are different, the presentation time for the title display part, as well as the presentation time for the title start period, title display period, and title end period, are all the same.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base strong reach A presentation is T2-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time for the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall duration of the low base strong reach C effect is T2-3, the duration of the title display part is Tt2, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt2a, the duration of the title display period is Tt2b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt2c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect are different, the presentation times for the title display part, as well as the presentation time for the title start period, title display period, and title end period are all the same.

The overall presentation time for the low base strongest reach presentation is T3, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt3, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt3a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt3b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt3c.

The overall presentation time for high base reach presentations A to D is T4, and the presentation time for the title display part is Tt4, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt4a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt4b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall presentation time of super reach effects during a low base (normal state) in this configuration, as shown in Figure 11-48 (A), the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the overall presentation time (T3) of the low base strongest reach effect, which has higher jackpot expectations than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In addition, of the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of developing into another super reach effect than the low base weak reach A effect, has an overall presentation time (T1-2) that is set longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A effect. Furthermore, the overall presentation time (T2-3) of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, out of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, is longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, and the overall presentation time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect, out of the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1) of the low base strong reach A effect.

When comparing the presentation times for the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), for all super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations, and high base reach A-D presentations), the presentation time for the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is longer than the presentation time for the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time for the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time for the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is set longer than the presentation time for the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

When comparing the presentation time of the title display part in the super reach effect in this form, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect. Additionally, the presentation time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A-D effects is set shorter than the presentation time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, and low base strongest reach effects.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start period and title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation and the high base reach A to D presentation, as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach A to D presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start periods of super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (F), the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentations, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1a) of the title start periods of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title display periods in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (G), the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title end periods of super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (H), the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3c) of the title end period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this mode, when comparing the presentation time of the text display period of the title display part (the period in the title display part that does not include the prologue period described below, and is the combined period of the title start period, title display period, and title end period) in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base strong reach A presentation has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A presentation and the low base weak reach B presentation. The presentation time (Tt2d) for the character display period of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is longer than the presentation time (Tt1d) for the character display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3d) for the character display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect and the low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2d) for the character display period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start period and title display period in super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (J) (K), in all super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c).

In this mode, when comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state) with the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the overall presentation time (T4) of the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special state) is set shorter than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state).

[About the title text of the Super Reach performance]
Figure 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns in the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text for the low-base weak reach A effect is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title characters (standard size per character) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area containing all title characters) is EJA.

The title text for the low base weak reach B effect is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title text is FJ, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is EJB.

The title text for the low base strong reach A effect is "Catch the Bakuchu together!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is EKA.

The title of the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle," the title has seven characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is EKB.

The title of the low base strong reach C effect is "Great Shock Robot Battle," the title has eight characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is EKC.

The title of the Low Base Strongest Reach performance is "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title is FSK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before the Super Reach performance develops is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after the Super Reach performance develops is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is larger than the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, and the font size FSK of the title characters in the low base strongest reach performance are all smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before the performance develops into a super reach performance, and larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after the performance develops into a super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base strongest reach effect are all smaller than the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the decorative pattern (large) before the effect develops into a super reach effect, and the size of the smallest character making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the title characters in the low base strongest reach effect are all larger than the size of the largest character that can be made up of the decorative pattern (small) after the effect develops into a super reach effect.

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters for the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, are larger than the display area sizes EJA, EJB of the title characters for the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, and the display area size ESK of the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base weak reach C effects, is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters for the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base strong reach C effects.

[About the expected level indication]
Figure 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the expectation indication displayed in the title display section consists of five star-shaped objects and the word "expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level. The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five.

When displaying the expectation level indication, the performance control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), and displays the word "expectation level" to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level. Then, the performance control CPU 120 gradually changes the color of the multiple star-shaped objects that are to change from black to gold, starting from the left. Furthermore, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it back to its normal gold color.

At this time, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the star-shaped object that is changing color, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center to the periphery, and then changes the entire enlarged object to white until the outline disappears, and then displays the star-shaped object with all or half of it changed to gold. In particular, for the second and third star-shaped objects, the CPU 120 enlarges the enlarged star-shaped object to a size where part of it overlaps with part of the word "Expectation Level," which indicates that the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the object in a common manner whether changing the entire star-shaped object from a black to gold or changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), when changing multiple star-shaped objects to gold, the performance control CPU 120 starts highlighting the star-shaped object one block away at the timing (t1) before the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends and returns to normal display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object two blocks away until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends at the timing (t2), and starts highlighting the star-shaped object two blocks away at the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends. In other words, the highlighting of two adjacent star-shaped objects overlaps, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted simultaneously and overlap each other.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an expectation level indication sound from speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of a star-shaped object begins, and when multiple star-shaped objects are changed to gold, it ends the output of the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that began highlighting earlier before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object begins, so that the sound is not output overlapping with the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the next star-shaped object.

[About selection effects]
11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is an effect that specifies which type of super reach effect will be executed when a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is executed directly from a normal reach effect without going through a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect.

When a selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then displays a window in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2), displaying the title of the selection effect in that window. The title of the selection effect displays the message "Upgrade your reach!", suggesting that a selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the effect control CPU 120 displays in the window a title image of the super reach effect and an operation prompt image consisting of a button image imitating the push button 31B and the operation prompt text "Press repeatedly!" to encourage continuous operation of the push button 31B. The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content during the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect, and the title images of the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect also display an indication of the expected level.

The effect control CPU 120 first displays the title image of the Super Reach effect in the window as the title image of the Super Reach effect, which has a jackpot expectation of 0 and the lowest expectation of development to other Super Reach effects. Each time an operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the title image of the displayed Super Reach effect is detected, the CPU 120 switches to the title image of the next Super Reach effect until it shows the title image of the Super Reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title images of the Super Reach effects displayed in the window switch in the following order: the title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has the lowest expectation of development into other Super Reach effects, followed by the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of development into other Super Reach effects than the low base weak reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach B effect, and the title image of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach C effect.

Then, when the title image of the super reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command appears, the effect control CPU 120 detects operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the displayed title image of the super reach effect, and displays a confirmation image in which the operation prompt image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), notifying the player that the super reach effect of the displayed title image will be executed, and then transitions to the title display part of that super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-52, push button 3B was operated three times to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, push button 31B was operated four times to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, push button 31B was operated eight times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, and push button 31B was operated eight times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect. The number of times push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image of the Reach C effect is 10, and the number of times push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong Reach C effect to the title image of the low base strongest Reach effect is 15; the higher the developmental attitude of the Super Reach effect of the title image being switched to other Super Reach effects or the higher the expected jackpot, the more times push button 31B must be operated to switch to the next title image, and the more times push button 31B must be operated.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-52, when a selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects will never be executed, and a super reach effect with a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the low base strong reach A effect will always be executed. The probability that the low base strong reach A effect will be executed is approximately 32.18%, the probability that the low base strong reach B effect will be executed is approximately 30.16%, the probability that the low base strong reach C effect will be executed is approximately 30.30%, and the probability that the low base strongest reach effect will be executed is approximately 7.36%.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 will also display an expectation suggestion display in the title images of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect in the selection effect, just like the title display part. However, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part displays five star-shaped objects in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold gradually change from black to gold in order from the left, whereas the expectation suggestion display displayed in the selection effect displays the number of star-shaped objects out of the five that indicates the expectation of the corresponding super reach effect in gold from the start.

The minimum time required for the title image of the Super Reach effect displayed during the selection effect to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the Super Reach effect multiplied by the time required for one operation of push button 31B. The time required for one operation of push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and to switch from the title image of the Low Base Weak Reach A effect to the title image of the Low Base Weak Reach B effect, push button 31B must be operated three times, and the minimum time required for this is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, the time it takes for the star-shaped object in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, i.e., the time it takes for the suggested expectation level to change by one level, is approximately 300 ms, which is set longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. Therefore, in the selection effect, the effect control CPU 120 can switch the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect in a time shorter than the time it takes for the expected level suggested in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change by one level.

[About effects that can be performed during variable display]
11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, effects that can be executed during variable display include explanatory text display effects, title color change effects, and operation prompt effects A to D.

The explanatory text display effect can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and displays explanatory text suggesting a high chance of a jackpot.

The title color change effect is an effect that can be performed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is an effect that changes the color of the title text from the initial white to red or gold.

Operation prompt effect A is an effect that can be executed in a normal reach effect, and displays an operation prompt image that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will progress to a low-base weak reach effect A or B depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that operation prompt effect A may also be configured to progress not only to a low-base weak reach effect A or B, but also to a low-base strong reach effect A-C or a low-base strongest reach effect depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects depending on the operation of push button 31B. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are notified of a jackpot as a result of the effect, operation prompt effect B may be configured to notify the player of whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach effects A to C and the strongest reach effect. It displays an operation prompt image that prompts you to operate the push button 31B, and displays one of several types of cut-in images depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) that prompts the user to operate push button 31B, and notifies the user of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, depending on the operation of push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 determines during the preview effect determination process of the variable display start setting process whether to execute an explanatory text display effect during variable display, whether to execute a title color change effect and which color to change to, whether to execute operation prompt effect A, whether to display either an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect B, whether to execute operation prompt effect C and whether to display either a cut-in image (A) or a cut-in image (B), and whether to display either a operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect D.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (A), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are executed is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a miss is identified, there is an 80% chance that it will not be executed, and a 20% chance that it will be executed. Furthermore, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a jackpot is identified, there is a 20% chance that it will not be executed, and an 80% chance that it will be executed. In this way, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a jackpot is identified, there is a higher chance that the explanatory text display effect will be executed than if a variation pattern in which a miss is identified. Therefore, the execution of the explanatory text display effect during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests a high possibility of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and the execution time of the low base strong reach A-C effect and the execution time of the title display part remain unchanged regardless of whether the explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effect. However, the variation patterns in which the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed may include a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern with a longer variation time than the first variation pattern, and if the first variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is not executed, and if the second variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is executed using a variation time longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is not determined in the preview effect determination process, but rather whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined depending on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, by determining the first and second variation patterns so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when the explanatory text display effect is executed than when the explanatory text display effect is not executed, the execution of the explanatory text display effect in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (B), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base weak reach A or B effect is executed is identified, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a title color change effect, and if so, what color to change to. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, non-execution (white) is determined 80% of the time, execution (red) is determined 20% of the time, and execution (gold) is not determined. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect develops into a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is identified, non-execution (white) is determined 20% of the time, execution (red) is determined 75% of the time, and execution (gold) is determined 5% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the change in color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects suggests that there is a high possibility of development into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect. Furthermore, since execution (gold) is decided only when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the change in color of the title letters to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects confirms development into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect.

Furthermore, in a configuration that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of a low base weak reach A or B effect, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of a title color change effect may be decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to indicate the high possibility of a jackpot. Also, in such a configuration, execution (gold) may be decided only when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and a jackpot may be confirmed when the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect changes to gold.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (C), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern that results in a miss from a normal reach effect or a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach effect to a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute operation prompt effect A. In this case, if a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, there is a 50% chance that it will not be executed, and a 50% chance that it will be executed. Furthermore, if a variation pattern that develops into a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, there is a 100% chance that it will be executed. In this way, execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, executing operation prompt effect A in a normal reach effect suggests the possibility of it developing into a low-base weak reach A or B effect.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (D), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern is identified in which the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect is a miss, or a variation pattern in which the low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, it is determined whether to display a small operation prompt image or a large operation prompt image. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Furthermore, if a variation pattern in which the result develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the large operation prompt image is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when a large operation prompt image is displayed in operation prompt effect B at the end of the introductory part of a low base weak reach A or B effect, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of the effect developing into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect than when a small operation prompt image is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (E), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, a determination is made as to whether to execute operation prompt effect C, and whether to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B) if operation prompt effect C is executed. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined 50% of the time, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined 30% of the time, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined 20% of the time. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined 5% of the time, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined 30% of the time, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined 65% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of operation prompt effect C is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and therefore, the execution of operation prompt effect C at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. Furthermore, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the cut-in image (B) out of cut-in image (A) and cut-in image (B) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and therefore, the operation prompt effect C is executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects, and it suggests that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot when cut-in image (B) is displayed than when cut-in image (A) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (F), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, it is determined whether to display a small operation prompt image or a large operation prompt image. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the large operation prompt image is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when a large operation prompt image is displayed in operation prompt image D at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, it is suggested that there is a higher chance of a jackpot than when a small operation prompt image is displayed.

[About the explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance.

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yume Yume" as shown in Figures 11-55 (A) to (I), and then enlarges and displays the ally character "Yume Yume" until the entire display area is filled.When an explanatory text display effect is performed during the prologue display period, the explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text, "Surprise!", "Peach tree", and "Great luck!", are displayed in order on a layer in front of the background that the ally character "Yume Yume" enlarges and displays. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory text "Surprise!", moving it quickly from the right side of the display area toward the center and to the left (Fig. 11-56(t1)), as shown in Fig. 11-55(A), then, when it reaches the center, moves it slowly to the left (Fig. 11-56(t2)), as shown in Fig. 11-55(B), and then, as shown in Fig. 11-55(C), moves it quickly again to the left until it disappears from the display area (Fig. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-55(D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Peach Tree" while moving it quickly to the left from the right side of the display area toward the center (Figure 11-56(t4)), and when it reaches the center, as shown in Figure 11-55(E), it displays it while moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56(t5)), and then, as shown in Figure 11-55(F), it displays it while moving it quickly to the left again until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56(t6)).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-55(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Lucky!" while moving it quickly to the left from the right side of the display area toward the center (Figure 11-56(t7)), and when it reaches the center, as shown in Figure 11-55(H), it displays it while moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56(t8)), and then, as shown in Figure 11-55(I), it displays it while moving it quickly to the left again until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56(t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a title color change effect in which the white title text changes to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

During the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 causes some of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move toward a fixed position, and stop them in that position. Then, during the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the white title characters stationary in their fixed positions, as shown in Figure 11-57(A). Then, if the execution of a title color change effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and maintains the white title characters stationary in their fixed positions, as shown in Figures 11-57(B) and (C). Then, during the title end period, the white title characters displayed in their fixed positions move from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, if the execution of a title color change effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and changes the title characters displayed in their fixed positions to appear to glow, as shown in Figure 11-57(D). After time t2 has elapsed, if a change to red has been determined, the title characters change to red, as shown in Figure 11-57(E). If a change to gold has been determined, the title characters change to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57(F). Thereafter, during the title end period, the title characters are moved from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area, maintaining the changed color displayed in their fixed positions, until all of the title characters have disappeared. If the title characters change from appearing to glow to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light on the title characters clears.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B presentations is set to 500 ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is set to 2200 ms, and the presentation time T3 of the title end period is set to 300 ms. During the title display period, the time t1 from the start of the title display period to the title characters changing to a state where they appear to glow is set to 800 ms, the time t2 from the title characters changing to a state where they appear to glow to the title characters changing to red or gold is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from the title characters changing to red or gold to the end of the title display period is set to 1200 ms.

For this reason, as shown in Figure 11-58 (C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in their changed red or gold form during the title display period is longer than the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in their white form during the title display period, and the time (t3 + T3) during which the title characters are displayed in their changed red or gold form during the title display part is longer than the time (T1 + t1) during which the title characters are displayed in their white form during the title display part.

[About Operation Promotion A]
Figure 11-59 shows the execution status of operation promotion presentation A.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect A, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, during normal reach effects.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompt effect A, as shown in Figures 11-59 (A) and (B), during the execution of a normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompt image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompt text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B.

The button image (small) has a remaining time meter that indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the push button 31B is valid. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the effect control CPU 120 executes a whiteout effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C), and then executes a low base weak reach A or B effect, as shown in Figure 11-59 (D).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a loss state, as shown in Figure 11-59 (E).

[About Operation Promotion Presentation B]
Figure 11-60 shows the execution status of operation promotion presentation B.

In low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect B, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, at the end of the introductory part.

When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute operation prompt performance B and to display a small operation prompt image, it displays a small operation prompt image consisting of a small button image resembling push button 31B and small operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-60 (A).

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute operation prompt performance B and to display an operation prompt image (large), it displays an operation prompt image (large) at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-60(B) and (C), which is an image resembling push button 31B and is larger than the small button image, and which consists of operation prompt text (large) "PRESS!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B. In this case, unlike when displaying an operation prompt image (small), the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and combines these multiple button images (large) into a single large button image, and then displays an operation prompt image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompt text (large) "PRESS!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B.

Both the small button image and the large button image have a remaining time meter formed on them, and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, and the fluctuation pattern develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or large operation prompt image as shown in Figure 11-60 (D) and executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls, and then executes a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect as shown in Figure 11-60 (E).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or large operation prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-60 (F), and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a loss as the performance result, as shown in Figure 11-60 (G).

[About operation promotion effect C]
Figure 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation prompting effect C.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect C, which prompts the player to operate push button 31B, in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompting effect C, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) resembling the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) and (B).

The performance control CPU 120 has determined that a cut-in image (A) will be displayed. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in Figure 11-61(C), and a cut-in image (A) showing the ally character "Nana" is displayed, and then the introductory part continues as shown in Figure 11-61(F).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines that a cut-in image (B) will be displayed. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in Figure 11-61 (D), and a cut-in image (B) showing the ally character "Jam" is displayed, and then the introductory part continues as shown in Figure 11-61 (F).

In addition, whether it has been determined that cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B) should be displayed, if operation of push button 31B is not detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the performance control CPU 120 will erase the operation prompt image (small) while continuing the performance of the middle part of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-61 (E), and will continue the introductory part as shown in Figure 11-61 (F).

[Regarding Operation Promotion Effects D]
Figure 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation prompting effect D.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect D, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When it has been determined that a small operation prompt image should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a small operation prompt image consisting of a small button image resembling the push button 31B and small operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62 (A) and (B).

Furthermore, when it has been determined that a large operation prompt image will be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a large operation prompt image at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62(A)(G), which is an image resembling push button 31B and is larger than the small button image, and which consists of large operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B. Unlike when a small operation prompt image is displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple large button images with a transparent background and performs a promotional introduction performance (see Figure 11-60(B)) in which these multiple large button images are combined into a single large button image, and then displays a large operation prompt image consisting of a large button image and large operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B.

If the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the variation pattern indicates a jackpot when the remaining time meter reaches 0, the effect control CPU 120 executes a rainbow effect in which a rainbow pattern swirls across the entire display area while the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) gradually disappears, as shown in Figure 11-62 (C) (H), and then announces a jackpot as the effect result, as shown in Figure 11-62 (D) (I).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the effect control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or the large operation prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-62 (E) (J), and executes a blackout effect in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a loss as the effect result, as shown in Figure 11-62 (F) (K).

[About the operation promotion image]
11-63 is a diagram showing the display mode of the operation prompt image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images that make up the operation prompt image (small) and the operation prompt image (large) while continuously moving alternately left and right as shown in FIG. 11-63(A), and while continuously changing between a state in which the button is not pressed and a state in which the button is pressed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves left and right is different from the interval at which the button changes from a state in which the button is not pressed to a state in which the button is pressed. Therefore, the movement of the button image moving left and right and the movement at which the button changes from a state in which the button is not pressed to a state in which the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complex movement.

[About the jackpot start effect]
Figure 11-64 shows the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in Figure 11-64 (A), after the decorative symbol (large) stops in a jackpot state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot start effect when it receives a jackpot start command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figures 11-64(B) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of flickering flames as the background during the jackpot start presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-64(B), first displays the first half of the jackpot title "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" - "BIG (REG)" - in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(C), gradually reduces the first half of the title "BIG (REG)" until it is reduced in size so that the entire title is visible in the display area, and displays it in a fixed position near the top center of the display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-64(D), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" in the title letters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(E), gradually reduces the size of the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" until it is reduced so that the entire latter half is visible in the display area, and displays it in its usual position below the center of the display area (below the first half of the title letters "BIG").

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a 6-round jackpot game state, the title text will be "REG BONUS," and if the jackpot type is a 10-round jackpot game state, the title text will be "BIG BONUS."

Next, as shown in Figures 11-64(E) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the entire title text "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, then gradually enlarges the title text "BIG BONUS", and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(H), starts the jackpot presentation and switches the display on the image display device 5 to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the jackpot performance, it first displays a right-hit promotion image (large) and a right-hit promotion image (small) to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in Figure 11-64 (H).

The right-hit promotion image (small) consists of the message "Right Hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

The right-hit promotion image (large) is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right-hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow pointing to the right and is larger in size than the arrow image (small). As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right-hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the right side only for the first certain amount of time during the period from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the jackpot game state is entered, after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect, the effect switches to the jackpot mid-game, and a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large) are displayed, suggesting the operation method for the jackpot game state (an operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot mid-game and displays the right-hit prompt image (small) and the right-hit prompt image (large) a predetermined time before the timing at which control is exercised on the main board 11 that gives an advantage by operating the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Therefore, a predetermined period of time after the right-hit prompt image (small) and the right-hit prompt image (large) are displayed, control is exercised that gives an advantage by operating the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In addition, after the title characters are displayed during the jackpot start effect, when the jackpot start effect ends, the title characters are erased, and a switch is made to the next effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the title characters of the jackpot start effect and switches to the next effect in a shorter time than when the title characters are erased during the title end period in the title display part of the super reach effect.

In particular, after the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text in the jackpot start presentation, it switches to the jackpot mid-presentation in one frame (the smallest unit of image update) and displays a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large). The title display portion of the super reach presentation is configured to erase the title text over a certain period of time, rather than one frame, by providing a title end period. However, if the title text is similarly erased over a certain period of time when the presentation switches to the jackpot mid-presentation and displays a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large) after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start presentation, there is a risk that a player may attempt to launch the game ball toward the right play area 2R during the period in which the title text is being erased. However, if the game ball is launched toward the right play area 2R at this timing, the game ball will be wasted because the control that would be advantageous for launching the game ball toward the right play area 2R has not yet begun. In response to this, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text during the jackpot start presentation, and then switches to the jackpot mid-presentation in one frame (the smallest unit of image update) and displays the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), thereby reducing the generation of wasted game balls.

[Display of remaining spins until Yu-time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to a time-shortened state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-shortened times) in which (1) time-shortened control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 the remaining number of times to reach rescue time reduction (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until Yu-time) 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1), which is the remaining variable display number of times until control is switched to time reduction state B (Yu-time).

As shown in Figure 11-65(A), in normal conditions when a normal reach effect, low base weak reach A or B effect, low base strong reach A-C effect, or low base strongest reach effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the upper left corner of the display area. The number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a number between 0 and 900 depending on the number of times remaining). In this case, whether the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is between 0 and 900, the number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in Figure 11-65 (B), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time 131SG005Z even during the normal reach presentation in which the decorative symbol (large) is in a reach state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-65(C), when a normal reach effect develops into a low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time even while the low base weak reach A or B effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in Figures 11-65(D)(E), if a miss is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time even after the low base weak reach A or B effect has ended.

In addition, the system is configured so that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed until the low base weak reach A and B effects end, and the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A and B effects. Furthermore, the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the point when the content indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-65(F), when a normal reach effect or a low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z upon the start of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect. In this case, if the effect develops from a normal reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z at the start of the selection effect. When developing from a low base weak reach A or B effect, if the effect is a low base strong reach A-C effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z along with the pending and active displays during the prologue display period of the title display part. In the case of a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z at the start of the title display part.

Furthermore, when progressing from a low base weak reach A or B effect, the hold display and active display, as well as the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z, can be erased at the timing when the drop effect begins as a result of the execution of operation prompt effect B (the timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)). This allows the timing for erasing the hold display, active display, and remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z to be consistent regardless of whether the effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect.

Then, if a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time again after the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect has ended, as shown in Figures 11-65(G)(H). On the other hand, if a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will leave the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time is cleared until the next time the normal state is reached, as shown in Figures 11-65(I)(J).

Furthermore, if operation prompt effect A is configured to develop into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect in response to operation of push button 31B, remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will continue to be displayed while operation prompt effect A is being executed, and remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will be erased upon the start of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect. With this configuration, remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will be displayed in operation prompt effect A, but remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will not be displayed in operation prompt effects C and D in the subsequent low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect.

[About the Yu-time start effect]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable display cycles without being controlled by a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to time-shortened state B (Yu-time). At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right-hit lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-hit LED lighting notification command, as shown in Figure 11-66 (C). After that, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display when the number of remaining cycles until Yu-time is 0, as shown in Figures 11-66 (A) and (B). Upon receiving the right-hit LED lighting notification command, it displays a right-hit promotion image (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in Figure 11-66 (C). The timing for lighting the right hit lamp 131SG132 and the timing for displaying the right hit promotion image (small) are almost simultaneous, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right hit lamp 131SG132 and then sends a right hit LED lighting notification command, and in response, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right hit promotion image (small), so the right hit lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right hit promotion image (small) is displayed.

When time-saving state B (Yu-time) begins, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-hit lamp 131SG132 lit until time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends. The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of the message "Right Hit" (small) encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-66 (C) to (H), when time-saving state B (Yu-time) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area until time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends.

When the variable display stops and the number of remaining plays until Yu-Time is 0, and a game state designation command specifying time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is received, the effect control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start effect as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

The Yu-Time start effect includes a title start period from when part of the Yu-Time title text "Yu-Time Entering" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Yu-Time Entering" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Yu-Time Entering" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the Yu-Time effect.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Entering Yu-Time" in the same manner as when it displays the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the Yu-Time start effect in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

Specifically, during the title start period, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Yu-time Enter" at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, as shown in Figure 11-66 (D). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Yu-time Enter" so that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters. Thereafter, the presentation control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title characters "Yu-time Enter" as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) (E), and freezes the title characters "Yu-time Enter" in a fixed position at a reduced size so that all of the characters are visible in the display area.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Yu-time Enters" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the title display period. During the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Yu-time Enters" in a fixed position and stops it there, as shown in Figures 11-66 (E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the presentation control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, as shown in Figures 11-66 (F) (G), the presentation control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Yu-Time Entering", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Yu-Time Entering". In this case, the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the reverse manner to when the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Yu-Time Entering". In other words, the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title text "Entering Yu-Time," which is different from the way the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in Figure 11-66 (H), the background changes to the Yu-Time effect, and the Yu-Time effect begins.

During the Yu-Time start effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-hit promotion image (large) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, in addition to the right-hit promotion image (small), and also displays an addiction warning image (message "Be careful not to get addicted!") below the display area.

The right-hit promotion image (large) is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right-hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow pointing to the right and is larger in size than the arrow image (small). The effect control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right-hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side to the right side of the display area throughout the period during which the Yu-time start effect is being executed, as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a miss, it selects variable pattern PA1-4 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms to perform variable display, and is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, it selects variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms to perform variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 is configured to execute the Yu-time start presentation during the period when variable display according to these variable patterns is being performed when control of time-saving state B begins, but the game control microcomputer The microcomputer 100 may be configured to select a time-saving B start variable pattern having a variable time longer than that of variable pattern PA1-4 and corresponding to the Yu-Time start effect when the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B, i.e., when the first variable display based on the first game ball entering the first or second start winning slot after control is set to time-saving state B, results in a miss, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start effect during the period when the variable display based on the time-saving B start variable pattern is being displayed in the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B. In this configuration, if the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B results in a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable display using variable pattern PB1-18, which has a special symbol variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the Yu-Time start effect and stops the decorative symbol (large) in a jackpot mode.

[Title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach effect, the explanatory characters of the explanatory text display effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting effect (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting effect (large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the Super Reach effect are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, with the background image being either a still image (low base strong reach B and C effects, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A-D effects) or a moving image (low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A effect). Furthermore, the number of characters in the title characters of the Super Reach effect is 7 to 13, the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a portion of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the Super Reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the explanatory text is displayed in an active state, with the background image being an active image. The number of explanatory text characters is 3 to 6, the display time (the time from when all characters constituting the explanatory text are displayed until at least a portion of the character string is no longer displayed) of the explanatory text (one of the three explanatory text characters) is LS, the font size of the explanatory text is FS, and the display area size in which the explanatory text (one of the three explanatory text characters) is displayed is ES.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in an animated state, and the background image at that time is an animated image. The title characters of the jackpot start effect have eight characters, the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a portion of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the operation prompt text (small) is displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operation image. The operation prompt text (small) contains three characters, the display time of the operation prompt text (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt text (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompt text (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt text (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the operation prompt text (large) is displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is the operation image. The operation prompt text (large) contains three characters, the display time of the operation prompt text (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt text (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompt text (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt text (large) is displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character, explanatory character, title character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (B), the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is longer than the display times LR, LS, L1P, and L2P of the title character, explanatory character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, the display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, and L2P of the explanatory character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large), and the display times LS and L1P of the operation prompt character (small) and operation prompt character (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory character. Additionally, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P for the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the operation prompt characters (large) are all set longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text display effect to be displayed. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start effect, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (C), the font size F2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FS, FB, and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start effect, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the super reach effect, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large).

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and small operation prompt characters of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, the title characters "BIG BONUS" of the jackpot start effect are first displayed with the first half "BIG" at the top of the fixed position, followed by the second half "BONUS" at the bottom of the fixed position, and then the title characters "BIG BONUS" are gradually enlarged. When the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters comprising the title characters "BIG BONUS" is at its smallest. In this configuration, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the title characters, explanatory characters, and small operation prompt characters of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, when the first half of "BIG" is displayed above the fixed position and the second half of "BONUS" is displayed below the fixed position, the size of the smallest character that makes up the title of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the title, explanation character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect.

In addition, the font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small).

Furthermore, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (D), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, EB, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 is a diagram showing one aspect of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompt characters (small) in the operation prompt performance (small), the operation prompt characters (large) in the operation prompt performance (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the remaining number characters that make up the number of times remaining until Yu-time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters in the Super Reach effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters in the Super Reach effect is FR, and the size of the display area in which the title characters in the Super Reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompt character (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompt character (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompt character (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt character (large) is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompt character (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt character (large) is displayed is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is FY, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the font size of the remaining number of plays until Yu-time is FZ, and the size of the display area in which the remaining number of plays until Yu-time is displayed is EZ.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time, as shown in Figure 11-68 (B), the font size F2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time (XXX times remaining (X is a number between 0 and 900)). Additionally, the size of the smallest character that makes up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FY of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the font size FZ of the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time, as shown in Figure 11-68 (C), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size EY of the title character of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character, operation prompt character (small), and remaining number of times until Yu-Time of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size ER of the title character of the Super Reach effect is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompt character (small) and remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

In this version, when comparing the display time of the title characters for the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, as shown in Figure 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title characters for the Yu-Time start effect is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters for the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, this relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

Comparing the display modes of the title characters in the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect in this form, as shown in Figure 11-68 (E), in the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, the title characters are displayed while shrinking during the title start period, and are erased while expanding during the title end period.

[LED placement]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in Figure 11-69, LED frames LWL1-LWL12 are arranged above the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and surround the left side of the gaming area, while LED frames LWR2-LWR12 are arranged to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, LED logos LL1-LL4 are positioned corresponding to the "POWERFUL II" logo formed on the front of the movable body 32. Furthermore, LED decorations LS1-LS5 are arranged in positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed on the gaming area 2L. Furthermore, LED attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are arranged in positions near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are full-color LEDs made up of RGB (red, green, blue) light-emitting elements. The logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are red LEDs that can emit a single red light, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are white LEDs that can emit a single white light.

[Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 11-70 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism for outputting data to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Note that, hereinafter, the control of turning on, blinking, or extinguishing lamps such as LEDs performed by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on, blink, or extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a brightness data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during a super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in the low-probability, low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in the jackpot gaming state, an ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and time-saving state, is controlled. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-70, the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, if the Super Reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 uses the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to the Super Reach effect in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, if the Super Reach effect develops while the game effect lamps 9 are being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, the game effect lamps 9 are lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. However, when the Super Reach effect ends and the state returns to normal, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. If a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to that game state being controlled. However, if the effect progresses to a Super Reach effect, the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the presentation control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP Reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during a Super Reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and the game returns to a gaming state during a Super Reach effect, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the currently controlled Super Reach effect, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect. However, if an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to that error is used in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP Reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the effect control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is resolved, the performance control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that it had been updating.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""almostoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the "on" and "flashing" modes of each game effect lamp 9 are also referred to as "lighting modes."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described below).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as brightness data is "000," the corresponding LED will be "off." Also, if the brightness data (RGB data) is "111," the corresponding LED will be lit in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when its RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data for logo LEDs LL1-LL4 is "0," logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are "off." Furthermore, when the brightness data (R data) for logo LEDs LL1-LL4 is "1," logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of logo LEDs LL1-LL4 when their R data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the W (White) data, which is defined as the brightness data for decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, is "0," decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are "off." Furthermore, when the brightness data (W data) for decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 is "1," decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of logo LEDs LL1-LL4 when their W data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lit" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lit" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" refers to a state of the game effect lamp 9 other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on" states, including states in which the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly turning on and off or nearly off, and specifically, "flashing" includes alternating over time between brightness data of "2" to "F" and brightness data of "0" or "1." As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the lamp lighting state includes hazy lighting. However, while hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness, flashing differs from hazy lighting in that all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 alternate between turning on and off or nearly off.

[Explanation about the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data tables]
The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to control the lamps to turn on/blink/turn off one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time in accordance with the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 every frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part (for example, various displays in each part of the super reach effect), the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display control it is performing, and sends the extension command to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 11-71 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in Figure 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the title display part of a low-base weak reach A effect, it sends an extension command (B421) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (illuminated locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control for the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about lamps subject to lamp control; it does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) are specified as targets for lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. A child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. ) is specified, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to attaka lamps LA1 to LA4, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, it subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has been timed. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command after receiving an extended command but before a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has elapsed, it will stop the lamp control in progress and perform lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified in the newly received extended command. Note that while it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). This means that even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it can continue the lamp control in progress for a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and the grandchild table: The execution time for lamp control by the table is 500 ms, the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table is 230 ms, and the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table is 600,000 ms, which are specified as the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution times are specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables will be performed: grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed:

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified for grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, and repeats this process for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is first measured, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 500 ms is measured, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600,000 ms is measured. It is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but by setting the maximum lamp control time using the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 may be specified as shown in Figure 11-75. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as the grandchild tables corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, common lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), the following is the data: brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, The order in which lamp control using this brightness data is specified is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms, in the order in which lamp control using this brightness data will be performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following values are specified for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): Brightness data: 0x00000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, Brightness data: 0x00000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms, in the order in which lamp control using this brightness data will be performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the brightness data for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2 and LWR2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6 and LWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7 and LWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), in the brightness data for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 represent the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1. the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6, The values of the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7, the values of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8, and in the brightness data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR2, and the values of the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR3. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

Furthermore, in the brightness data for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LED LL1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL4.

Furthermore, in the brightness data for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W (White) value of decorative LED LS1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS4.

In the brightness data for Attacka Lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA3, and the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA4.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp being controlled. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values ranging from 0 to F. When brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum (e.g., 0), and when brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" brightness data flows through the "R" element. When brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the "1" brightness data flows through the "G" element. When brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the "F" brightness data flows through the "G" element.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can emit light in various colors by passing current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can light up in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. For example, when brightness data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. Furthermore, when brightness data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up magenta. Furthermore, when brightness data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up yellow.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 can emit red light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through the R (Red) element, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 can emit white light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data equally through the three "R," "G," and "B" elements.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, and this process is carried out in the specified order for all specified brightness data. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first counted: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, until 120 ms is counted, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, until 120 ms is counted, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. The CPU 120 outputs 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver, then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is reached: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver until 40 ms is reached. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table by decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., every 10 ms).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in that grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in that grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on a grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 11-72 is a diagram to explain an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is second performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is third performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is fourth performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, It is specified to be executed at 100 ms intervals in the order "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA." For ease of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms as data 4.

When the performance control CPU 120 controls lamps for the second specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 500 ms.However, if the time has not yet reached 500 ms after outputting data 1 to data 4, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with the first data 1. When the timer reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and begins outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table specified by the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms.However, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 to data 4, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, because no next grandchild table is specified in the child table, it will begin outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, which was specified first in the child table. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the time will not reach 600,000 ms, and if the next extension command is received from the display control unit 123 before the time reaches 600,000 ms, it will begin outputting brightness data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified in the newly received extension command.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 11-74, the maximum lamp control time by a child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and this 10-minute data in the parent table serves as a malfunction countermeasure. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control lamps based on performance control commands from the main board 11, but even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control will be performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, preventing different lamps from being controlled one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in the child table in Figure 11-75, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes).The 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table reaches 0, due to the parent table's timer still remaining.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time for lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. This configuration prevents the 10-minute data in the brightness data from causing lamp control to be performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, due to the child table's timer still remaining. By specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table in this way, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination. Furthermore, specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified last in the child table can more effectively prevent problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach effects 1]
Figure 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used in the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in Figure 11-73, whether the effect control CPU 120 is executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, in the title display part it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using a common weak reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A or B effect, it executes a title color change effect in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up red, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to red in the title color change effect, as a brightness data table, whether in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect or the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect. In addition, when the title color change effect is executed in the title display part and changing the title characters to gold, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up gold, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to gold in the title color change effect, as a brightness data table, whether in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect or the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. As shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect as a brightness data table. When a low base weak reach B effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. As shown in Figure 11-73, whether the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, or the low base strong reach C effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common strong reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects as a brightness data table.

The execution times for the introduction parts of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect differ, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table; when a low base strong reach B effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table; and in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach C introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table.

As shown in Figure 11-73, when executing a low-base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part and introduction part using a brightness data table for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A, high base reach B, high base reach C, and high base reach D effects, and as shown in Figure 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common high base reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects as a brightness data table, regardless of whether the high base reach A, B, C, or D effect is being executed.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, when a high base reach A performance is executed, in the introductory part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introductory part of the high base reach A performance as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the introductory part, the lighting pattern specific to the introductory part of the high base reach B performance as a brightness data table. When a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach system reach C introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach system reach D introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach D performance is defined as a brightness data table.

In this way, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using separate weak reach-type weak reach A introduction and weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each effect in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the effect result is introduced in the super reach effect.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A effect is executed or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is provided with a weak reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a weak reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, By sending an extended command specifying the start of a reach-type title, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, by sending an extended command specifying the weak reach-type title display, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance, a common brightness data table may be used for either the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start or the weak reach-type title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A or B effect, if a title color change effect is executed in the title display part, whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) brightness data table, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table.

In addition, whether a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, when a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, or strong reach C introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each effect in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, or low base strong reach C effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the effect result is introduced in a super reach effect.

In this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A effect is executed, a low base strong reach B effect is executed, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects is provided with a strong reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period and the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in the fixed position, and a strong reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. When display control of the title is started, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by sending an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, using the brightness data table: strong reach title start, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether the effect is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, a common brightness data table can be used for either the start of a strong reach title or the display of a strong reach title, and a separate brightness data table with individual content set for the other can be used.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, a strong reach title start that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extended command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, and the display control unit 123 However, by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title start when starting display control for the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can use the brightness data table: strong reach title start to control the lamps of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title display when the display control unit 123 starts display control for the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can use the brightness data table: strong reach title display to control the lamps of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether the effect is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, at least one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue, strong reach title start, or strong reach title display may be a common brightness data table, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables with individual content set for each.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue. The display control unit 123 controls the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, and when it starts display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effects, it sends an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, so that the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in this configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, a common brightness data table may be used for one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue or strong reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, whether a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance is performed, the title display part uses a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance is performed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, or high base reach D introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each performance in the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C, or high base reach D performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the introduction part before the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance.

In this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances is provided with a high base reach series title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in the fixed position, and a high base reach series title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances. When starting display control of the title, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may use the brightness data table: high base reach title start to send an extended command specifying the start of a high base reach title, and may use the brightness data table: high base reach title start to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may use the brightness data table: high base reach title display to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a high bass reach A performance, a high bass reach B performance, a high bass reach C performance, or a high bass reach D performance, the brightness data table may be a common brightness data table for either the high bass reach title start or the high bass reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual content set for the other.

In addition, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the execution time of which is not shared with other super reach effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which defines the series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table, in the title display part and introduction part, thereby reducing the number of brightness data tables.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach-type weak reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach-type weak reach B title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base strong reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table for the title display part. When controlling the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach series strong reach B title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the display part and executing a low base strong reach C effect, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach series strong reach C title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as the brightness data table for the title display part. This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach series common title as the brightness data table in the title display part.When a high base reach A performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach A title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table in the title display part, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach B title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table in the title display part. When a high base reach C effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach-type reach C title, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table for the title display part, and when a high base reach D effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach-type reach D title, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the high base reach D effect as the brightness data table for the title display part.This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display parts of the high base reach A effect, high base reach B effect, high base reach C effect, and high base reach D effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction in the title display part and introduction part, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table. However, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title in the title display part brightness data table, which defines a lighting pattern unique to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, and the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach introduction in the introduction part brightness data table, which defines a lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base weak reach A and B effects are executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a common weak reach-system common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using weak reach-system weak reach A introduction and weak reach-system weak reach B introduction as the brightness data tables for the introduction part. However, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a weak reach-system weak reach A title introduction, which defines the series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a weak reach-system weak reach B title introduction, which defines the series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. By doing this, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base strong reach A to C effects are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, and strong reach C introduction as brightness data tables for the introduction part. When a low base strong reach A effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. When a low base strong reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part, and when a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base strong reach D performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when high base reach A to D effects are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach reach B introduction, high base reach reach C introduction, and high base reach reach D introduction as the brightness data table for the introduction part.When a high base reach A effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach reach A title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part.When a high base reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the bass reach B effect; when a high bass reach C effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach C title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high bass reach C effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part; and when a high bass reach D effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach D title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high bass reach D effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part; by doing this, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach effects 2]
The following explains the settings of the brightness data table used for the super reach effect. As mentioned above, the brightness data table is made up of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table explained below, only some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low-base weak reach A and B effects]
Figure 11-74 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B421 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, Figure 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and Figures 11-76 to 11-78 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command B421, it specifies the parent table for weak reach common titles based on extension command B421. As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles is set to perform lamp control for frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command B421, it performs lamp control for frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE specified by the parent table for weak reach common titles.

Child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE contains the grandchild tables and execution times for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 11-75.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (Figure 11-76), which is the first table set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are lit in blue for 160 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the second grandchild table set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 light up in a blue-based color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Figure 11-78), which is the third grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off, while the rest are lit blue, with the off and lit areas changing every 30 ms or 20 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 230 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the fourth grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 light up in a blue-based color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) sent when controlling the display of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using a brightness data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 will continue to light up in a blue-based color and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, they will switch to the lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles has child tables set up that also reference logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4. These child tables also have grandchild tables, etc., that they reference set up in order of execution. These grandchild tables also have brightness data, etc., that they reference set up in order of execution. The performance control CPU 120 references the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, and controls the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 using the same procedure as above.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will change from off to red until 500 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then change from red to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red again, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change from an off state to white until 500 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 500 ms has elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then change from white to nearly off until 230 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white again, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 will change from off to blue until 500 ms have passed, then stay lit in a blue-based light until 500 ms have passed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then go from blue to almost off until 230 ms have passed, then stay lit in a blue-based light again, and continue to change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (A), the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2,200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title. During the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part to 500 ms elapsed) when the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change from an off state to blue, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 change from an off state to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 change from an off state to white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, during the title display period when the title characters remain stationary in their fixed positions and the title end period (the period from the start of the title display period until the end of the title display part) when the title characters move from their fixed positions to the right, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then by 230 ms have elapsed, they go from blue to almost off, and then light up in blue again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they light up in blue again, and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 remain lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then, within 230 ms, they change from red to almost off and then turn red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they remain lit in red again, and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will light up in white until 500 ms has elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), then change from white to almost off and back to white within 230 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), after which they will again light up in white and continue to change brightness every 100 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it controls the lamps based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, in accordance with the extended command B421. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change color and pattern according to the title start period, in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, and the title end period, in which the title characters move from their fixed position toward the right side.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
Figure 11-79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B511 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to red, Figure 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and Figures 11-81 to 11-83 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect that changes the title characters from white to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command 511 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B511, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-79) for the title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-80) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figures 11-81 to 83) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then they will light up in red until 1200 ms has elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200 ms has elapsed, with their brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, then gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects consists of a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, and a title end period of 300 ms. Furthermore, when a title color change effect that changes from white to red is executed, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to red, and then the transition to the title end period takes place after a further 1200 ms.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B511 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Red, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B511 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Furthermore, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B511 until another 1200 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Additionally, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B511) when the title characters move to the right from their original position and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from red, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control is performed by the grandchild table (7) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
Figure 11-84 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B512 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold, Figure 11-85 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and Figures 11-86 to 11-88 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command 512 at the timing when the title text changes (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B512, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-84) for the title common chance up gold based on the extension command 512, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-85) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-86 to 88) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then they will light up in yellow until 1200 ms has elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from yellow at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms has elapsed, with their brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, then gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects consists of a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Furthermore, when a title color change effect is executed in which the title changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to gold, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B512 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B512 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Furthermore, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B512 until another 1200 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Additionally, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B512) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from yellow, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control is performed by the grandchild table (10) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Modification of the brightness data table used in title color change effects]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamp LA1 to LA4 in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, regardless of whether or not a title change effect is performed, and when a title change effect is not performed, the CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamp LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed and a title change effect is performed, an extended command specifying title common chance up red or title common chance up gold, which is sent from the display control unit 123 at the timing of performing display control to change the color of the title characters, is received, and from the time the color of the title characters changes, lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the brightness data table: title common chance up red or title common chance up gold.

In contrast to this, this modified example is provided with a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) in which brightness data is set when a title change effect is performed in which the title characters change to red in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, and a brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set when a title change effect is performed in which the title characters change to gold.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, if no title change effect is performed, it sends an extended command specifying the weak reach common title (white), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) to display the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attack run When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, in the case of performing a title change performance in which the title characters are changed to red, by transmitting an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (red), the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) to control the lamps of the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed and the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, if a title change effect is performed in which the title text changes to gold, by sending an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (gold), the effect control CPU 120 will use the brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

This allows the effect control CPU 120 to control the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in lighting modes appropriate to the respective situations: when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B effects, when a title change effect that changes the title characters to red is performed, or when a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect]
Fig. 11-89 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B400 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance, Fig. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-91 to 11-95 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B400, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-89) for the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach A based on the extension command B400, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-90) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-91 to 95) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-91 to 11-95 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Weak Reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
Fig. 11-96 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B40F sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance, Fig. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-99 to 11-103 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-96) for the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach B based on the extension command B40F, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-97) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-98 to 103) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-98 to 103 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Weak Reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
Figure 11-104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B517 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, Figure 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title, and Figures 11-106 to 11-109 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) for the strong reach common title based on the expansion command B517, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-106) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-107-109) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-106 contains grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the scenes of the presentation change, such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C presentation, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the presentation scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 contain brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the presentation scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attack Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A-C effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect]
Fig. 11-110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B500 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A performance, Fig. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-112 to 11-117 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B500, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-110) for the strong reach system Strong Reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-111) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-112 to 117) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-112 to 117 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach B effect]
Fig. 11-118 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B504 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B performance, Fig. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-120 to 11-124 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B504, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-118) for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the expansion command B504, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-119) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-120 to 124) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-120 to 124 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the scene of the effect.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach C effect]
When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extension command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the introductory part in the low base strong reach C performance, it specifies the parent table (not shown) of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction based on the extension command B505, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table for the introduction of a strong reach C in a strong reach system has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect, and further, the grandchild table for the introduction of a strong reach C in a strong reach system has brightness data set with an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the scene of the effect in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect.

[Brightness data table used in low-base strongest reach effects]
Fig. 11-125 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B600 sent when performing display control of the low-base strongest reach presentation, Fig. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and Fig. 11-127 to Fig. 11-135 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B600, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-126) for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction based on the expansion command B600, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-127) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-128 to 135) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 contains a grandchild table with the execution time corresponding to the time it takes for the scene of the low-base strongest reach effect to change from the title display part to the end of the introductory part, as well as the light color and light pattern corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-127 to 135 contain brightness data that determines the light color and light pattern corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
Figure 11-136 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B605 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the high bass reach A to D performances, Figure 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title, and Figures 11-138 to 11-140 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B605, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high-base reach common title based on the expansion command B605, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-137) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-138-140) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 contains grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scenes change, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the high base reach A to D performances, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 contain brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scenes.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the high base reach A-D effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach A performance]
Fig. 11-141 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B606 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance, Fig. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-143 to 11-145 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B606, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-141) for the introduction of high-base reach type reach A based on the expansion command B606, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-142) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-143 to 145) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-143 to 145 have brightness data set with an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach B performance]
Fig. 11-146 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B607 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach B performance, and Fig. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach B introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B607, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-146) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach B based on the expansion command B607, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-147) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach B introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach C performance]
Fig. 11-148 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach C introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B608 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach C performance, and Fig. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach C introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B608, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-148) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach C based on the expansion command B608, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-149) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach C introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach D performance]
Fig. 11-150 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach D introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B609 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach D performance, and Fig. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach D introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B609, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-150) for the introduction of the high base reach type reach D based on the expansion command B609, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-151) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach D introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state, and in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has reached a reach state. However, by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state in the title display part of the super reach effect, attention can be naturally drawn to the title character, resulting in an optimal title display.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

In addition, before the title display part of the Super Reach effect, a decorative symbol (large) is displayed in reach mode, and then the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced in size to a smaller decorative symbol (small), and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed in the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small). In this way, the reduced display of the decorative symbol (large) attracts the player's attention, and by displaying the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect in the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small), it is easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, during the title display part of the Super Reach performance, when the decorative pattern that has reached the Reach state is displayed, the title text corresponding to the Super Reach performance is displayed so that it overlaps with the decorative pattern that has reached the Reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the super reach effects include low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than low base weak reach A and B effects.The title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes a Low Base Strongest Reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the Low Base Strong Reach A to C effects. The title characters corresponding to the Low Base Strongest Reach effect appear overlapping with both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides) that have reached the reach state, allowing the title characters corresponding to the Low Base Strongest Reach effect to be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state (the decorative pattern on the left) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides) and are then displayed in their fixed positions, and even while they are displayed in their fixed positions, they are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative patterns on both sides that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title characters even after they have been displayed in their fixed positions.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 has reached a reach state. The low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, but by using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance to display the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and low base strongest reach effects after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and low base strongest reach effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state, when an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state When an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state, when an odd numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state, and when an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, but by using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A to C effect, and low base strongest reach effect to display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A to C effect, and low base strongest reach effect, the player can naturally pay attention to the title characters as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state, and in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has reached a reach state. However, by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state in the title display part of the super reach effect, attention can be naturally drawn to the title character, resulting in an optimal title display.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach B effect and the low base weak reach B effect. The low base weak reach B effect and the low base strong reach B effect are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B effect, the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yume Yume" announces that a jackpot will be reached, and in the low base strong reach B effect, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" announce that a jackpot will be reached. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the display starts with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" positioned in the background, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, the display starts with the ally character "Yume Yume" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Boingo" positioned in the background (the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other on the left and right). In this way, for the low base weak reach B performance, which has a relatively high probability of winning, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana," who are notified of a jackpot, are positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" positioned in the background, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the probability of winning is high, resulting in a more suitable title display.

Also, ally characters are characters who receive benefits if they win a battle, while enemy characters are characters who do not receive benefits if they win a battle. At the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are displayed in a position in the foreground with their backs to you, and enemy character "Robo" is displayed in a position in the background facing you, with ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" facing off against enemy character "Robo." For the low base strong reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation, the player and ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are facing in the same direction, making it easier for the player to empathize and recognize that there is a high chance of winning.

In addition, during the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed during the title display part, so when the title characters disappear, players who were focusing on the title characters will naturally turn their attention to the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo".

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A, B effects, and low base weak reach A, B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B effects and a longer effect time than the low base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects all use dialogue subtitles. In the low base weak reach A, B effects, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part continue to be displayed in the introduction part, while in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the title display part, and the title characters are displayed. By doing this, the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a relatively high probability of winning and a long execution time, are displayed so that the title characters and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, while in the low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a relatively low probability of winning and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title characters overlap, the display of the title characters is finished first so that the player can also pay attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title characters and dialogue subtitles to the player in an appropriate manner, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the scene does not change in the subsequent introductory part until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title text have finished displaying, so the viewer can focus on the title text and then the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed during the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title text is not, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects is made up of multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chuu with six people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects, the title characters start out being displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and the display size gradually decreases from the enlarged size, and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the multiple characters are visible. In this way, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects, the multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until they are displayed at a reduced size where all of the characters are visible, which draws the player's attention to the title characters.

In addition, before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect begins, the movable body 32 is moved so that it overlaps the front side of the image display device 5, and a background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period in which the falling effect is executed from the time the movable body 32 moves until the movable body 32 returns to its initial position. When the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, the title characters are displayed at an enlarged size so that not all of the characters making up the title characters are visible and the display area is filled so that the background is no longer visible, and then the reduced-size title characters and a background dedicated to the title display are displayed. This allows the title characters to be displayed in an impactful way, while at the same time allowing the background to be switched seamlessly, allowing the title characters to be viewed favorably by the player.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach series), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach series reach A, introduction of high base reach series reach B, introduction of high base reach series reach C, introduction of high base reach series reach D). By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects. The low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display for the low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects is comprised of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B-D)"). In the title display part for the low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects, the multiple characters are enlarged and displayed, ending the title display part, and the background at the start of the introductory part is displayed. This allows the player to focus on the title characters during the title display part, and the title characters can be used to seamlessly transition to the background corresponding to the next introductory part.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach series), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach series reach A, introduction of high base reach series reach B, introduction of high base reach series reach C, introduction of high base reach series reach D). By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects. The low-base weak reach A and B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, unlike the execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects and the execution time (T2-1 to 3) of the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C effects, each title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated position until they are displayed in their designated position, a title display period that is displayed in their designated position, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated position until they end. Furthermore, in the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects and in the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title characters by making the title display period displayed in the fixed position the longest. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to motivate which title characters will be displayed by making the title start period until the title is displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from the display in the fixed position to the end of the display. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to make the title display part easier to understand by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect both in the normal state and in a probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state are both composed of a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the execution time (T1-1 to T2-2, T2-1 to T2-3, T3) of the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state differs from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state. In both cases, the title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated position until they are displayed in their designated position, a title display period in which the title characters are displayed in their designated position, and a title end period from when they are displayed in their designated position until they end. Furthermore, in the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state and in the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title display period displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title character. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the title start period until it is displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, it is possible to motivate which title character will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the Super Reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part of the Super Reach effect in the normal state. Because the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, gameplay in the probability variable state can proceed at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach effect executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be well-excited.

Furthermore, regardless of the type, the Super Reach effects executed in the probability variable state have a higher chance of winning than the low-base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, the execution of the Super Reach effect alone can give players hope of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state, but the Super Reach effect has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state, just the execution of the Super Reach effect can give the player hope of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the super reach effects executed in normal mode, the execution time of the title display part in low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in low base weak reach AB effects, and the execution time of the title display part in low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in normal mode, the execution time of the title display part of super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation is longer, which can effectively excite the player.

Furthermore, among the super reach effects executed in normal mode, the execution time of the title display period in which the title letters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB effect, and the execution time of the title display period in the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in normal mode, the super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation have a longer execution time of the title display period in which the title letters are displayed in a fixed position, which can effectively excite the player.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display part includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions, a title display period displayed in their designated positions, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated positions until they end. In the title display part, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, the title display period displayed in its designated position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title characters. Furthermore, by making the title start period until the title characters are displayed in their designated positions longer than the title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated positions until they end, it is possible to tease the player about which title characters will be displayed. Even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the execution time relationships between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base-strength reach A-C effects and low-base-strength reach effects. The low-base-strength reach A-C effects and low-base-strength reach effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. As shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low-base-strength reach effect and the low-base-strength reach A-C effects, the title character can be displayed in white or in red, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the white color. In the title display part of the low-base-strength reach effect and the low-base-strength reach A-C effects, the corresponding expectation indication is displayed, and then the title character is displayed in a larger size than the expectation indication. In this case, whether the title character is displayed in white or red, the expectation indication is displayed in the same manner. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects and low base strong reach A to C effects are larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation is suggested by its appearance, so they attract the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the same manner, so the player can be drawn to the appearance of the title characters that follow.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base strong reach B effect and a low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B effect. The low base strong reach B and C effects are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a first manner (3.5 stars), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a second manner (4 stars). In this case, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect are both highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the highlighting a common mode whether the expectation level indication display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, or whether the expectation level indication display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance.

The expectation indication display is also made up of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low-base strong reach B performance, the expectation is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, and in the low-base strong reach C performance, the expectation is indicated by N + 1 (4) objects, with each star-shaped object being highlighted, and the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. In this way, the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

Furthermore, in the expectation suggestion display, the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects are the same. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects the same.

In addition, when displaying the expected level, a common expected level indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. By doing this, a common expected level indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects using a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (strong reach strong reach B introduction, strong reach strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base common title) in the title display part, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach B effect (brightness data table (strong reach strong reach B title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect is controlled using the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect. The game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled using a brightness data table (a brightness data table (strong reach series strong reach C title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect). With this configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different title display brightness data tables for the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects. The low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects can display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects. In the expectation suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, then, while continuing to highlight the first star-shaped object, the second star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended and the third star-shaped object is highlighted. By doing this, in the expectation indication display, highlighting of the second star-shaped object begins before highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but highlighting of the third star-shaped object does not begin until highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, when displaying the degree of expectation, an expectation suggestion sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation suggestion sound for highlighting one star-shaped object has finished, an expectation suggestion sound for highlighting the next object is output. By doing this, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation.

The expectation suggestion display is made up of multiple star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the star-shaped objects are highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text "Expectation." By highlighting the star-shaped objects in this way, attention can be drawn to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation.

In this embodiment, when some of the multiple star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. However, it is also possible to configure the highlighting of all star-shaped objects to be superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects. The low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to display multiple hold displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects, the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performances, and the high base reach A to D performances, but the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display, so that it is possible to prevent the hold display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation suggestion display.

In particular, the maximum number of pending displays and active displays corresponding to the variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display. Even if a low-base strong reach A-C effect, a low-base strongest reach effect, or a high-base reach A-D effect is executed when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display.

In addition, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect is executed in which the display area is displayed in a monochrome color before the title display part begins, the hold display can be ended without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, it also uses a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-C effects. The low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-C effects are each configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a first number (3) of star-shaped objects can be displayed, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the first number can be displayed, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the second number can be displayed. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same (0.5) as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4), and the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect corresponding to the first number (3). By doing this, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), the increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same as when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5).Therefore, as the number of star-shaped objects increases, the player can expect to hit a jackpot greater than the number of increased star-shaped objects, while not being overly hopeful of a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect, and is capable of displaying an expectation indication display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5), which is greater than the third number (4), in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect, and the difference (0.5) between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is smaller than the difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and the low-base strongest reach effect corresponding to the fourth number (4.5) The difference between the probability of a jackpot when the lowest base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect is executed and the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the increase in the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part is smaller when the number of star-shaped objects increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Therefore, the more star-shaped objects there are, the more likely a jackpot will occur even if the number of added star-shaped objects is small.

Furthermore, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1, so it can be expected that there will be a greater chance of a jackpot if the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than if the number increases by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4).

Furthermore, in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state, the difference in the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference in the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. By doing this, in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state, it can be expected that a jackpot will occur when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication in the title display part increases.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C effects that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base weak reach A and B effects under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects has a longer execution time than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, while an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so it can be intuitively recognized that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), while the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A-C effects have a higher level of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach effects A-C under normal conditions. The title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period). The title display part in the low base strongest reach effect does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period. The title character display period in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect is longer than the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C. By doing this, the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect is longer than the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strongest reach effect has a higher expectation than the low base strong reach effects A-C.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A, B effects under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the low base weak reach A and B effects, there are cases where the effect result is an announcement of a jackpot, and cases where the effect results in an announcement of a miss, or cases where the effect develops into another super reach effect. In the low base strong reach A to C effects, there are cases where the effect result is an announcement of a jackpot, or cases where the effect results in an announcement of a miss. Furthermore, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances in which a jackpot will be directly announced, while an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances in which a jackpot will not be directly announced, so that excessive expectations can be prevented from being created by the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display the title text in a golden form, which confirms that the effect will develop into another super reach effect, so it is possible to draw the player's attention even in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, where no expectation indication is displayed.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach. The low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach may be executed via a selection effect using title characters corresponding to multiple super reach effects, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display together with the title characters in the title display part and selection effect of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach. Furthermore, when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach, an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, and when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the selection effect, the expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so that the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance that precedes it can be eliminated.

In addition, the selection effect changes gradually from a Super Reach effect with a low probability of winning to a Super Reach effect with a high probability of winning by operating push button 31B. The time required for one change in the selection effect, i.e., the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect, may be shorter than the time required for one level of indication of the probability of winning in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A-C effects and the Low Base Strongest Reach, i.e., the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, giving a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

Furthermore, the selection effect changes step by step from the current Super Reach effect to a Super Reach effect with one step higher chance of a jackpot, and the number of push button 31B operations required to change to the next step increases with each step. In this way, the higher the chance of a jackpot in the Super Reach effect, the more impatient the player becomes.

In addition, if a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach is selected through the selection effect, the title display part of that super reach effect will begin. By doing this, even if a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach is executed via the selection effect, the title display part will begin, making it easier for the player to determine which super reach effect was ultimately executed.

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title character corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner that moves more dramatically than the title character of the super reach effect. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. Therefore, the title character of the jackpot start effect moves more dramatically, allowing the player to celebrate the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been reached.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach effect. Even in this configuration, the title characters of the jackpot start effect can be displayed in a more dynamic manner than the title characters of the Super Reach effect, allowing you to celebrate the game being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, when the title characters are displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed (Low Base Strong Reach B and C effects, Low Base Strongest Reach effect, High Base Reach A-D), and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach effect. By doing this, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect also moves more greatly, allowing you to celebrate the fact that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect is a still image, but the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect may also be a moving image. Even in this configuration, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with more movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect, allowing you to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In this case, the small operation prompting characters are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, the small operation prompting characters displayed in the introductory part prompt the player to take an action (operation), and by moving them more than the title character displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action (operation).

Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the Super Reach effect, the player is prompted to operate push button 31B, and it is possible to display operation prompting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation prompting characters (small), and both operation prompting characters (small) and operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner that causes greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, whether it is operation prompting characters (small) or operation prompting characters (large), by moving them more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to take action (operate).

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach effect. Even in this configuration, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) in a manner that moves more than the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action (operate). Also, even in this configuration, by displaying both the operation prompt characters (small) and the operation prompt characters (large) in a manner that moves more than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect, whether the operation prompt characters (small) or the operation prompt characters (large) move more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action (operate).

In addition, the number of characters (3) in the small operation prompt text is less than the number of characters (7-13) in the title text of the Super Reach effect, so the content of the text can be recognized even if the small operation prompt text is moved widely.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the super reach effect, explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach effect can be displayed. In this case, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title characters that correspond to the super reach effect. In this way, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters in the super reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In addition, the explanatory text suggests that the Super Reach effect is advantageous, so the presence of the explanatory text can draw even more attention to it.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A-B effects and the low base weak reach A-B effects. The low base weak reach A-B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects are displayed in larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A-B effects. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a relatively high expectation, are displayed in larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A-B effects, which have a relatively low expectation, so that the title characters alone can be used to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A-C effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A-B effects.

Furthermore, the number of characters (10) making up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) making up the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, but the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the display area size occupied by one character is larger for the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach B and C effects have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, before the title display part in the super reach effect, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reach state, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach state is reduced to a smaller decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title character can be focused on in the title display part.

In addition, all characters of the title letters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). This ensures that the decorative pattern (large) can be recognized when the Reach state is reached, and then the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to a decorative pattern (small), and each character that makes up the title letters is displayed larger than the decorative pattern (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title letters in the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the small operation prompting characters. In this way, the situation in which small operation prompting characters are displayed in the super reach effect indicates a situation in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot has occurred, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed indicates a situation in which a jackpot has already been announced. Displaying the title characters of the jackpot start effect larger than the small operation prompting characters allows the player to celebrate the jackpot gaming state.

The title characters for the jackpot start effect are composed of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS." After "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position. After "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position are gradually enlarged. Furthermore, "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at their smallest size when displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position, and the size of the characters when "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start effect are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), making it even more congratulatory to be controlled into the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the small operation prompt characters. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the small operation prompt characters, making it even more congratulatory to be controlled into the jackpot game state.

It is also possible to display special prompt characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the small prompt characters. The large prompt characters are displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the large operation prompt characters is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect. This means that no matter which character the player focuses on, the large operation prompt characters will be displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect, making the player aware of the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. By displaying the title characters for the jackpot start effect larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes multiple types of Super Reach effects with different title characters, and the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects, allowing you to celebrate the jackpot game state being controlled.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect, so no matter which character you focus on, the title character for the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the title character that corresponds to the super reach effect, making it even more congratulatory that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed thereafter are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

Furthermore, after the operation prompt text (small) is displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects begins. By doing this, the operation prompt text (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title text that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the operation prompt text (small), thereby drawing attention to the title text.

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), so no matter which character you focus on, you can draw attention to the title characters.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the situation in which the title letters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B effects is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, by displaying operation prompt letters (small) before the title display part and displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards larger than the operation prompt letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

Furthermore, after the operation prompt character (small) is displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects begins, and after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed. In this way, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title character corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed for a longer period of time than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. By displaying the title character of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been reached.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when part of the characters making up the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed until all of those characters disappear. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has a celebratory meaning, are clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, which are intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are switched to a right-hit promotion image (small) and a right-hit promotion image (large) which suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the switch to the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large), advantageous control is exercised by operating using the operation method suggested by the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large) (an operation method to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R), and the time it takes to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start effect to the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large) is shorter than the time it takes to end the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the title text of the jackpot start effect switches to the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large) in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has passed, control is exercised that gives an advantage by operating using the operation method suggested by the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the title text of the jackpot start effect ends.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters. In this way, the situation in which the small operation prompting characters are displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot has occurred, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot has occurred. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters, the player can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

The small operation prompt text is displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time for which the title text for the jackpot start effect is displayed is longer than the time from when the small operation prompt text is displayed until the time for which the prompted operation is not performed and the time for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed. By doing this, the title text for the jackpot start effect is displayed for a longer time than the time it is displayed without the prompted operation being performed after the small operation prompt text is displayed, allowing you to celebrate the fact that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title character of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears is longer than the time the small operation prompt characters are displayed. By doing this, the time the congratulatory title character of the jackpot start effect is clearly visible is longer than the time the small operation prompt characters, which are intended to encourage the player to operate the machine, are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

It is also possible to display large operation prompt characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompt characters. Small operation prompt characters are displayed without any prompt introduction effects, while large operation prompt characters are displayed after the prompt introduction effects have been executed. The time that the title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompt characters are displayed. In this way, the time that the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompt characters accompanied by a prompt introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

In addition, the time from when all the characters making up the title are displayed until at least part of the characters disappears is longer than the time the action prompt characters (small) are displayed. By doing this, the time the title display is clearly visible is longer than the time the prompt characters, which are intended to encourage the player to take action, are displayed, drawing attention to the title characters.

It is also possible to display large operation prompt characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompt characters. Small operation prompt characters are displayed without any prompt introduction, while large operation prompt characters are displayed after the prompt introduction has been executed. The title characters are displayed for a longer period than the large operation prompt characters. This allows the title display to be displayed for a longer period than the large operation prompt characters that accompany the prompt introduction, drawing attention to the title characters.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A, which is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display small operation prompting characters that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters. By doing this, the situation in which the title letters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B effects is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot. Also, by displaying operation prompt letters (small) before the title display part and then displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects for a longer period of time than the operation prompt letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, and can execute high base reach A to D effects in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and high base reach A to D effects in the probability variable state are all composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the high base reach B to D effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the high base reach A effect, and the high base reach A effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects. Then, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the high base reach A effect, and the high base reach B to D effects, but an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the low base weak reach A and B effects in the normal state have a lower jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, so by displaying an expectation suggestion display in the low base strong reach A to C effects but not displaying an expectation suggestion display in the low base weak reach A and B effects, excessive expectations of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B effects are not created. On the other hand, although the high base reach A effect in a probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the high base reach B to D effect in the probability variable state, it has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effect in the normal state, so by displaying an expectation indication display in both the high base reach A effect and the high base reach B to D effect, it is possible to expect a jackpot in both the high base reach A effect and the high base reach B to D effect.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect both in the normal state and in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state are both composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display part of the super reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state. By doing so, the title display part of the super reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, allowing for a fast-paced gameplay in the probability variable state.

In addition, even if the frequency with which Super Reach effects are executed in the probability variable state is higher than the frequency with which Super Reach effects are executed in the normal state, the title display portion of the Super Reach effects in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display portion of the Super Reach effects in the normal state, allowing play in the probability variable state to proceed at a good tempo.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and also controls the brightness data tables for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title, The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction) for the introduction part of the super reach effect. In this way, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strong reach effects A to C. The low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strong reach effects include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, it controls to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. In the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, and when controlled to time-shortened state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start effect, the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. By doing this, when controlled to time-shortened state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start effect, the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed in the same display mode as the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be recognized that time-shortened state B (Yu-time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-Time start effect, they are erased in a display format in which they expand as they are erased, similar to when the title characters are erased in the title display part of the Low Base Strongest Reach effect. By doing this, even when the title characters are erased in the Yu-Time start effect, they are erased in the same display format as when the title characters are erased in the Low Base Strongest Reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so the player can recognize that time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, if the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, it controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed in the Yu-time start effect, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, while the title character is displayed in the Super Reach effect when it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will occur, the title character of the Yu-time start effect is controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), and the characters constituting the title character of the Yu-time start effect are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time).

The Super Reach effect also includes multiple types of Super Reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects. By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects, so you can celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the smallest character among the characters making up the title character of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the largest character among the characters making up the title character corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title character of the Yu-Time start effect will be displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, making it even more congratulatory that you have been controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed in the Yu-time start effect, and the display time of the title character of the Yu-time start effect is longer than the display time of the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, while the title character is displayed in the Super Reach effect when it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will occur, the title character of the Yu-time start effect is controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), and the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, allowing the player to celebrate the control to time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title character of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed until at least a portion of that character is no longer displayed is longer than the time from when part of the characters making up the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed until all of that character is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title character of the Yu-Time start effect, which has a celebratory meaning, is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is controlled. Furthermore, the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the characters constituting the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the Yu-time. In this way, the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed larger than the characters constituting the characters constituting the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the Yu-time, thereby drawing attention to the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects. The remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed during low base weak reach A and B effects, but not during low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed during low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a low jackpot expectation, making the player aware of the number of plays until time-saving state B (Yu-Time). Meanwhile, during low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a high jackpot expectation, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed, drawing attention to the content of the effect. Furthermore, since time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is more likely to result in a jackpot than normal state, this can alleviate the player's disappointment when there are few plays remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, if the selection effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect without going through the low base weak reach A or B effect, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed even during the selection effect. This prevents the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time from interfering with the selection effect that confirms a super reach effect of low base strong reach A-C or higher, and also reduces the player's disappointment when there are only a few plays remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without displaying the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time again, and when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C effects end. By doing this, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed again, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment when there are few plays left until time-saving state B (Yu-Time). In addition, when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C effects end, allowing the player to feel relieved quickly when there are few plays left until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects A to D executed at timings related to the Super Reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, in the normal state, characters indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time) can be displayed. Furthermore, the size of the characters constituting the small operation prompting characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the Yu-time. By doing so, the small operation prompting characters are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the Yu-time, thereby drawing attention to the small operation prompting characters and effectively encouraging the player to take action (operate).

Furthermore, when executing the low base strong reach A-C effects among the super reach effects, if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in operation prompt effect A, which is executed before the title display part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is displayed at the same time, whereas if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in operation prompt effect D, which is executed at the end of the introductory part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is not displayed. By doing this, before the development into the low base strong reach A-C effects, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is displayed at the same time as the prompt character display operation prompt character (small), making the player aware of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time), and by not displaying the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the operation prompt character (small) in the introductory part, the player can focus on whether or not a jackpot will be announced.

Furthermore, when the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed, operation prompt A, which is executed before the title display part, displays only the small operation prompt characters out of the small operation prompt characters and the large operation prompt characters, which suggest a more favorable situation than the small operation prompt characters. Meanwhile, operation prompt D, which is executed at the end of the introductory part, can display both the small operation prompt characters and the large operation prompt characters. When the large operation prompt characters are displayed in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the characters showing the number of times remaining until Yu-time are not displayed at the same time. By doing this, in addition to being notified of whether a jackpot will occur, the large operation prompt characters are displayed, drawing attention to the fact that a more favorable situation is suggested.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Furthermore, in the normal state, the remaining number of times until Yu-time can be displayed, indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time). Furthermore, before displaying the title character of the jackpot start effect, the remaining number of times until Yu-time is erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until Yu-time. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are unnecessary, so the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are erased before the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, and the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so that it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, regardless of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the size of the characters that make up the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-time is the same, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the characters that make up the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-time. By doing this, regardless of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so you can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs a variable display in response to the first entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot in time-shortened state B (Yu-time), it uses a time-shortened state B start variable display pattern with a longer variable period than the variable pattern normally used in time-shortened state B (Yu-time). By doing this, the Yu-time start effect can be executed during the variable period corresponding to the time-shortened state B start variable display pattern during the first variable period in time-shortened state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B effects. The low-base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. It is also possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red or gold state. When the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters are displayed so that the time during which they are displayed in the red or gold state is longer than the time during which they are displayed in the white state. In this way, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters in the red or gold state, i.e., the state after the change, are displayed longer than the title characters in the white state, i.e., the state before the change, so that the change from white to red or gold can be reliably recognized.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters may change from a white state to a red or gold state, or may remain in a white state. If the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state, a specific sound is output as the white state changes to a red or gold state when time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period. If the title characters remain in a white state, the white state remains unchanged when time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and a specific sound is output. In this way, a specific sound is output when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to a red or gold state at a specific timing, and a specific sound is also output when the title characters remain in a white state at the specific timing. This creates the expectation that the title characters will change to a red or gold state when the specific sound is output.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to another state, a specific sound is output whether they change to a red state or a gold state, so the output of the specific sound draws attention to the type of state they will change to.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red state, or to a gold state that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the red state. In either case where the title characters are changed from a white state to a red state or a gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the characters are displayed by changing from the white state to a common display state and then changing to the red state or the gold state. By doing this, whether the title characters are changed from a white form to a red form or from a white form to a gold form in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, they are changed to a common display form and then changed to a red form or a gold form, so that by changing from the white form to the common display form, until the change from the common display form to the red form or the gold form, players can expect until the end that they will change to the gold form which has a higher probability of winning than the red form.

Furthermore, a common display mode is one in which the characters that make up the title text glow, and when the light clears, they change to a red or gold color. By doing this, it is possible to encourage the characters that make up the title text to glow and change to a red or gold color.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B presentations. The low base weak reach A and B presentations are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the presentation result is announced. The presentation control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table comprised of brightness data. The effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach-type common title) in both the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach-type weak reach B introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect. In this way, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the two different super reach effects, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a corresponding brightness data table for each of the introduction parts, the period until an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been achieved can be suitably aroused, resulting in suitable title display.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common title display part (weak reach common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (introduction of weak reach B in a weak reach system) in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (introduction of strong reach A in a strong reach system) in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (introduction of strong reach B in a strong reach system), and in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (introduction of strong reach C in a strong reach system). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strongest reach effects that have an even higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, and low base strongest reach effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title) in the title display part of the low base strongest reach presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach type weak reach title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. In the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (weak reach system weak reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). In this way, for the two types of super reach effects with high expectations and the two types of super reach effects with low expectations, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot will be won, resulting in a suitable title display. Furthermore, the low-base strongest reach effect with the highest expectation is heightened by having dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introductory part, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change the display of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red state, or to a gold state that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the red state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. When the color of the title letters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set for when a title change effect is not performed; when the color of the title letters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set for when a title change effect is performed; and regardless of whether the color of the title letters is changed in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach weak reach A introduction, weak reach weak reach B introduction). By doing this, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances or are changed to the second form, the brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part is made common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part, it is possible to perform the performance appropriately in either the case where the color of the title characters is not changed or where they are changed to red or gold, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B presentations. The low base weak reach A and B presentations are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the presentation result is announced. The presentation control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table comprised of brightness data. Furthermore, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions, and a title display period and a title end period after the title characters are displayed in their designated positions. The effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 during the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table (weak reach title start) that defines a light-emitting pattern specific to the title start period, and controls the game effect lamps 9 during the title display period and title end period using a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a light-emitting pattern specific to the period after the title display period. In this way, by using the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period after the title characters are displayed in their designated positions, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, the period during which the title characters are displayed and the period until the notification of whether or not a favorable state will be achieved can be favorably stimulated, resulting in favorable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, a common brightness data table can be used for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other period.By using a common brightness data table for either the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, increases in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for the other period, it is possible to appropriately present either a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in an appropriate title display.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

In addition, gaming machines with multiple game states may be able to increase the efficiency of the number of changes in a specific game state by shortening the change display time or varying the time until the next change display begins. In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect that indicates which game state the current game state is in, or a change time suggestion effect that indicates the change time that will be executed. Specific control is explained below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
12 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are shot into this gaming area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming board 2 (to the right of the gaming area in the example shown in Figure 12), which perform a variable display (also called a special symbol game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Special symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also referred to as the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also referred to as the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The synchronously executed special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories using the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories using the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable ball entry device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start entry opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 13). The variable ball entry device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable wings are positioned vertically, bringing the tips of the movable wings close to the ball entry device 6A, creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start entry opening (also referred to as the second start entry opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable wings of the variable ball entry device 6B are tilted, creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start entry opening (also referred to as the second start entry opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, four locations at the bottom left and right of the game area), and are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 13), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (to the left of the gaming area in the example shown in Figure 12). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers ranging from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, there is a normal symbol pending display 25C. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 12).

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 13).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 13).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or small win game state (a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In special symbol games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a specific special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a small jackpot symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "small jackpot." Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot or small jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss."

After the display result in the special game becomes "big hit," the game state is controlled to a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit," the game state is controlled to a small hit game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, and jackpot types that offer few or no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 opens in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening opens in the same opening mode as the large prize game state for certain large win types (the number of times the large prize opening opens is the same as the number of rounds mentioned above, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large win types, small win types may also be set for "small wins."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state will not change, and the game state will continue to be controlled as it was before the special game display result became "small win" (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game for the specified number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the special game display result does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of Effects, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or add excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are produced by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be produced by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. When the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") are displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "small win," a fixed decorative pattern (e.g., "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that form chance eyes are displayed stationary on predetermined effective lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be displayed when the display result of the special game is a "jackpot" for certain jackpot types (jackpot types in jackpot game states that are similar to small win game states) and when it is a "small win."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). A pre-read preview effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect announcing the number of rounds or an upgrade effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing. Also, during a small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the small jackpot gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether they are currently in a small jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state by executing a common effect during a small jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot gaming state similar to a small jackpot gaming state, for example, a jackpot type that sets the subsequent gaming state to a high-probability state). In such cases, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether they are currently in a small jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state by executing a common effect after the end of the small jackpot gaming state and the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 13. In addition, various boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, etc.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), big win game status, small win game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches used to detect game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 14, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also sends a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). Upon receiving the presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a screen on, for example, the image display device 5 to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (Step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in RAM 102 (backup RAM) (Step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or other reason (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes power supply interruption processing immediately before the machine becomes inoperable due to the power supply interruption. This power supply interruption processing includes processing to turn on a backup flag indicating that data is being backed up in RAM 102 and processing to protect data in RAM 102. The data protection processing includes adding error detection codes (checksums, parity bits, etc.) and backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including the status of various flags and various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In Step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and no backup data is stored in RAM 102 (Step S4; No), initialization processing (Step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (Step S4: Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (Step S5). In Step S5, it determines whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time of power outage, for example, using a parity bit or checksum. If it is determined that they match, it determines that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when power was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5: Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when power was stopped. During the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets up a working area based on the contents of RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when power was stopped, and if a special symbol was changing, the game control timer interrupt process, described below, is executed to resume the change of the special symbol from the state before recovery.

The CPU 103 then transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 instructing recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the currently playing special symbol game, may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and enables the interrupt (step S12). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and reservation of special symbol games, controls the big hit game state and small hit game state, and controls the game state (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to manage the execution and reservation of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), and to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 15. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 15.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot," and if a "jackpot" is selected, the type of jackpot, based on a random number value used to determine the display result, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small jackpot symbol, or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which they enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether the display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

The pre-processing for opening a small win in step S118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8." This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win." At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9," and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes processes for measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10", and the small win opening process ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10." This small win end process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 prior to the small win game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," and the small win end process ends.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 17. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 17 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 17 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 18, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading notice performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3." During this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big hit game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6." On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small hit game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the small hit presentation process. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss," and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0." Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process will end.

The small win presentation processing in step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation process is terminated.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation control process flag is updated to "7," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variations of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, that symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a removable recording medium, but may also be distributed by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communications processing unit, the programs and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communications line, etc.

Games can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line, temporarily storing them in internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game can also be executed by exchanging data with another computer device via a network.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution rate of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include cases where one is a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes cases where one is a "0%" percentage and the other is a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic section 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic section 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko gaming machine in which a setting value with different degrees of advantage for a player, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, can be set by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player as the setting value for the probability of winning a jackpot.

First, let's explain the setting values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by a person at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a predetermined switch or other operating means to change the settings.

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. This executes a setting change process that allows the jackpot probability to be changed by using a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value during the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process processing. The setting value consists of six levels (multiple levels), for example, from 1 to 6, with the jackpot probability increasing in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player is least advantageous, and the advantageous level increases in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value need only be multiple levels, and is not limited to six levels. In this way, since the payout rate (number of balls paid out per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes depending on whether the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed, changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, setting values 4 to 6, for example, are sometimes called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, are sometimes called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the probability of selecting a jackpot type may be changed by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may be changed by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may be changed by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding feature section 152F, in a pachinko gaming machine that can set one of multiple setting values, when the machine is in a jackpot gaming state, a series of reserved hits may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a hit (jackpot or small hit) is stored in RAM 122, which serves as a reserve memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved hit series refers to consecutive hits within a range of reserved information in which the reserved information existing at the time of a jackpot occurrence contains reserved information that will result in a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the next hits occur consecutively within the range of reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence (a series of reserved hits within a reserved hit). In the case of a small hit, a jackpot occurs via a small hit based on the occurrence of a V win, so the reserved information for the small hit can be considered reserved memory information for a hit that will result in a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved hit series is executed, a notification effect may be executed to notify the player that a series of reserved hits has occurred.

Figure 19-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in characteristic section 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in characteristic section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions for components similar to those in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 1 will be omitted, and only the differences will be described.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make it flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make it flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may also be called the left hit path. Furthermore, the second path is a path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may also be called the right hit path.

The first and second paths may be separate paths, or may share a portion of the path. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the edge of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play pins within the play area.

When a gaming ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the gaming area, if it is guided to the left gaming area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right gaming area. Furthermore, when a gaming ball is guided to the right gaming area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left gaming area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure through which game balls hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is located below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting game balls that have entered the first start winning hole.

The structures through which game balls hit into the right play area of the play area can enter are the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determined winning device 87. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. Additionally, switches for detecting game balls that enter each port are provided: a gate switch 21 inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B inside the second start winning port, and a V-entry switch 87a, a V-determined winning switch 15a, and a V-determined discharge switch 15b inside the V-determined winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball will be guided to the first start entry port of the entry port structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start entry port, the player simply hits the game ball to the left. In the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball will be guided to the second start entry port of the entry port structure and passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start entry port and passing gate 41, the player simply hits the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which a gaming ball can enter (pass). When a gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left gaming area, gaming pegs are planted so that the gaming ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the gaming ball enter the first start winning hole, the player simply hits the gaming ball to the left. In the right gaming area, gaming pegs are planted so that the gaming ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the gaming ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player simply hits the gaming ball to the right.

The V-determining winning device 87 is a device that determines whether the game ball has entered the V-shaped zone, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-determined winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, allowing the player to see the game balls passing through it. The V-determined winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game balls to pass through in both the front and back directions, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passageway that slopes from right to left and extends left and right, forming a guide path along which the game balls are guided. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that repeatedly opens and closes over a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 second x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs, allowing a total of approximately 10 or more game balls to enter during the predetermined open period. The passageway for the game ball in the V-determined winning device 87 is provided with multiple protrusions that protrude alternately from both sides of the wall as deceleration means for slowing down the game ball being guided. This creates a structure (hereinafter referred to as the deceleration structure) that allows the game ball to flow slowly through the passageway above the operating port at the top of the V-determined winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected, or until a predetermined period of time has passed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move back and forth above the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end, dropping from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, allowing the game ball guided along the guide path to drop from the operating port into the interior of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determined winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V-winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determined winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering through the operating port can win. Furthermore, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls entering through the operating port onto the V-winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V-winning area 870 has a V-winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls entering through the V-winning port downward.

A plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided at the top end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of V winning area 870, which can switch V winning area 870 between an open and closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close V winning opening. When the opening/closing member opens the V winning opening, game balls guided onto V winning area 870 can fall into V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member closes the V winning opening, game balls guided onto V winning area 870 pass over the opening/closing member and are arranged to open near the downstream side of V winning area 870, allowing them to fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide game balls downward.

Specifically, the V entry area 870 of the V-determination entry device 87 is basically open. During a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-determination entry device 87 is open, when a game ball enters the V entry area 870 and enters, the game ball is detected by the V entry switch 87a provided in the V entry area 870. During a small win game state, when a game ball is detected by the V entry switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to a closed state, and game balls subsequently guided onto the V entry area 870 enter the winning ball area. Game balls that enter the winning ball area are detected by the V-determination entry switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-determination entry device 87, one game ball is detected by the V entry switch 87a, and subsequent game balls are detected by the V-determination entry switch 15a.

When the V-determination winning device 87 is open during a small win game, its operating port closes and game balls cannot enter when the total number of balls detected by the V-determination winning switch 87a and the V-determination winning switch 15a reaches 10. The V-determination winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-determination winning device 87 via this merged discharge passage are discharged into a designated discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is equipped with a V-determination discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and this switch detects all discharged game balls.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met, and the machine is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. As mentioned above, the pachinko game machine 1 is structurally and controllably designed to allow an average of approximately 10 game balls to enter the V-determination winning device 87 without requiring any special operation during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened. Furthermore, the structure is designed so that when a game ball is allowed to enter the V-determination winning device 87, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V-winning area 870. Additionally, when a small win occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a right-hit promotion notification is issued to instruct the player to hit to the right, so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not fire the game ball while the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V-winning area 870 and a big win will occur if the player hits with the right.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows game balls to drop into part of the game ball guide path in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow approximately 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right play area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determined winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter these variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determined winning device 87, the player simply hits the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to potentially enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable that this possibility be extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of these devices.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game pins planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area due to the state of the game pins planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered by a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around its base, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting entering game balls is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route for the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game pegs and other structures so that game balls can only enter the large winning opening if they are hit into the right game area. However, it may also be possible for game balls to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether they are hit into the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a gaming ball entering the first starting winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a gaming ball entering the second starting winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A jackpot can also occur if a game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 when the operating port is open due to a small win game state enters the V-winning area 870. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V-winning. A small win is a win that opens the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a predetermined value, and a jackpot can occur provided that a V-winning occurs. In the V-judgment winning device 87, the game state in which the operating port opens is called a "small win game state." A jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the V-winning area during a small win game state is called a "jackpot via a small win." In contrast, a jackpot game state that is entered based on the display result of the special pattern variable display by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is called a "jackpot due to a special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable prize ball device 7 repeatedly switches between an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable prize ball device 7 is open (the large prize opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, and then set to the closed state when a predetermined condition for ending the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the condition for ending the open state is met, a continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot gaming state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or second special symbol begins when the first start condition (first execution condition) or second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the gaming ball passes through the first start entry slot or second start entry slot (including winning) as the start entry area), and then when the variable display start condition (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being played) is met. After the variable display time (variation time) has elapsed, the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the gaming ball passing through refers to the gaming ball passing through an area that has been pre-determined as a winning area, such as a prize slot or gate, and is a concept that includes the gaming ball entering the prize slot (winning). Furthermore, deriving and displaying the display result refers to the final stopped display (confirmed display) of the symbol (an example of identification information).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (identify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning slot. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning slot. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start win occurs in the second start win slot, even if there is a pending memory of a first start win, the variable display of the second special symbol based on that second start win takes priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol takes priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And each time the variable display on the second special pattern display device 4B begins, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

Further above the second reserve display 25B is the first reserve display 25A, which consists of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning slot, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve display 25A increases the number of lit displays by one each time a valid start winning occurs. And, each time a variable display is started on the first special pattern display device 4A, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

In pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of gameplay experiences by firing game balls in either a "left hit" aimed at the left game area or a "right hit" aimed at the right game area depending on the game situation. The following explains the flow of gameplay once the player starts playing on pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a player sits down at the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, they first play by hitting the ball from the left so that the gaming ball will enter the first starting winning slot. Then, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to a special symbol), they switch from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and play by aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot gaming state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball from the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot gaming state, the player plays by hitting the ball with the right hand to aim at the opened special variable winning ball device 7. During the jackpot gaming state, a right-hand hit promotion notification is issued. After the jackpot gaming state ends, if the time-saving state described below is entered, the player continues playing by hitting the ball with the right hand. After the jackpot gaming state ends, if the time-saving state is entered, a time-saving notification is issued on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right-hand hit promotion notification is also issued. If the time-saving state is not entered after the jackpot gaming state ends, the right-hand hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot gaming state ends, and the player switches from hitting the ball with the right hand to hitting the ball with the left hand, and the player plays to win the first starting winning slot. Note that if the time-saving state is not entered, a left-hand hit promotion notification (also called a left-hand hit notification) may be issued on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to switch back to hitting the ball with the left hand.

During the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, right-hand hits are used to aim for the variable winning ball device 6B, which has the second start winning port. If a game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result shows a jackpot (a jackpot with a special pattern), right-hand hits are used to aim for the special variable winning ball device 7 and play continues. Also, if a game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result shows a small win, the operating port of the V-determined winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so right-hand hits are used to aim for the V-determined winning device 87 and play continues. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has begun. Additionally, when controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the V-determining winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, resulting in a V-winning, and a big win via a small win occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. Furthermore, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters the big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues to play by hitting the ball to the right, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

Furthermore, when playing in a small win gaming state, aiming for the V-determining winning device 87, if the gaming ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, no big win will occur. When a V winning does not occur during the small win gaming state, a V winning failure notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, when the small win gaming state ends, a small win end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win gaming state has ended. Then, after the small win gaming state ends, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the variable winning ball device 6B. When the time-saving state ends, the player switches from hitting with the right hand to hitting with the left hand and plays to have the gaming ball win the first starting winning slot. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hitting and continue playing.

Figure 19-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each hit type, the conditions for a jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after a jackpot, the number of times the ball opens during a jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time for each round during a jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types include a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small hit, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small hit, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small hit. The number in parentheses for a jackpot via a small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start entry port provided in the variable ball entry device 6B and the second special symbol is displayed as a small win symbol. Whether the special symbol is displayed as a small win symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (special symbol small win determination). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-determining entry device 87 opens in an opening pattern of 10 openings and a 0.1-second opening time. The game control state after the small win game state ends (the big win probability, small win probability, and base, described below) is the same as before the small win. In a small win, prize balls are paid out for game balls that enter the V entry area 870 in the V-determining entry device 87 during the small win game state. Approximately 10 winning balls can be generated during the small win game state, and approximately 30 prize balls can be paid out depending on the winning balls.

When a game ball enters the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open and the game ball enters the V-entry area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V entry), a jackpot occurs. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a small win via jackpot. Small win via jackpots include 16 (15)R time-saving jackpots via small wins, 9 (8)R time-saving jackpots via small wins, and 5 (4)R time-saving jackpots via small wins, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. A small win that is linked to have the potential to become a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to have the potential to become a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to have the potential to become a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, jackpots that occur directly from the variable display of special symbols, without going through a minor jackpot, are called pattern jackpots. Examples of pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

As such, jackpots include symbol jackpots that occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Both symbol jackpots and small jackpots are jackpots that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and are called time-saving jackpots. In this embodiment, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player also include the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R). A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened four times (4R). A 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the winning device opens for 16 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened only 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 15R time-saving jackpot. A 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via a small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning slot opens 8 times (8R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. A 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via a small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning slot opens 4 times (4R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. Although the winning device opens for 5 rounds, the large winning slot actually opens only 4 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning slot is the same type of jackpot as a 4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern.

The time-saving state after a 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one where the second special symbol changes display once, and one where the total number of times the first and second special symbols change display is five. The number of times the time-saving end condition of the second special symbol changing display once is set taking into account that a 100% probability of a game ball entering the V-determining winning device 87 will enter the V-winning area 870. When the second special symbol changes display, a small win occurs at a rate of approximately 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of the second special symbol changing display once is set to the number of times that a jackpot via a small win can occur when the second special symbol changes display.

The time-saving termination condition of one variable display of the second special symbol is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) generally continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once. However, to display the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-hand hit is required to cause the game ball to enter the passage gate 41, opening the variable winning ball device 6B, and then allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It can take time for the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the reserved first special symbol may be displayed first.

Therefore, the termination condition of five total times the first and second special symbols are displayed is a condition that ensures that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, begins immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, based on reserved memory that can store up to four first special symbols before the jackpot game state. This prevents the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, from being canceled during the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, beginning based on reserved memory that is based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than a 4R time-saving jackpot, two end states are set: one where the second special symbol is displayed seven times, and one where the first and second special symbols are displayed 11 times in total. The seven-time end condition for the time-saving state is set taking into account that a 100% probability of a game ball entering the V-determining winning device 87 will enter the V-winning area 870. When the second special symbol is displayed, a small win occurs at a rate of approximately 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of seven times the second special symbol is displayed is set so that when the second special symbol is displayed, the probability of a small win occurring is significantly higher than in a 4R time-saving jackpot. This draws the player's attention to the occurrence of a small win and increases the player's anticipation for a small win occurring.

The termination condition of 11 total times the first and second special symbols are displayed is to ensure that even if the display of the first special symbol based on reserved memory (up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state) begins immediately after the start of the time-saving mode, before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, for seven times can still be displayed. This prevents a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be displayed during the time-saving mode, even if the display of the first special symbol based on reserved memory (based on the first start winning) begins immediately after the start of the time-saving mode and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is configured to allow entry from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path in terms of starting the winning than if the game ball flowed down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning in the event of a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small jackpot game state, the V-determining winning device 87 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path.

In addition to this comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, it is easier for the first path to result in a winning entry into that variable winning port, and in other states such as the high base state, big win game state, and small win game state, it is easier for the second path to result in a winning entry into that variable winning port than the first path, such that in the normal state it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the first path, and in other game states it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the second path.

Figure 19-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Figure 19-3 shows the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows:

(1) Random R: A random counter used to determine whether a jackpot or a small jackpot will occur. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, incrementing from 0 until it reaches its upper limit of 65,535, and then incrementing again from 0. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (one of the following types: 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot symbol (for determining the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a win based on a normal symbol will occur (for determining whether a normal symbol will win). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpots include multiple types: a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot or a small jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), the jackpot type is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (Random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, the determined jackpot is invalid unless a V win occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (Random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Additionally, when a small win type is determined, the small win symbol is also determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to determine the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is first determined using a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a fluctuation pattern determination random number (Random 3). In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation mode. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 19-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table, the second special symbol hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 19-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 19-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting. It is 1/199 for setting 1, 1/190 for setting 2, 1/180 for setting 3, 1/170 for setting 4, 1/160 for setting 5, and 1/150 for setting 6. Therefore, the probability of winning increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 19-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining big hits and small hits for the second special symbol, and is a table in which big hit determination values and small hit determination values that are compared with random R are set. The top row in Figure 19-4(B) is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row in Figure 19-4(B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row of Figure 19-4(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row of Figure 19-4(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a jackpot for the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 for setting 1, 1/190 for setting 2, 1/180 for setting 3, 1/170 for setting 4, 1/160 for setting 5, and 1/150 for setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small jackpot for the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small jackpot may also be set for the first special symbol. In such cases, it is desirable to make the probability of a small jackpot for the first special symbol lower than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small jackpot for the first special symbol could be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry slot (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry slot (second start winning entry), it samples the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the first special symbol hit determination table. If the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it determines that a jackpot has occurred for the first special symbol. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the second special symbol hit determination table. If the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it determines that a jackpot has occurred for the second special symbol. If the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, it compares the extracted value with the small jackpot determination values set in the second special symbol hit determination table. If the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it determines that a small jackpot has occurred for the second special symbol. Deciding to make it a small hit also means provisionally deciding to make it a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally decided because if no V entry occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Determining whether to have a big win or not means determining whether to transition to a big win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or second special pattern the big win pattern. Determining whether to have a small win or not means determining whether to transition to a small win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

Figures 19-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables stored in ROM 101. Figure 19-4 (C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on a first special symbol. Figure 19-4 (D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on a second special symbol.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (C) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and is set with a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of the "15R time-saving jackpot" and "4R time-saving jackpot." The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (D) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and is set with a jackpot determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot."

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (jackpot pattern determination value) that determines the jackpot patterns for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the determination value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a determination value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3." The determination value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a determination value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7."

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type.

The small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (E) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for determining the jackpot type, and sets jackpot determination values corresponding to "16 (15) R time-shortened jackpot via small hit," "9 (8) R time-shortened jackpot via small hit," and "5 (4) R time-shortened jackpot via small hit." However, the jackpot types determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table are provisional jackpot types linked to the first small hit (which will result in a 16 (15) R time-shortened jackpot), the second small hit (which will result in a 9 (8) R time-shortened jackpot), and the third small hit (which will result in a 5 (4) R time-shortened jackpot), respectively, and are invalid if no V win occurs during small hit gameplay.

Figures 19-5 and 19-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 19-5 and 19-6 show the relationship between specific command data for a presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 19-5 and 19-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control status.

The main commands in Figures 19-5 and 19-6 will be explained below. Command 80XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. The presentation control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the presentation display device to start a presentation that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol change command that indicates the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol change command that indicates the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation command that indicates the end of the variable display of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start specification commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command specifying when the large prize opening is closed, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end specification commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction. However, this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories should be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, and fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a ball is initially won into the first or second starting winning slot. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a pattern designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not it will be a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the type of jackpot. Furthermore, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. The first reserved memory buffer has a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example). The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the jackpot type (Random 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2), and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved memory buffer for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. The second reserved memory buffer has a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory number (4 in this example). The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the jackpot type (Random 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2), and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning slot, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Furthermore, based on a win at the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning slot, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved and stored." Note that the random number for determining the type of variation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to vary, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 19-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first pending memory count has reached its upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first pending memory count counter for counting the first pending memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first pending memory count has reached its upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect process that determines in advance at the time of the initial winning the result of the change display and the type of change pattern that will occur when a change based on the initial winning of the detected first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, and the various data obtained at the time of the start win is stored as reserved memory information, and then the conditions for starting the variable display are met, the special pattern normal processing (S110) determines, based on the reserved memory information, whether the variable display result for the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display is a jackpot display result, and determines the jackpot type, based on the jackpot determination value and jackpot type determination value set in correspondence with the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and variable pattern determination value set in correspondence with the various random number values described above.

Meanwhile, separate from such determinations, before the variable display based on a start entry into the first or second start entry port begins, specifically, when the game ball starts entering the first or second start entry port (when the hold memory information is stored), the hold memory information that stores the various data obtained at the time of the start entry is read in advance, and based on the read-ahead hold memory information, a win-time presentation process is executed that makes a pre-reading judgment based on the jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in correspondence with the various random number values described above, to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur, whether or not a minor jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot, and the variation pattern type. By doing so, the presentation control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the display of the presentation pattern is actually executed, and can execute pre-reading presentations such as pre-reading announcements that warn of a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot) during the display of the presentation pattern based on the various judgment results at the time of the start entry.

Then, based on the determination result of the winning presentation processing, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a symbol designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (S1216), and also controls the transmission of a variable type command to the presentation control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a first start winning designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the transmission of a first pending memory count designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first pending memory count counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the presentation control CPU 120 each time a start win is made in the first start win slot.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning slot, a set of four commands - a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first pending memory count designation command - are sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 or the counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the processing of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, CPU 103 executes a winning effect process similar to the winning effect process described in S1215 for the detected start winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Based on the results of the winning effect process, CPU 103 then controls the transmission of a symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1226) and the transmission of a variable type command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1227). Furthermore, CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second starting winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), and also controls the transmission of a second reserved memory count designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory count counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the presentation control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the second start winning slot.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning slot, a set of four commands - a symbol designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory count designation command - are sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Figure 19-8 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the process ends.

If there is no reserved data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, processing is performed to send a customer waiting demo designation command (S80), and then processing ends. On the other hand, if there is reserved data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "2" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "1" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, a common processing routine is used to display the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

Under the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data in that second reserved memory will be executed in priority over the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores them in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer of RAM 102. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted will always match the order of the first pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Furthermore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted will always match the order of the second pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first," the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second," the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing will be performed on the first starting winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing will be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing will be performed on the second starting winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing will be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Therefore, commonality can be achieved between cases where the first special symbol is the target and cases where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes the process of comparing the random number for determining a jackpot with predetermined jackpot determination values or small jackpot determination values, and determining that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot or small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 19-4 (A), or if the second special symbol matches one of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 19-4 (B), it is determined that the special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot gaming state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1" (if it is pointing to "2"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (D) is selected (S74), and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (Random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

Furthermore, if the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values in S61 (N in S61), the process checks whether the data set in the special symbol pointer indicates "second," thereby checking whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the process uses the second special symbol hit determination table in Figure 19-4 (B) to determine whether the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing the small hit determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (Random R) used to determine a big win matches one of the small win determination values shown in Figure 19-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is determined that a small win has occurred for the second special symbol. If a small win has been determined (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 19-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (Random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined to be the type of jackpot via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the random number (Random R) for small hit determination does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with symbol," "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with symbol," "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot," "03" is set in a provisional jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, "04" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, "05" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they will not result in a jackpot unless a V win occurs during small jackpot play.

In S82, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "-", which indicates a loss. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is determined to be one of "1", "5", or "9", which corresponds to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is determined to be one of "3" or "7", which corresponds to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 19-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release pre-processing (S118). In the small win release pre-processing, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to open the movable part 872 based on the small win release mode, thereby starting the opening operation of the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 sends a small win start command to the presentation control CPU 120, indicating that the small win game state is about to begin (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-determination winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 during the small win release state as the termination condition for that release state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-determination winning number counter is set to "10," setting it to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release processing (S119) (S414).

Figure 19-10 is a flowchart showing the small win release process (S119) in the special symbol process. During the small win release process, the CPU 103 updates the small win release control timer by subtracting 1 (S430). Next, in S435 (described below), it checks whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter, which counts the number of V-winning balls, is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" in S413 of Figure 19-9, and when 10 V-winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0." If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it checks whether the small win release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win, causing the movable part 872 to operate in the open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 (S433).

Next, to determine whether a V entry has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V entry area 870, which is open inside the V determination entry device 87, through the V entry opening, the V entry switch 87a is determined to be in the ON state (S434). If the V entry switch 87a is in the ON state in S434, a V entry has been detected, and the V entry flag, which is set when a V entry is detected, is set (S435). Then, processing is performed to send a V entry ball detection command (S436). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a V entry ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V entries. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening/closing member, changing the V entry opening of the V entry area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole, the V-winning opening of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that subsequently enter the V-determination winning device 87 are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-determination winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the switch is not on in S434, it means that a V win has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V-determining win switch 15a is on (S438). If the switch is on in S438, proceed to S439; if the switch is not on in S438, processing ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 19-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and processing is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection command (S440). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball has been detected after a V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-determination winning number counter is "0" in S431, this means that the number of V-determination winnings for small wins has reached the upper limit, thereby satisfying the small win release termination condition. When the small win release control timer times out in S432, this means that the small win release termination condition has been satisfied due to the end of the small win release control. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to a closed state, thereby closing the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-determination winning number counter is "0," the V-determination winning device 87 is forcibly closed in accordance with the count value of the V-determination winning number counter, even if it is in the middle of opening in accordance with the small win release mode. When the small win release control timer times out, the V-determination winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control for the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the valid period for a V prize after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V prize valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and processing ends. This starts timing the specific period that is the valid period for a V prize after the V determination winning device 87 is closed. Note that by setting the specific period that is the valid period for a V prize in this way, the game ball can be detected even if it happens to pass through the V prize area later than the normal time. Furthermore, because the specific period has been set, even if someone tries to fraudulently enter the V prize area, only that period will be detected, which can also prevent fraud.

Figure 19-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special symbol process. During the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V prize validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441) and checks whether the V prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

If the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is detected, has been set (S443). If the V winning flag has been set, processing ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag has not been set, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in the on state (S444) to determine whether a V winning, which occurs when a gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period, has been detected. If the V winning switch 87a is not in the on state in S444, processing ends. On the other hand, if the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in S444, it means that a V winning has been detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag is set to indicate that a V winning has been detected (S445). Then, processing is performed to send a V winning designation command (S446), and processing ends. This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

If the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small prize end command (S447). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the small prize has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V prize area 870 (V prize opening) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (S448). If the V prize flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big prize, and the big prize flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win gaming state, if you hit the ball to the right in accordance with the right hit promotion notification described below, there is an approximately 100% probability that the gaming ball will enter the V-determination winning device 87. Any gaming ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always V-enter the V-entry area 870, and the V-entry flag will be set with an approximately 100% probability (S435 in Figure 19-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the gaming state is controlled to a big win state.

Next, the CPU 103 officially stores the data indicating the jackpot type via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the determination that a V win has resulted in a proper jackpot (S450). The time-saving flag that was set at that time is then temporarily reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state has begun. Next, the jackpot entry port control timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (S453).

Furthermore, the jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (e.g., 15, 8, or 4), opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and interval time (time the large prize opening is closed between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of this data, the number of openings data is set in an opening count counter that counts the number of openings. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and processing ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, a jackpot gaming state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via a small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and processing ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in a small win gaming state, the game will not transition to a jackpot gaming state.

[Explanation of Feature 02TM]
Next, the characteristic part 02TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 20-1 to 20-66.
In this embodiment, the count value (jackpot occurrence count value) can be updated in response to being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.
Furthermore, when this count value exceeds a predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, "3") or more), the variable display period can be made shorter than the variable display period when this count value does not exceed the predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, less than "3")).
In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can display a specific display (jackpot count display) on the image display device 5 regarding the relationship between this count value and a predetermined value.

[Decorative designs, small designs]
Each performance symbol (decorative symbol, small symbol) in this embodiment will be described in detail.

<Decorative design>
In this embodiment, decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The decorative symbols in this embodiment are composed of number symbols indicating numbers, etc.

In this embodiment, decorative designs including number designs are decorative designs corresponding to the numbers "1" through "7," such as decorative designs including the numbers "1" through "7."

In addition, in this embodiment, the even-numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "2," "4," and "6") are blue (in this example, decorative patterns shown with blue numbers), the odd-numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "1," "3," and "5") excluding the number "7" are red (in this example, decorative patterns shown with red numbers), and the odd-numbered decorative pattern for the number "7" (numbered pattern corresponding to the number "7") is gold (in this example, decorative patterns shown with gold numbers).

(Defined decorative design)
In this embodiment, as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, a variable display of decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special symbol) in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped/determined in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a symbol matching effect is executed, and a determined decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also stopped (derived).

In this embodiment, the type of determined decorative symbol varies depending on the display result and the type of jackpot (see Figures 20-3 and 20-4). In this embodiment, the determined decorative symbols are set to include loss symbols, even symbols, and odd symbols.

<Small design>
In this embodiment, the small symbols are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols and are displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, and indicate whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stationary display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stationary display of the special symbol. The areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner are designated, from the left, as the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, and the areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner are also common to the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbols is lower than that of the decorative symbols.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, a first hold display area 02TM01E that displays the first hold memory number (0 to 4 first hold displays 02TM01) is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a second hold display area 02TM02E that displays the second hold memory number (0 to 4 second hold displays 02TM02) is provided at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, an active display area 02TM03E that displays an active display 02TM03, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed, is provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, a first pending memory count display area that displays the first pending memory count may be provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending memory count display area 02TM01E), and a second pending memory count display area 02TM06E that displays the second pending memory count may be provided on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second pending memory count display area 02TM02E).

Here, the first hold display area 02TM01E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first hold memory number, and the second hold display area 02TM02E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the second hold memory number.

[Time-saving mode]
In this embodiment, the time-saving state is a state in which control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average normal symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the normal symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and improving the probability of a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state continues until one of the following conditions is met first: (A) a predetermined number of special games have been played, (B) the game is controlled to a big win game state, or (C) the game is controlled to a specific type of small win game state. A state in which the condition for the game to end is that a predetermined number of special games have been played is also called a "time-saving state with a time limit cut off" (time-saving state with a time limit cut off).

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving states are provided: time-saving state A and time-saving state B. Time-saving state A ends when one of the following conditions is met: (A) 10,000 special games with the second special symbol have been played, (B) control has been placed into a big win gaming state, or (C) control has been placed into a small win gaming state corresponding to a normal small win, as described below.

In addition, the b time-saving state ends when one of the following conditions is met: (A) 10,000 special games with the second special symbol have been played, or (B) control has been made to a jackpot gaming state. Unlike the a time-saving state, the b time-saving state does not end when (C) control has been made to a small jackpot gaming state corresponding to a normal small jackpot (see Figure 20-21 (3) No. 3-1).

[Winning type table]
Figure 20-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table. Of the hit type tables, Figure 20-1 (1) is a diagram showing a jackpot type table, and Figure 20-1 (2) is a diagram showing a jackpot via small hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each type of jackpot, the conditions for jackpot occurrence, the control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of times the jackpot is opened (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the following jackpot types are available: "3R symbol normal jackpot," "10Ra time-saving jackpot," "10Rb time-saving jackpot," "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot," and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot."

A small win occurs when the display result of the first special symbol or second special symbol becomes a small win symbol. Whether the display result of the special symbol will be a small win symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (special symbol small win determination). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 opens in either an opening pattern with one opening and an opening time of 0.04 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "first opening pattern"), or an opening pattern with ten openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern") (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern").

In the case of a small win, prize balls are paid out for game balls that enter the V winning area 870 in the V-determining winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small win game state, it is set that approximately 10 winning balls may occur, and prize balls may be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball enters the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open and the game ball enters the V-entry area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V entry), a jackpot will occur. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a small win via jackpot. Small win via jackpots include a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small win" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small win," which have different opening patterns for the V-determination winning device 87.

In this embodiment, a small hit corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small hit" has the first opening pattern of the V-determined winning device 87, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87, and it is not expected to result in a jackpot. Furthermore, if a small hit occurs when controlled to the a-time saving state and a V-winning is not possible, after the end of the small hit, the game will be controlled to the normal state rather than the a-time saving state (see Figures 20-24). Therefore, a small hit corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small hit" is essentially a small hit that is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state. Below, this small hit will be referred to as a "normal small hit," a "falling small hit," or a "first small hit" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" has the second opening pattern of the V-determined winning device 87, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87, and it is expected to result in a jackpot. Furthermore, if a V-winning is achieved with this small hit that occurs while controlled in the a-time saving state, the system will be controlled to the a-time saving state after the end of the jackpot corresponding to that small hit. Therefore, this small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" will essentially be a small hit that will also be controlled to the time-saving state next time. Below, this small hit will be referred to as a "time-saving small hit," "continuous small hit," or "second small hit" as appropriate.

On the other hand, jackpots that occur directly due to the variable display of special symbols, without going through a minor jackpot, are called pattern jackpots. Pattern jackpots include "pattern 3R normal jackpots," "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpots," and "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpots," which occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol.

As such, jackpots include symbol jackpots that occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and small jackpots that occur by winning a V via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 20-1 (1), a "3R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens three times (3R). The game state controlled after a "3R time-limited jackpot" is the normal state.

In addition, a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the a time-saving state.

The time-saving state "a" has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, and another in which the total number of times the first and second special symbols are displayed 10,004 times (not shown). The number of times required for the time-saving state "a" to be displayed 10,000 times is determined by taking into account that when a "time-saving small win" occurs, a game ball that enters the V-judging winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 with a probability of approximately 100%. When the second special symbol is displayed with a variable display, a small win occurs with a probability of approximately 1 in 41.1. Therefore, the end condition for the time-saving state "a" to be displayed 10,000 times is set to the number of times that a small win is likely to occur with a probability of approximately 100% when the second special symbol is displayed with a variable display, and the next small win is essentially confirmed. However, in this embodiment, where there are two types of small wins that can occur in the time-saving mode: a "normal small win" and a "time-saving small win," if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win will occur and the game will be controlled to the normal mode.

In addition, a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the b time-saving state.

The b time-saving state after a "10Rb time-saving big win" has two end conditions, one of which is that the second special symbol changes 10,000 times, and the other is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 10,004 (not shown). The number of times required for the b time-saving state to change 10,000 times is set based on the fact that when a "small time-saving small win" occurs, a gaming ball that enters the V-determining winning device 87 will enter the V-winning area 870 at a rate of approximately 100%. When the second special symbol changes, a small win occurs at a rate of approximately 1 in 41.1. Therefore, the condition for ending the time-saving b state, in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, is set to the number of times that there is an approximately 100% chance of a small win occurring when the second special symbol is displayed, and the next small win is essentially guaranteed. However, in this embodiment, where the small wins that occur in the time-saving b state include "normal small wins" and "time-saving small wins," even if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win will occur and the game will continue to be controlled to the time-saving b state. Therefore, the time-saving b state is essentially a game state in which the second special symbol is displayed variably until a "time-saving small win" is won, and there is an approximately 100% chance of a big win via a small win, and the next big win is essentially guaranteed.

As shown in Figure 20-1 (2), a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.04 seconds x 1 time), and then the large winning slot opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. Also, a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large winning slot opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. In these time-saving jackpots via small wins, the winning device opens for one round, but the large winning slot actually opens 10 times, and players perceive the opening of the large winning slot as being the same or similar type of jackpot as a 10R time-saving jackpot with a pattern.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is configured to allow entry from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path in terms of starting the winning than if the game ball flowed down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning in the event of a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path. Also, in a special state such as a small jackpot game state, the V-determining winning device 87 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path.

In addition to this comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, it is easier to win at that variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as the high base state, jackpot game state, and small jackpot game state, it is easier to win at that variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that in the normal state it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the first path, and in other game states it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the second path.

[Random value]
20-2(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are countable.

Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR5 are set within the ranges shown in Figure 20-2 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random number values MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores multiple types of variable patterns that result in the variable display mode of each symbol, such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol.

[Display result determination table]
20-2(B) ((B1) and (B2)) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 20-2 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the first special symbol]. The display result determination table [for the first special symbol] is a data table for determining whether a first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 20-2 (B1), the top row is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win for the first special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win for the first special symbol is set at 1/200.

Figure 20-2 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the second special symbol]. The display result determination table [for the second special symbol] is a data table for determining whether a second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 20-2 (B2), the top row is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win for the second special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win for the second special symbol is set at 1/41.1.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a small win is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this configuration. A configuration in which a small win is provided for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may also be adopted. For example, a small win may be provided for the second special symbol, while a small win may not be provided for the first special symbol.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry slot (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry slot (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing.

For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is determined for the first special symbol. If the extracted value does not match one of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the small jackpot determination values, a small jackpot is determined for the first special symbol.

For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is determined for the second special symbol. If the extracted value does not match one of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the small jackpot determination values, a small jackpot is determined for the second special symbol. Deciding on a small jackpot also means provisionally deciding on a jackpot via a small jackpot (it is written as provisionally decided because if a V win does not occur during a small jackpot, it will not be controlled as a jackpot).

Determining whether to have a big win or not means determining whether to transition to a big win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Determining whether to have a small win or not means determining whether to transition to a small win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the small win pattern.

[Jackpot type determination table]
Figures 20-3 and 20-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table and the jackpot type determination table via small jackpot stored in ROM 101.

Figure 20-3 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state, and a jackpot type determination table via a small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via a small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state.

Figure 20-4 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in time-saving state a or time-saving state b, and a jackpot type determination table via small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in time-saving state a or time-saving state b.

These jackpot type determination tables and jackpot via small jackpot type determination tables contain the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot, the type of determined decorative pattern, and a jackpot determination value, which is a number compared with the random number value MR2 used to determine the jackpot type, for each jackpot type (jackpot via small jackpot type).

<Normal state jackpot type determination table>
Fig. 20-3 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for first special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state. Fig. 20-3 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol when the game state is in the normal state.

([First special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] in Figure 20-3 (A1) contains values to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "pattern 3R normal jackpot,""pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," and "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 119 (40%) is assigned to a "3R symbol normal jackpot," 120 to 239 (40%) is assigned to a "10Ra symbol time-saving jackpot," and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-3 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 0 for a "3R normal jackpot," 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot," and 10,000 for a "10Rb time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-3 (A1) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this example, the types of fixed decorative symbols are even symbols for a "3R regular jackpot," odd symbols excluding the number symbol "7" for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot," and odd symbols including the number symbol "7" for a "10Rb time-saving jackpot."

([Second special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] in Figure 20-3 (A2) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "pattern 10Ra time-shortened jackpot" and is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-3 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-3 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot" is an odd-numbered symbol with the fixed decorative symbol type being the number symbol "7."

<Normal state small hit via big hit type determination table>
Figure 20-3 (B1) is a small win via jackpot type determination table [for first special symbol] used to determine the small win via jackpot type of a small win via jackpot when a small win is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state. Figure 20-3 (B2) is a small win via jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] used to determine the small win via jackpot type of a small win via jackpot when a small win is determined by the second special symbol when the game state is in the normal state.

([For the first special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for first special pattern] in Figure 20-3 (B1) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," which is a number that is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the [First Special Symbol] Small Win via Big Win Type Determination Table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "Normal Small Win via 10Ra Time-Shortened Big Win."

Figure 20-3 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-3 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decorative symbol for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a miss symbol. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs when a "normal small win" occurs, the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and then to the normal state (see Figure 20-19).

([For the second special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The small jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 20-3 (B2) contains a number to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and is set with a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via normal small jackpot" and "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via time-shortened small jackpot."

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win."

Figure 20-3 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot."

Figure 20-3 (B2) also shows the types of confirmed decorative symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots via small wins. In this example, the types of confirmed decorative symbols for a "normal small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot" are miss symbols and special symbols (described below), while for a "time-saving small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot" they are odd-numbered symbols, such as the number symbol "7."

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs under normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs under normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this small win fanfare period are referred to as small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds for all variable display patterns executed in normal mode (not shown).

<A time-saving state, B time-saving state jackpot type determination table>
Figure 20-4 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b). Figure 20-4 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([First special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] in Figure 20-4 (A1) contains jackpot determination values that are compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to each of the "pattern 3Rb time-shortened jackpot" and "pattern 10Ra time-shortened jackpot."

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 239 (80%) is assigned to a "3Rb time-saving jackpot," and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-4 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "3Rb time-saving jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-4 (A1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern is the odd number pattern "3" for the "Pattern 3Rb Time-saving Jackpot," and the odd number pattern "7" for the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Jackpot."

As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), when a jackpot is determined to have been reached by the first special symbol while the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b), the jackpot type is determined to be either a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," allowing for appropriate presentation control when a jackpot is determined to have been reached by the first special symbol while the game state is in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is won on the first hit, the game is controlled to the b time-saving state, which essentially guarantees the next jackpot. A notification (the 3000 notification notification described below) is executed on the first hit to notify the player that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded: the prize balls for 10 rounds of the first hit (1500 balls) and the prize balls for 10 rounds of the essentially guaranteed next jackpot, (1500 balls), and the player is aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded (see Figure 20-54).

In addition, even if the game is controlled to the b time-saving state, if for some reason the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the variable display of the reserved memory of the first special symbol (variable display whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the variable display that won the initial win ends may be executed. If the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed at this time is determined to be a "jackpot," the number of prize balls that has/will be awarded will differ depending on the type of jackpot that occurs (hereinafter referred to as an "irregular special 1 jackpot")

(A) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot",
(A1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(A2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 3 rounds of prize balls (450 balls)
(A3) Irregular special 1. In the b time-saving state controlled after the jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed. 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
This effectively guarantees that a total of 3,450 prize balls will be awarded.

(B) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot",
(B1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(B2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
This effectively guarantees that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded.

In addition, in the time-saving mode A, which is controlled after an irregular special jackpot, the next jackpot is not essentially guaranteed, so here (B3) it is not considered to be essentially guaranteed that 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls) will be awarded.

In this embodiment, the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first win makes the player aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded. Even if an irregular special 1 jackpot occurs, if a jackpot is determined to be a "Pattern 3Rb time-limited jackpot" or a "Pattern 10Ra time-limited jackpot" when the game state is in the time-limited state, by adopting a configuration in which the jackpot type is determined to be either a "Pattern 3Rb time-limited jackpot" or a "Pattern 10Ra time-limited jackpot," it becomes possible to award more than 3000 prize balls, preventing inconsistencies in the content of the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first win and preventing the player from being at an excessive disadvantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is determined to be a result of the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b), the jackpot type will not be determined to be a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

(C) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot",
(C1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(C2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(A3) Irregular special 1. In the b time-saving state controlled after the jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed. 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
This would essentially guarantee that a total of 4,500 prize balls would be awarded, which would create a contradiction with the content of the 3,000 notification effect at the time of the first win, and would also give the player an excessive advantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded, so a "Pattern 10Rb Time-Shortened Jackpot" is not provided as a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern when the game state is in the time-shortened state.

([Second special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] in Figure 20-4 (A2) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" and is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-4 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-4 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot" is an odd-numbered fixed decorative pattern with the numeric pattern "7."

<A time-saving state, B time-saving state small hit via big hit type determination table>
Figure 20-4 (B1) is a jackpot type determination table via small win [for the first special symbol] when a small win is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is in a time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b). Figure 20-4 (B2) is a jackpot type determination table via small win [for the second special symbol] when a small win is determined by the second special symbol when the game state is in a time-saving state.

([For the first special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for first special pattern] in Figure 20-4 (B1) is set with a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via normal small win," which is a number that is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the [First Special Symbol] Small Win via Big Win Type Determination Table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "Normal Small Win via 10Ra Time-Shortened Big Win."

Figure 20-4 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-4 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern for a "normal small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a miss pattern.

([For the second special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for second special pattern] in Figure 20-4 (B2) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via normal small win" and "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via time-shortened small win" are set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win."

Figure 20-4 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot."

Figure 20-4 (B2) also shows the type of confirmed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of confirmed decorative pattern is a missing pattern in the a time-saving state of a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," a special pattern in the b time-saving state (in this example, a special pattern with the word "END" displayed), and an odd number pattern of the number "7" for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win."

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is set to 0.1 seconds when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as jackpot fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the A time-saving mode or the B time-saving normal mode is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this small win fanfare period are referred to as small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in both the a time-saving state and the b time-saving state, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds (see Figures 20-15 to 20-20).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns mentioned above depending on the pre-determination result.

<Fluctuation pattern without reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach (such as "long fluctuation miss,""high-speedmiss,""ultra-high-speedmiss,""high-speed time-saving small hit,""ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit,""entering fluctuation miss,""entering fluctuation big hit,""entering fluctuation time-saving small hit,""pseudo fluctuation miss,""direct big hit,"("high-speed normal small hit" = "high-speed miss")," etc.) is a fluctuation pattern in which a reach is not established after the fluctuation display has started, and a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the fluctuation display result will be either a "miss,""bighit,""time-saving small hit," or "normal small hit" is displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "miss," the fluctuation display period when determined to be a "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern is 1000 ms, when determined to be a "super-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 200 ms, when determined to be a "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 10,000 ms, when determined to be a "thrust fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 30,200 ms, and when determined to be a "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 2,800 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern is 10,000 ms, and when it is determined to be a "break-in fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern is 40,000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "time-saving small win," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern is 5,000 ms, when it is determined to be a "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 500 ms, and when it is determined to be a "push-in fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 30,500 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "normal small win," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed normal small win" fluctuation pattern is 1000 ms.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern of a normal small win during b time reduction: In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of a "high-speed normal small win." This "high-speed normal small win" fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with the same presentation as the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, and after the fluctuation display starts, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the fact that a reach is not established and the fluctuation display result is a "miss" (for example, "245") is displayed stationary. When a "normal small win" occurs in the b time reduction state, even if a V win does not occur, the system continues to be controlled to the b time reduction state (i.e., it is not controlled to the normal state (does not fall)) (see Figures 20-24). Since there is no need to notify that the fluctuation display result has become a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, the same fluctuation pattern as when the fluctuation display result is a "miss" is used.

<Example of "Super High Speed Time Shortening Small Win">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "ultra-fast time-saving small hit" will be explained using Figure 20-5.

Figure 20-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images for each effect associated with the "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

Figures 20-5 (1) and (2) show the various effect images and third decorative symbols corresponding to the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] effect mode, and as they are the same as those in Figures 20-28 (1) and (2) described below, their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-5 (3), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a reduced size, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in a reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display being a "time-saving small win."

Next, as shown in Figure 20-5 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the effect control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that results in a "time-saving small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (i.e., a symbol matching effect is being executed for the third decorative symbols). At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, fixes and stops the fixed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (i.e., executing a symbol matching effect for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (6), when the CPU 103 starts a small win game in the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a small win game start image on the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right hit promotion image containing the words "Aim for V!!" to win a V and an arrow image indicating a right hit, as well as an ally character.

[Inrush fluctuation]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern executed in the first fluctuation of the time-saving state a when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (i.e., the first fluctuation of the first controlled "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") is composed of a fluctuation pattern (first half) and a fluctuation pattern (second half). In the fluctuation pattern (first half), for example, a "push-in fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed. In this embodiment, after the "push-in fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed in the fluctuation pattern (first half), a fluctuation pattern (second half) according to each fluctuation display result is executed.

In the variation pattern (second half), a decorative pattern variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display. This effect is called the "display result notification variation effect." In the display result notification variation effect of the variation pattern (second half), for example, if the variation display result is a "miss," a variation display of the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern (200 ms) is executed, and if the variation display result is a "time-saving small win," a variation display of the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" variation pattern (500 ms) is executed.

The "entry fluctuation" of the fluctuation pattern (first half) is a fluctuation pattern in which, after information suggesting the currently controlled display mode is displayed, a pseudo-fluctuation display of decorative symbols is executed (the display of decorative symbols begins to fluctuate, a combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" when a reach is not achieved is temporarily stopped, and then the display of decorative symbols begins to fluctuate, a combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" when a reach is not achieved is temporarily stopped, repeating this pseudo-fluctuation), and at a predetermined timing, information suggesting the currently controlled display mode is displayed again, along with information suggesting that the currently controlled display mode will be started (see Figures 20-7 to 20-9). Hereinafter, the series of pseudo-fluctuations from the display of decorative symbols beginning to the temporary stopping of a combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" when a reach is not achieved is referred to as a "unit pseudo-fluctuation." Therefore, a pseudo-fluctuation display is a display in which multiple unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed.

In the "entry fluctuation" of this embodiment, the information suggesting the currently controlled presentation mode is the words "ultra-high speed" or "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start suggestion presentation"), and the information suggesting that the currently controlled presentation mode will begin is the words "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" or "entering ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start notification presentation").

In addition, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols in a "thrust fluctuation" is such that the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the period from when the first decorative symbol fluctuation display begins until the decorative symbol combination that results in a "miss" without a reach being achieved (hereinafter referred to as the "unit pseudo-fluctuation period" as appropriate), and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period. Similarly, the unit pseudo-fluctuation period becomes shorter each time a pseudo-fluctuation is executed thereafter, i.e., the speed of the pseudo-fluctuation becomes faster at an accelerated rate. Below, this type of pseudo-fluctuation effect is referred to as an "accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect" as appropriate. In this example, a total of seven unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect.

In this way, by executing an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect in the fluctuation pattern of the first "entry fluctuation" of the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" that is controlled for the first time, it is possible to impress upon the player that the speed at which the fluctuation display of the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" is consumed is faster than the speed at which the fluctuation display of other presentation modes is consumed.

In this embodiment, when a pseudo-change of a decorative symbol (the "third decorative symbol" described below) during an acceleration pseudo-change performance is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative symbol temporarily stops, the display includes the base symbol and the number symbol, but does not include a light effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative symbol is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and is displayed in a manner in which the display color inside the number symbol appears to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special mode" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during an acceleration pseudo-change performance, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a manner that does not include a light effect display, but by being displayed in a special mode, the player is made aware that the currently executing change is a pseudo-change.

In addition, when the accelerated pseudo-variation effect ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative symbol is not displayed in a special manner, allowing the player to recognize that the currently executed variation is not a pseudo-variation, that is, that it is actually a variation display of a decorative symbol to notify the display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period of the jackpot game state when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the word "READY" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will begin (the "entry fluctuation" will begin).

<Example of "missing entry fluctuation">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 20-6 and Figures 20-7 to 20-10.

Figure 20-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the "enter-vary-miss" variation pattern, and Figures 20-7 to 20-10 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the effect images of each effect associated with the "enter-vary-miss" variation pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 20-7 (1), at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period in the jackpot game state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the word "READY" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-7 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 20-6), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication effect and displays the words "Super High Speed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols begins in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-7 (3) to (7), during the period from 10 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol variation to 17.5 seconds (the period from T2 to T3 (7.5 seconds) shown in Figure 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 20-7 (3), (6), and (7), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in Figure 20-7 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication effect and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" are an image with a higher display priority than the third decorative symbol. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" and the third decorative symbol are displayed in that order.

The display of the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text at this time is less visible than the display of the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text displayed in the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended. In this example, the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text during the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect is displayed in light white text, while the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text during the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended is displayed in thick black text.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-7 (8) to 20-8 (11), during the period from 17.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol variation until 21 seconds have elapsed (the period from T3 to T4 (3.5 seconds) shown in Figure 20-6), the presentation control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation presentation (second unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 20-8 (10) and (11), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in Figure 20-8 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication effect and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-8 (12) and subsequent figures, after 21 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 began displaying the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in Figure 20-6), the effect control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation effect (third to eighth unit pseudo-variations), and executes pseudo-variations of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in Figure 20-9 (13) to (15), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (seventh unit pseudo-variation) and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-9 (16), when 25.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 began displaying the second special symbol (timing T9 shown in Figure 20-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the accelerated pseudo-variation effect, erases the third decorative symbol from the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes a mode start notification effect, and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black letters) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-9 (17), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the mode start notification effect and displays the words "Entering Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black text) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-9 (18) to 20-10 (21), during the period from 30 seconds after CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbols to 30.2 seconds after (the period from T10 to T11 shown in Figure 20-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode start notification effect, erases the words "Entering Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH" from the center of the screen of image display device 5, executes the variable display of the third decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms stop) the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is actually being displayed to notify the display result of the change display rather than a pseudo-change, displays the third decorative pattern in a manner that includes a light effect display rather than in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop). The performance control CPU 120 also displays various performance images corresponding to the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] performance mode on the image display device 5 (see Figures 20-28 described below).

In this embodiment, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], if a "normal small win" occurs after a small number of variable display cycles, the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, which has a high probability of selecting a variable display pattern with an extremely short variable display period ("Super High Speed Miss" (0.2 seconds)) compared to other presentation modes. This means that there is a risk that the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], which can only be controlled after multiple jackpots have occurred, will end without sufficient play.

In consideration of the occurrence of such a situation, the first controlled [ultra-high speed HYPER
By executing the "inrush fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (30 seconds or more) at a rate of 100% in the first fluctuation of [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to ensure a control period of at least 30 seconds or more for [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] even if the player falls out of [Ultra High Speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage.

In addition, during the first fluctuation of the first controlled [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect) is executed 100% of the time, so even if you fall out of [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage, pseudo fluctuations of the decorative symbols similar to the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] are executed multiple times, so although it is a pseudo fluctuation, you can still play the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at least multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period can be changed depending on the number of jackpots that occur. For example, the jackpot ending period for a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 (i.e., the jackpot immediately before the first "Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH" control) can be set to 30 seconds, and during this period, information suggesting that the first control will be set to "Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH" after the jackpot (such as the words "Ultra-High Speed," "Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH," or "Entering Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH") can be displayed.

However, pachinko gaming machines are prohibited from displaying decorative symbol variations or similar presentation modes during a jackpot game state (jackpot ending period). Therefore, while it is possible to display information suggesting that control will be switched to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time during the jackpot ending period, it is not possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variation presentation, and it is not possible to notify the player that the speed at which the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] variation display is consumed is faster than the speed at which the variation display is consumed in other presentation modes.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effects and the display of information suggesting that control will be switched to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time are displayed during the first fluctuation controlled by [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], rather than during the jackpot ending period.

[Pseudo fluctuation deviation]
In this embodiment, the "pseudo fluctuation miss" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a unit pseudo fluctuation of a decorative pattern (the "third decorative pattern" described later) is executed three times in succession, and after the third unit pseudo fluctuation is completed, a variable display of the third decorative pattern is executed to notify that the display result is a "miss", and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result is a "miss" is displayed in a stopped state (see Figures 20-12 and 20-13). In other words, this is a variation pattern in which three unit pseudo fluctuations and one variable display to notify the display result of the variable display are executed. The effect in which a variable display to notify the display result of the variable display is executed is called a "display result notification variable effect".

In this embodiment, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols in the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern is such that the first unit pseudo-fluctuation period, the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period, and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period are all set to 700 ms, which is the period during which the decorative symbols undergo pseudo-fluctuation (200 ms) plus the period during which the decorative symbols temporarily stop (500 ms). In other words, a configuration is adopted in which all three unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed at the same speed (uniform speed). Hereinafter, this type of pseudo-fluctuation effect will be referred to as "uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation effect" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, when the pseudo-variation of the decorative symbols during the uniform speed pseudo-variation effect is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative symbol temporarily stops, the configuration includes a base symbol, a number symbol, and a light effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative symbol is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number symbol is displayed in a manner that makes it appear to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special manner" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during the uniform speed pseudo-variation effect, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner, allowing the player to recognize that the currently executing variation is a pseudo-variation.

In addition, when the uniform speed pseudo-variation effect ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, allowing the player to recognize that the variation currently being executed is not a pseudo-variation.

<Example of "pseudo fluctuation miss">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 20-11 and Figures 20-12 to 20-13.

Figure 20-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with a "pseudo-fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, and Figures 20-12 and 20-13 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images for each effect associated with a "pseudo-fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern.

First, as shown in Figures 20-12 (1) to (3), during the period from when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol until 0.7 seconds have elapsed (the period from T1 to T2 shown in Figure 20-11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a uniform pseudo-variation effect (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 20-12 (3), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figures 20-28 described below).

Next, as shown in Figures 20-12 (4) to (6), during the period from 0.7 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol variation to 1.4 seconds after (the period from T2 to T3 shown in Figure 20-11), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a uniform pseudo-variation presentation (second unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 20-12 (6), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-12 (7) to 20-13 (9), during the period from 1.4 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol to 2.1 seconds after (the period from T3 to T4 shown in Figure 20-11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a uniform pseudo-variation effect (third unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 20-13 (9), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-13 (10) to (13), during the period from 2.1 seconds after CPU 103 starts the display of the changing second special symbols to 2.8 seconds after (the period from T4 to T5 shown in Figure 20-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the uniform speed pseudo-changing effect, ends the pseudo-changing of the third decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes the display of the changing third decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms stop) the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the third decorative pattern in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop), based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is actually being displayed to notify the display result of the change display, rather than a pseudo-change.

[Direct jackpot]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more, in the time-saving state a (i.e., "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") or the time-saving state b (i.e., "invincible RUSH"), if the result of the change display of the second special symbol is "jackpot", the change pattern of "direct jackpot" is executed.

The "direct jackpot" variation pattern is one in which the decorative symbols disappear after the variable display begins, and the variable display ends with the decorative symbols remaining hidden. In this variation pattern, when the variable display ends, the combination of small symbols that indicates the variable display result is a "jackpot" is confirmed and stopped (see Figure 20-14).

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7, which has a large winning opening, is equipped with a light-emitting device, and when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 and the time-saving state a (i.e., "Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH") or time-saving state b (i.e., "Invincible RUSH") is active, if a jackpot occurs based on the variable display result of the second special symbol being a "jackpot," the special variable winning ball device 7 can be made to emit light at a timing controlled to enter the jackpot game state.

＜Example of "Direct Big Hit"＞
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "direct big hit" will be explained using Figure 20-14.

Figure 20-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images for each effect associated with the "direct big hit" variation pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 20-14 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figures 20-28 described below).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-14 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories), the performance control CPU 120 erases the third decorative symbol from the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-14 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, erases the third decorative symbol and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 (i.e., the symbol matching effect is not executed for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently executing variable display is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (4), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot round game start image on the image display device 5. This jackpot round game start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the text "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, a jackpot right-hit promotion image including the text "Aim for the attacker!!" to enter the jackpot into the jackpot entry port and an arrow image indicating a right hit, and an ally character. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving mode is activated, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed frequently, and the display result is often determined to be a "small win," resulting in a big win. However, when the time-saving mode is activated and the display result is determined to be a "big win," the player feels disappointed that they would have won better in the normal mode.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot," and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!" (or "Aim for V!!" in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to draw the player's attention from the image display device 5 to the big winning opening, thereby reducing the disappointment felt when a jackpot has occurred due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot."

<Fluctuating patterns with normal reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern accompanying a normal reach (such as "high-speed normal reach miss" or "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit") means that after the reach state is established, the final display result is confirmed and stopped without the super reach effects (challenge effects, fall effects, etc.) described below being executed.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns involving normal reach when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern is 3000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that accompany a normal reach when the fluctuation display result is a "time-saving small win," the fluctuation display period is 7000 ms when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win."

<Fluctuating patterns with super reach>
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("Super reach A miss,""Super reach B miss,""Super reach C miss,""Super reach A small time-saving hit,""Super reach A big hit,""Super reach B normal small hit,""Super reach C small time-saving hit"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach effect that notifies whether a "large hit,""small time-saving hit," or "normal small hit" has been won.

(Super Reach A (challenge effect))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving super reaches, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach A Miss,""Super Reach A Small Time-Shortening Win," and "Super Reach A Big Win," a reach state is established with the start of the variation display, and a Super Reach A effect (hereinafter referred to as a "challenge effect") is executed, in which an ally character performs the action of throwing a bomb at a rock to notify whether or not the ally character has won a "small time-shortening win" or a "big win." Here, if the final display result is a "miss," an effect in which the ally character fails the challenge (failure effect) is executed. In the failure effect, a failure symbol is statically displayed in the symbol display area. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-shortening win" or a "big win," an effect in which the ally character succeeds in the challenge (success effect) is executed (see Figure 20-58). In the failure effect, a big win symbol is statically displayed in the symbol display area (a symbol alignment effect is executed).

(Super Reach B (Fall-inducing performance))
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach B Miss" and "Super Reach B Normal Small Win" among the variation patterns accompanying the Super Reach, when the variation display starts, a fall suggestion display (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing an "!" and the word "WARNING") is displayed, and then a reach state is established, and by operating the push button 31B on the special symbol provisionally stopped in the symbol display area 5C (the special symbol of the word "END" indicating the end of the time-saving state), a Super Reach B effect (hereinafter referred to as a "fall-inducing effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not a "normal small win" has been won. Here, if the final display result is a "miss," the provisionally stopped special symbol is successfully destroyed, and an effect (fall-avoidance effect) is executed in which a losing symbol is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "normal small hit," the temporarily stopped special symbol fails to be destroyed, and an effect (a confirmed fall effect) is executed in which the special symbol is confirmed to stop in the symbol display area 5C (see Figure 20-61).

(Super Reach C (instant hit on button))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns accompanying the super reach, in the variation patterns of "Super reach C miss" and "Super reach C time-saving small win", the reach is not established after the variation display has started, and an operation prompt display imitating the push button 31B and a time bar to notify the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in each area of the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and each time the push button 31B is operated once, a decorative pattern is displayed stationary in each pattern display area (for example, the pattern display areas 5R → 5L → 5C are displayed stationary), and by operating the push button 31B a total of three times, a combination of decorative patterns is displayed stationary in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a super reach C effect (hereinafter referred to as "button immediate win effect" as appropriate) that notifies whether or not the "time-saving small win" has been won.

If the final display result is a "miss," an effect (miss symbol effect) is executed in which a decorative symbol combination (miss symbol) that results in a "miss" final display result is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-saving win," an effect (match symbol effect) is executed in which a decorative symbol combination (odd number 7 symbol "777") that results in a "small time-saving win" final display result is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which Super Reach A to Super Reach C were provided as types of Super Reach, but this is not limited to this form, and types of Super Reach other than Super Reach A to Super Reach C may also be provided.

For example, suppose Super Reach D is provided as a Super Reach. Among the variation patterns accompanying Super Reach, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach D Miss," "Super Reach D Small Time-Shortening Hit," and "Super Reach D Big Hit," a reach state is established as soon as the variation display begins, and a Super Reach D effect (hereinafter referred to as "battle effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not the ally character has won a "small time-shortening hit" or a "big hit" as they battle an enemy character. Here, if the final display result is a "miss," an effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect). On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-shortening hit" or a "big hit," an effect is executed in which the ally character triumphs over the enemy character (victory effect). The ally characters appearing in this battle effect are associated with the ally characters of the movable body 02TM100, which will be described later.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination during Dream Rush, Ultra-High-Speed Hyper Rush, and Invincible Rush (see Figures 20-25), which will be described later. Specifically, the following fluctuation pattern determination tables are pre-prepared: a [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "miss," a [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "jackpot," a [time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "time-saving small win," and a [normal small win] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "normal small win."

[For misses] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the random number value MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns can take is assigned as the determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns: "long fluctuation miss," "high-speed miss," "high-speed normal reach miss," "super reach A miss," "super reach B miss," "ultra-high-speed miss," "super reach C miss," and "entry fluctuation miss."

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern: "Super Reach A Jackpot," "Invasion Fluctuating Jackpot," and "Direct Jackpot."

[For time-saving small wins] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern: "high-speed time-saving small win," "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win," "super reach A time-saving small win," "entering fluctuation time-saving small win," "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win," and "super reach C time-saving small win."

[For normal small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern: "Super Reach B normal small hit," "Rush fluctuation normal small hit," and "High-speed normal small hit."

In this embodiment, jackpots include symbol jackpots that occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and small jackpots that occur via V entry via small jackpots based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol. Therefore, different variable patterns are used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot." However, this is not limited to this form, and a common variable pattern may be used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [For 0 reserved items] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
20-15(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [time-saving state a (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2 in the time-saving state a, the presentation mode is controlled to "Dream Rush" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-15(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [time-saving state a (Dream Rush)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 800 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 are assigned to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [for reserved 1 to 4] fluctuation pattern determination table>
20-16(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 pieces] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. That is, FIG. 20-16(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 pieces] in [a time-saving state (Dream Rush)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 800 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)], [1st fluctuation] fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 20-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first fluctuation in the time-saving state a (jackpot occurrence count value = 3) in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 in the time-saving state a, the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 20-25). That is, Figures 20-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first fluctuation in the time-saving state a (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH) controlled for the first time after the first win in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "incoming fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "entering fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "intrusive fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "intrusion fluctuation normal small win" fluctuation pattern.

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000), [0 reserved]] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 20-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for "0 reserved balls" in the "time-saving mode a (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000)" in this embodiment. Note that the first fluctuation is excluded when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 in the "time-saving mode a," the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 20-25). That is, Figures 20-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for "0 reserved balls" in the "time-saving mode a (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)" in this embodiment (the first fluctuation is excluded when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3).

As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-high speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000), [reserved 1 to 4]] fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 20-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in the [time-saving mode a (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000)] in this embodiment. Note that the first fluctuation is excluded when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 in the time-saving mode a, the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 20-25). That is, Figures 20-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in the [time-saving mode a (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (the first fluctuation is excluded when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3).

As shown in Figure 20-19 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 975 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 976 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[b Time-saving state] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
20-20(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the b time-saving state is in effect, the performance mode is controlled to "invincible rush" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-20(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible rush) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "high-speed normal small hit" fluctuation pattern.

In this way, during the period when the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state a, when the jackpot occurrence count value is between 3 and 10,000 (above the mode switching judgment value), the probability that the "ultra-high speed non-reach miss" variation pattern, whose variation display period is shorter than 1,000 ms, is executed is approximately 80%. On the other hand, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (below the mode switching judgment value), the probability that the "ultra-high speed non-reach miss" variation pattern, whose variation display period is shorter than 1,000 ms, is executed is 0%. Therefore, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching judgment value of "3," the probability that the variation pattern, whose variation display period is shorter than 1,000 ms, is executed is higher than when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than the mode switching judgment value of "3."

[Post-win control table by game state]
FIG. 20-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a post-win control table for each game state in this embodiment. FIG. 20-21 (1) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "jackpot" when the game state is in the normal state, according to each display result (jackpot type). Also, FIG. 20-21 (2) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the time-saving state A, according to each display result (small win type) and whether or not a V prize has occurred. Also, FIG. 20-21 (3) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the time-saving state B, according to each display result (small win type) and whether or not a V prize has occurred.

As shown in Figure 20-21 (1), when the game state is normal,
(No. 1-1) If the display result is "3R normal jackpot", it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-2) If the display result is "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", it will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-3) If the display result is "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," the reel will be controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot.

As shown in Figure 20-21 (2), when the game state is in a time-saving state,
(No. 2-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 2-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 2-3) If the display result is "time-limited small hit" and no V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 2-4) If the display result is a "time-shortened small hit" and a V prize occurs during the small hit, the machine will be controlled to a time-shortened state after a big hit via the small hit.

As shown in Figure 20-21 (3), when the game state is in the b time-saving state,
(No. 3-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the b time reduction state after the small hit,
(No. 3-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 3-3) If the display result is "time-limited small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 3-4) If the display result is a "time-shortened small hit" and a V prize occurs during the small hit, the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after a big hit via the small hit.

In this way, when the game state is in time-saving state a, the display result of (No. 2-1) will be "normal small win," and if no V win occurs during that small win, the game will be controlled to the normal state after that small win.On the other hand, when the game state is in time-saving state b, the display result of (No. 3-1) will be "normal small win," and if no V win occurs during that small win, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state b after that small win.

[Special symbol stop processing]
20-22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (S113) in the special symbol process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S02TM1010).

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state when it is determined in the normal special symbol processing (S110) of FIG. 16 that the variable display result of the special symbol game is a "jackpot" and that the game should be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, the flag is cleared to the OFF state when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

If the jackpot flag is on (YES in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start presentation wait time (step S02TM1020) and proceeds to step S02TM1030. In the processing of step S02TM1020, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot start presentation wait time is set in a game control process timer located in a specified area of RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1030), clears the jackpot flag to the OFF state (step S02TM1040), and proceeds to step S02TM1050.

In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command is a command (jackpot fanfare command) that designates the display of a designation image indicating the start of a jackpot game state, and is included in the designation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the designation control board 12. In the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the determination result of the jackpot type. In the processing of step S02TM1030, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM1050), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (step S02TM1060), and then ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the jackpot occurrence count value as the predetermined numerical data is the value stored in the jackpot occurrence counter. The jackpot occurrence counter is provided in a predetermined area of RAM 102, and counts the number of times that it has been determined that control to a jackpot has occurred in that gaming state, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state, in a manner that allows identification.

In this example, the jackpot occurrence counter is initially set to an initial count value of "0," and is updated by adding "1" to the stored jackpot occurrence count value each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the number of times a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state, reaches a predetermined upper limit value (10,000 in this embodiment) (when limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 10,000), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0." Thereafter, the jackpot occurrence count value is incremented by "1" each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value was updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot occurrence count value may also be updated by subtracting 1.

For example, the jackpot occurrence counter is initially set to an initial count value of "10,000," and is updated by subtracting "1" from the stored jackpot occurrence count value each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the number of times a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state, reaches a predetermined upper limit value (10,000 in this embodiment) (when the limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 0), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "10,000." Thereafter, the jackpot occurrence count value is subtracted by "1" each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

Also, if the big hit flag is off in step S02TM1010 (NO in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is on (step S02TM1110).

In this embodiment, the small win flag is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state when it is determined in the normal special symbol processing (S110) of FIG. 16 that the variable display result of the special symbol game is a "small win" and that the game state is controlled to a small win. On the other hand, the flag is cleared to the OFF state when a small win symbol is displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

If the small win flag is off (NO in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM1210) and ends the processing.

If the small win flag is on (YES in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 sets a wait time for the small win start effect (step S02TM1120) and proceeds to step S02TM1130. In the processing of step S02TM1120, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the wait time for the small win start effect is set in a game control process timer located in a specified area of RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a small win start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1130), clears the small win flag to the OFF state (step S02TM1140), updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (S118) (step S02TM1150), and then ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the small win start designation command is a command (small win fanfare command) that designates the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a small win game state, and is included in the presentation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. In the small win start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the small win type determination result. In the processing of step S02TM1130, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the small win start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the small win start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

[Jackpot end processing]
Figure 20-23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S117) in the special pattern process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S02TM2010).

In this embodiment, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7" in the post-jackpot release processing (S116) of Figure 16, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end presentation waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In the processing of step S02TM2010, the game control process timer value, which is the value stored in the game control process timer, is updated by subtracting 1, and it is determined whether the jackpot end presentation waiting time has elapsed depending on whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapse determination value ("0" in this embodiment).

If the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has not elapsed (NO in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 will simply end processing.

If the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed (YES in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value has reached a limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000"), which is a predetermined specific value corresponding to a predetermined upper limit value (in this example, 10,000 times) (step S02TM2020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value has reached the limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000") (YES in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the stored jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2030), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000") (NO in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small jackpot (step S02TM2040).

In step S02TM2040, the data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 is referenced to determine whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, it determines whether the jackpot type is either a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is a jackpot via a small jackpot (YES in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the small jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot in question is a "normal small jackpot" (step S02TM2050).

If the small win type corresponding to the jackpot is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2100), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the type of small win corresponding to the big win is not a "normal small win" (NO in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is not a jackpot via a small jackpot (NO in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is a "3R symbol normal jackpot" (step S02TM2080).

If the jackpot type is a "3R regular jackpot" (YES in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2090), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot type is not a "3R regular jackpot" (NO in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If step S02TM2050 returns NO, or if step S02TM2080 returns NO, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag corresponding to the type of jackpot in question (step S02TM2060), sets the time-saving count counter to "10000" as the initial count value (step S02TM2070), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

In this embodiment, a time-saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for controlling the game to a time-saving state are met. There are two types of time-saving flags: time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B. In the following explanation, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The a-time reduction flag is set when the game is in the a-time reduction state after a jackpot: a "10Ra time reduction jackpot" that occurs during normal mode, a "10Ra time reduction jackpot via time reduction small jackpot" that occurs during the a-time reduction state, or a "10Ra time reduction jackpot via time reduction small jackpot" that occurs during the b-time reduction state. This a-time reduction flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the a-time reduction state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the a-time reduction state, when the time reduction control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the game is controlled to normal mode, etc.).

The b time-saving flag is set when the game is controlled to the b time-saving state after a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot" that occurs during normal play. This b time-saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the b time-saving state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the b time-saving state, when the time-saving control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

After processing step S02TM2030, step S02TM2070, step S02TM2090, or step S02TM2100, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM2110), and then ends processing.

In this way, even in the irregular case where a V win occurs during a "normal small hit" and control is placed into a jackpot gaming state, by determining YES in step S02TM2050 during the jackpot end processing and skipping the process of setting the time-saving flag (step S02TM2060), it is possible to place the game in the normal state after the jackpot gaming state without being placed into the time-saving state.

Also, if step S02TM2080 returns YES and a process to clear the jackpot occurrence counter (step S02TM2090) is executed, and if a "3R regular jackpot" occurs during normal operation, control will be restored to normal operation after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot occurrence count value will be initialized at the end of the jackpot. Also, if step S02TM2050 returns YES and a process to clear the jackpot occurrence counter (step S02TM2100) is executed, and if a "10Ra jackpot via regular small jackpot" occurs, control will be restored to normal operation after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot occurrence count value will be initialized at the end of the jackpot.

[Small hit end processing]
Figure 20-24 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process processing.

First, the CPU 103 updates the V prize validity period timer by subtracting 1 (step S02TM3010), and checks whether the V prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (step S02TM3020).

If the V prize validity period timer has not timed out (NO in step S02TM3020), the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag, which is set when a V prize is detected, has already been set (step S02TM3030).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning switch 87a is in the ON state (step S02TM3040) to determine whether a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 during the valid V winning period.

If the V winning switch is not in the ON state (NO in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the V winning switch is in the ON state (YES in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag to indicate that a V winning has been detected during the valid V winning period (step S02TM3050).

Then, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a V winning designation command (step S02TM3060) and ends the processing. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

If the V winning validity period timer has timed out in step S02TM3020, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a small win end command (step S02TM3070). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended.

Next, the CPU 103 changes the state of the solenoid 22 to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to an open state (step S02TM3080).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (step S02TM3090).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines that a jackpot has occurred and sets the jackpot flag (step S02TM3100).

Next, the CPU 103 officially stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small win stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the determination that a V win has resulted in a legitimate jackpot (step S02TM3110).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM3120), and temporarily resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3130).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, during the small win end process executed when the small win gaming state ends, if a V win has occurred, the jackpot occurrence count value, which serves as predetermined numerical data, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (step S02TM3120). However, this is not limited to this, and during the small win release process executed when controlled to the small win gaming state, if a V win has occurred, the jackpot occurrence count value, which serves as predetermined numerical data, may be updated by incrementing it by 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value was updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to this form, and the jackpot occurrence count value may also be updated by subtracting 1. This can be achieved using a method similar to that shown in step S02TM1050, so explanation will be omitted.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in step S02TM3110 (step S02TM3140). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the jackpot game state has begun.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot control timer to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (e.g., the time during which the image display device 5 notifies the user that a jackpot has occurred) (step S02TM3150).

Next, the CPU 103 references the jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 and sets opening pattern data indicating opening modes such as the number of openings (e.g., 3 times, 10 times, etc.), opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and interval time (time the jackpot opening is closed between rounds) in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 according to the type of jackpot (step S02TM3160). Of this data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening count counter for counting the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing (S114) (step S02TM3170) and ends the processing. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V prize flag is not set in step S02TM3090 (NO in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines whether the b time-saving flag is set among the time-saving flags (step S02TM3180).

If the b time-saving flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is not set, that is, if a V prize does not occur on a small win that occurred during the a time-saving state or normal state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

On the other hand, if the b time-saving flag is set (YES in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win type of the small win is a "normal small win" (step S02TM3190).

If the small hit type is a "normal small hit" (YES in step S02TM3190), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is set and a small hit whose small hit type is a "time-saving small hit" has not resulted in a V win, i.e., if a time-saving small hit that occurred during the b time-saving state has not resulted in a V win, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

If step S02TM3180 returns a NO result, or if step S02TM3190 returns a NO result, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3200), clears the time-saving count counter, and initializes the time-saving count value to "0" (S02TM3210), clears the jackpot occurrence counter, and initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM3220), and proceeds to step S02TM3230.

If step S02TM3190 returns YES, or after processing step S02TM3220, the CPU 103 erases the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 (step S02TM3230), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM3240), and ends processing. As a result, if no V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game does not transition to the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, if the V winning flag is not set, the b time-saving flag is set, and the small win type is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM3180 → YES in step S02TM3190), that is, if a normal small win that occurs during the b time-saving state does not result in a V winning, by skipping the series of processes in steps S02TM3200 to S02TM3210 that reset the time-saving flag and clear the time-saving count counter, it is possible to continue controlling the b time-saving state without being controlled (falling) back to the normal state even if a normal small win occurs during the b time-saving state.

[Game flow]
Next, a game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode]. The game state is controlled to either the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the first flag described later is set is set to [Dream Rush]. The game state is controlled to either the time-saving state b (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the second flag described later is set is set to [Invincible Rush]. The game state is controlled to either the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the third flag described later is set is set to [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] (see Figure 20-25).

In the example game flow shown in Figures 20-25, a jackpot occurs when the presentation mode is [normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to either normal mode, time-saving mode a, or time-saving mode b. If controlled to normal mode, the game transitions to [normal mode]; if controlled to time-saving mode a, the game transitions to [Dream Rush]; and if controlled to time-saving mode b, the game transitions to [Invincible Rush].

In this game flow, explanation of irregular situations during the game will be omitted. Examples of irregular situations during the game include:
・A situation in which a jackpot or small jackpot occurs on special chart 2 during normal mode ・A situation in which a V prize is awarded with a small jackpot that occurs during normal mode ・A situation in which a jackpot or small jackpot occurs on special chart 1 during time-saving mode ・A situation in which a V prize is awarded with a normal small jackpot ・A situation in which a V prize is not awarded with a time-saving small jackpot ・A situation in which the display result is "miss" for all variable displays over 10,000 time-saving times ・A situation in which the number of jackpots occurs is 10,000 times, etc. These specific examples of irregular situations are merely examples, and other situations not listed here are also included.

(1) <Normal time>
The CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect mode to "normal mode" when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and none of the first flag, second flag, and third flag is set.

(2) ＜First Hit＞
In the state (1) described above, when a variable display that shows a "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types for the first special symbol include (2A) a "3R symbol normal jackpot," (2B) a "3Ra symbol time-saving jackpot," and (2C) a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot."

(2A) → (1)
When the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot", and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (1).

(2B) → (3)
When the jackpot type is "pattern 3Ra time-saving jackpot" and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (3).

(2C) → (4)
When the jackpot type is "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (4).

(3) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state to a time-shortened state (low probability/high base state), the first flag is set, and the effect mode when 10,000 variable displays are executed is set to [Dream Rush].

(4) <b time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state to the b time-shortening state (low probability/high base state), the second flag is set, and the effect mode is set to [Invincible Rush] when 10,000 variable displays are executed.

(5) <Jackpot>
In the state of (3) or (4) described above, or in the state of (7) described below, when the display result in any of the variable displays becomes a "jackpot" or a "time-saving small hit," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (including a jackpot game state via a small hit). In this embodiment, when the display result becomes a "jackpot," the jackpot type of the second special symbol is a "10Ra time-saving jackpot," and when the display result becomes a "time-saving small hit," the jackpot type via a small hit of the second special symbol is a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small hit."

(5) → (3)
When the jackpot ends in a case where the number of jackpot occurrences is "2", the state is controlled to (3).

(5) → (7)
When the jackpot ends in a case where the number of jackpot occurrences is "3" or more ("3" to "10000"), the state is controlled to (7).

(7) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state to a time-shortened state (low probability/high base state), the third flag is set, and the effect mode when 10,000 variable displays are executed is set to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(6) <Falling small hit>
In the above-mentioned state (3) or (7), when the display result in either of the variable displays becomes "normal small win," the game is controlled to a small win game state. In this embodiment, in a small win game when the display result becomes "normal big win," the opening pattern of the V-determined winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the V-determined winning device 87, and it is virtually impossible to generate a big win.

(6) → (1)
If the small hit type is a "normal small hit" and the small hit ends without a V winning occurring, the state will be controlled to (1).

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag in this embodiment will be described.

<First flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the time-saving state a after the jackpot ends (such as a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" or "a time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot") occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Also, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 1 or 2. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 and the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the first flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A and the end of the 10,000th variable display at which the display result becomes "miss," and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the first flag.

Furthermore, when the 10,000th variable display, in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state), ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start win that occurred during the period up until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and if a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot, or if the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the first flag.

<Second flag>
When a jackpot of a type that is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot ends (such as a "10Rb time-saving jackpot") occurs, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the second flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state and the time when the display result becomes "miss" after the 10,000th variable display, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the second flag.

Furthermore, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Variable displays based on the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start win that occurred during the period up to the end of the 10,000th variable display are executed, and if a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot, or if the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the second flag.

<Third Flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the a-time shortening state after the jackpot ends (such as an a-time shortening jackpot via a time shortening small jackpot) occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Also, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 3 or more. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the game state is controlled to the a-time shortening state, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a third flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A and the end of the 10,000th variable display at which the display result becomes "miss," and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the third flag.

Furthermore, when the 10,000th variable display, in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state), ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start win that occurred during the period up until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and if a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot, or if the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the third flag.

[Performance mode]
20-25, in this example, the presentation modes are "Normal Mode,""DreamRush,""InvincibleRush," and "Super High Speed Hyper Rush." Among the presentation modes in this embodiment, presentation examples of "Dream Rush,""InvincibleRush," and "Super High Speed Hyper Rush" will be described below.

<Dream Rush>
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a normal state and the first flag is set, the presentation mode is set to [Dream Rush] (hereinafter referred to as "[Dream Rush] mode" as appropriate) (see FIG. 20-25(3)). FIG. 20-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush].

As shown in Figures 20-26 (1) to (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first logo display (in this example, the words "Dream Rush") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the effect mode is "Dream Rush." The effect control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win in the second start winning slot.

(Display of decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush] are composed of number symbols representing numbers, etc., and are composed of blue even number symbols (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "2,""4," and "6"), red odd number symbols excluding the number "7" (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "1,""3," and "5"), and a gold odd number symbol of the number "7" (number symbol corresponding to the number "7"). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush] will be referred to as "first decorative symbols" as appropriate. Note that the first decorative symbols may be composed of number symbols and a base symbol, which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush], the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling the first decorative symbol vertically in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Vertical scrolling is a scrolling display from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen. When this scrolling display is being executed, the visibility of the decorative symbol is significantly reduced, and in this example, it is considered to be virtually impossible to see the decorative symbol.

In addition, when the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the [Dream Rush] mode, the size of the first decorative symbol will not change between the start and end of the variation.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
As shown in Figure 20-26 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of the first fixed decorative symbols (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second hold display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-26 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, which results in a "miss," the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-26 (3), at the timing when the first decorative symbol in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-26 (4), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

(First logo display in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, a first logo cyclical change effect can be executed, in which the first logo display changes at a predetermined cycle to highlight the name of the currently controlled effect mode. The first logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the first logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in Figure 20-27 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the first logo cyclical change effect, it causes the first logo display (the letters "Dream Rush") to light up from the left edge to the right edge of the first logo display at a predetermined cycle. The cycle for changing the first logo cyclical change effect is set to 5 seconds. In this way, by causing the first logo display to light up from the left edge to the right edge, interest in the effect is increased during [Dream Rush], and it also suggests a right hit to win the second start winning slot.

(First system display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Dream Rush], a right-hit promotion image (the letters "right hit" and an arrow image) is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Dream Rush], an image other than the right-hit promotion image may be always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot.

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], the first system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotional image for winning the second starting winning slot. The first system display is a moving image that includes the words "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second starting winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the first system display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

(First rotation display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Dream Rush], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Dream Rush], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display format different from the still image of a round object.

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of round objects performing a rotating motion. The second pending display and active display performing a rotating motion in this case are referred to as the first rotation-compatible display. The rotation period of this first rotation-compatible display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

<Invincible RUSH>
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state or the normal state and the second flag is set, the presentation mode is set to [Invincible Rush] (hereinafter referred to as the “[Invincible Rush] mode” as appropriate) (see Figure 20-25 (4)).

Based on the fact that the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], the presentation control CPU 120 displays a caption containing the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5 (the background image of [Invincible Rush]). The presentation control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image that indicates a right hit to win in the second start winning slot.

(Display of decorative symbols in [Invincible Rush])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush] are composed of the same number symbols as the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush]. However, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush] are displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 in a smaller size than the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush] (see Figures 20-55 and 20-56). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush] will be referred to as "second decorative symbols" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], the second decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling vertically in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2, similar to the display of the first decorative symbol when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush]. Note that when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], the second decorative symbol may be updated or transformed or enlarged/reduced in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2.

<Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH>
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a or the normal state and the third flag is set, the presentation mode is set to [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as "Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH mode" as appropriate) (see FIG. 20-25(7)). FIG. 20-28 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

As shown in Figures 20-28 (1) to (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays a second logo display (in this example, the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the effect mode is "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH." The effect control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win in the second start winning slot.

(Display of decorative symbols in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the decorative symbols are composed of number symbols showing numbers and the like, and base symbols corresponding to the shape of these number symbols. Furthermore, of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol in the center (symbol display area 5C) displays a light ray effect display from between the base symbol and the number symbol (in this example, behind the center of the number symbol) to the screen frame. The light ray effect display is an image with a higher display priority than the base symbol. Furthermore, the number symbol is an image with a higher display priority than the light ray effect display. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the number symbol, light ray effect display, and base symbol are displayed in this order. Below, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER
The decorative pattern in the case of [RUSH] will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is enlarged/reduced in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this embodiment, the variable display (enlargement/reduction) of the third decorative symbol is performed in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3).

(1) When the variable display begins, the third decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped in accordance with the display result of the variable display executed immediately before is enlarged and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: large)" as appropriate). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced, and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the display color of the third decorative pattern (blue, red, gold) is changed to white, thereby reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern. Note that a configuration that allows the transmittance of the third decorative pattern to be changed may be adopted, and the visibility of the third decorative pattern may be reduced by setting the layer transmittance to a value other than 0% when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed.

(2) Next, the third decorative symbol that was previously enlarged is displayed in a reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative symbol at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative symbol (size: small)" as appropriate). The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols that corresponds to the display result of the variable display. Also, as with the enlarged display of the third decorative symbols, the visibility of the third decorative symbol is reduced, and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the visibility of the third decorative symbol is reduced by changing the display color of the third decorative symbol (blue, red, gold) to white and reducing the size of the third decorative symbol. By reducing the visibility of the third decorative symbol in this way, even if a combination of third decorative symbols corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed in the state (2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the display result of the variable display at this timing.

(3) Next, the third decorative pattern that was previously displayed in a reduced size is displayed as a static display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: medium)" as appropriate). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is improved, and a light effect display is displayed. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is displayed as a static display, the display color of the third decorative pattern is changed from white to one of the colors (blue, red, gold), thereby improving the visibility of the third decorative pattern.

In this example, when enlarged/reduced display is being performed, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases in terms of its display size and color, but it is still possible to view it.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
As shown in Figure 20-28 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the final third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the small symbol combination (in this example, "245") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second hold display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-28 (2), when the CPU 103 begins the variable display of the second special symbol, which results in a "miss," the performance control CPU 120 begins the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative symbol to white and erases the light effect display. The third decorative symbol combination at this time is the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "245") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "miss").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-28 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "412") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display (in this example, "miss").

Next, as shown in Figure 20-28 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-28 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, fixes and stops the fixed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it fixes and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

As shown in Figure 20-26 (2), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Dream Rush], there are times when the decorative symbols become invisible from the start to the end of the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 20-28 (2) to (5), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush], there are no times when the decorative symbols become invisible from the start to the end of the variable display, and they can be seen at any time.

(Second logo display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, a second logo cyclical change effect can be executed, in which the second logo display changes at a predetermined cycle to highlight the name of the currently controlled effect mode. The second logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the second logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in Figure 20-27 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the second logo cyclical change effect, it causes the second logo display (the letters "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") to light up from the left edge of the second logo display to the right edge at a predetermined cycle. The cycle of change in the second logo cyclical change effect is set to 0.5 seconds. In this way, by causing the second logo display to light up from the left edge to the right edge, the effect is more interesting during the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" and suggests a right hit to win the second starting winning slot.

(Second system display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled in [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], a right-hit promotion image (the letters "Right hit" and an arrow image) is constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled in [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], an image other than the right-hit promotion image may be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotional image for winning the second start winning slot. The second system display is a moving image that includes the words "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the second system display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

(Displays the second rotation in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display format different from the still images of round objects.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of circular objects performing a rotating motion. The second hold display and active display performing a rotating motion in this case are referred to as a second rotation-compatible display. The rotation cycle of this second rotation-compatible display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

[Featured items]
In this embodiment, a movable body 02TM100, which is a role prop, is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The movable body 02TM100 operates between an initial position, an intermediate performance position (a position where a part of the movable body is exposed), and a maximum performance position (a position where the entire movable body is exposed) according to the control of the performance control board 12. Hereinafter, the intermediate performance position and the maximum performance position will be referred to as "performance positions" as appropriate.

For example, the movable body 02TM100 may move from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position, or from the initial position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, or from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, or from the maximum performance position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 20-29, when the movable body 02TM100 is in its initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5. In other words, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 is in its initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and is configured not to affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the performance position (intermediate performance position, maximum performance position) or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, the movable body 02TM100 is positioned in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the performance position or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, it overlaps with the area of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this example, when the first change performance described below is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the intermediate performance position, and when the second change performance described below is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the maximum performance position. Hereinafter, the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position will be referred to as an "intermediate performance" as appropriate, and the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum performance position → initial position will be referred to as a "maximum performance" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body 02TM100 has a regular hexagonal shape that includes a design that resembles an ally character. The ally character of this movable body 02TM100 is a character that is the same as the ally character that appears in the super reach effect (in this example, the super reach A effect).

In addition, a movable body LED may be provided on the movable body 02TM100, and a light-emitting effect may be performed in which the movable body LED emits white light when moving from the initial position to the effect position, or at a predetermined timing while in the effect position (for example, when the push button 31B is operated). Furthermore, multiple different light-emitting effect modes may be provided. For example, in addition to the effect mode in which the movable body LED provided on the movable body 02TM100 emits white light, there may also be an effect mode in which it emits red light.

[Logo panel]
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The logo panel displays the characters "XXX" (such as the name of the gaming machine), and the "XXX" character portion of the logo panel is illuminated.

<Positional relationship between props and logo panel>
In this embodiment, the logo panel 02TM110 is disposed in front of (toward the player) the movable body 02TM100. As shown in Figure 20-29 (1), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is located behind (toward the gaming machine) the logo panel 02TM110, and therefore its visibility to the player is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-29 (2A), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate performance position, a portion of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, approximately the bottom two-thirds of the movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player. Also, as shown in Figure 20-29 (2B), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum performance position, the entire movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the entire movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player.

In this way, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate presentation position, only a portion of the ally character on the movable body is visible to the player. On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum presentation position, all of the ally character on the movable body is visible to the player.

[Transformation effects]
In this embodiment, a change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The change effect is an example of a preview effect in which the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of determination at the time of the start winning is displayed in either a blue form (in this example, a blue round display) or a red form (in this example, a red round display) that is different from the normal form (in this example, a white round display).

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect, which displays the display mode of the hold display in a different display mode from the normal display mode (either blue or red), is a pre-read preview effect that suggests the display result of the hold memory whose execution is on hold. Furthermore, among the change effects, the active change effect, which displays the display mode of the active display in a different display mode from the normal display mode (either blue or red), is a preview effect during change that suggests the display result of the executed change display. The timing of the execution of the change effects and the change patterns of the hold display are explained in detail in Figures 20-39 (B1) to 20-40 (B4) described below. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the change effects that can be executed are a first change effect, a second change effect, and a third change effect, each with different presentation modes.

<First transformation effect>
The first change effect is a series of effects consisting of (1A) to (1D) shown below.
(1A) A change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wave-like effect display") is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (1B) An intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate action position → initial position. (1C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (1D) A first action change effect in which an ally character changes the display mode of a corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing a bomb at the corresponding display.

In (1D), the effect in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is referred to as the "first action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the bomb is thrown changes is referred to as the "first corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 20-38) described below and the effect mode determination table for the change effect (see Figure 20-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the first change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Since it is difficult to secure the period for executing the first variable effect in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the first variable effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

However, this is not limited to this configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed, the first change effect may be executed over multiple change displays to ensure a period of time for executing the first change effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, after a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, this is not limited to this form. After a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect may be executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display may not change.

For example, if the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether to execute a false change sign effect, in which only the change sign effect is executed and no intermediate action effect or later of the first change effect is executed. At this time, a decision is made to execute the false change sign effect 3% of the time, and a decision is made not to execute the false change sign effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the first transformation effect)
20-30 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images of each effect related to the first change effect. In this example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a normal state, the first change effect is executed.

First, as shown in Figure 20-30 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-30 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the (1A) change precursor effect of the first change effect, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in its initial position.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-30 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1B) intermediate movement performance of the first change performance, displaying the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the intermediate performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (1B) intermediate action effect of the first transformation effect, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1C) character appearance effect of the first transformation effect, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the intermediate effect position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-30 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (1C) character appearance presentation of the first transformation presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1D) first action transformation presentation of the first transformation presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing a bomb at the active display 02TM03 in the normal state in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-30 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displaying the first action effect display 02TM211 in the active display area 02TM03E. This first action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the first action effect display is being displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-31 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first effect change presentation of the first change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the first effect effect display 02TM211 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal active display 02TM03 to the blue active display 02TM03B.

<Second transformation effect>
The second change effect is a series of effects consisting of (2A) to (2D) shown below.
(2A) A change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wave-like effect display") is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (2B) A maximum movement effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum movement position → initial position. (2C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (2D) A second action change effect in which an ally character changes the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing three bombs at the corresponding display.

In (2D), the effect in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is called the "second action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the three bombs have been thrown changes is called the "second corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 20-38) described below and the effect mode determination table for the change effect (see Figure 20-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the second change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Since it is difficult to secure the period for executing the second variation effect in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the second variation effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

However, this is not limited to this configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which the second change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, and a configuration may be adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed, the second change effect may be executed over multiple change displays to ensure a period of time for executing the second change effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, after a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, this is not limited to this form. After a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect may be executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display may not change.

For example, if the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether to execute a false change sign effect, in which only the change sign effect is executed and no effects from the maximum movement effect onwards of the second change effect are executed. At this time, a decision is made to execute the false change sign effect 3% of the time, and a decision is made not to execute the false change sign effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the second transformation)
20-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image of each effect related to the second change effect. In this example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in the normal state, the second change effect is executed.

First, as shown in Figure 20-32 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-32 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the (2A) change precursor effect of the first change effect, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in its initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2A) change precursor performance of the second change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second change performance, displaying the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (2B) maximum movement effect of the second transformation effect, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2C) character appearance effect of the second transformation effect, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the maximum transformation position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (2C) character appearance presentation of the second transformation presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2D) second action transformation presentation of the first transformation presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing three bombs at the active display 02TM03 in the normal state in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-32 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displaying the second action effect display 02TM212 in the active display area 02TM03E. This second action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the second action effect display is being displayed. Furthermore, the second action effect display is an image that is larger than the first action effect display.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-33 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second effect change presentation of the second change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the second effect effect display 02TM212 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal active display 02TM03 to the red active display 02TM03R.

In this way, the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation is executed in a manner that is more emphasized than the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the action effect display displayed in the active display area.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second transformation effect was emphasized more than the first transformation effect in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the action effect displayed in the active display area, but this is not limited to this form, and the second transformation effect may be emphasized more than the first transformation effect using other methods.

For example, the first transformation effect may be performed with a white background image while the second transformation effect is performed with a red background image, thereby emphasizing the second transformation effect more than the first transformation effect in terms of the background image (red > white).

Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a small ally character is displayed when the first transformation effect is performed, and a large ally character that is larger in display size than the small ally character is displayed when the second transformation effect is performed, the second transformation effect may be emphasized more than the first transformation effect in terms of the display size of the ally character (large ally character > small ally character).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the corresponding display (hold display or active display) could be displayed in two different display modes, a blue mode or a red mode, which differ from the normal mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the corresponding display could be displayed in fewer than two different display modes, or in three or more different display modes which differ from the normal mode.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the corresponding display can be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode, the corresponding display may be displayed in four different display modes: blue mode, red mode, green mode, or gold mode. In this case, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of blue mode < green mode < red mode < gold mode.

<Third transformation effect>
The third change effect is an effect in which the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner at (i) the timing when the nth hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the hold display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position in the variable ranking in the hold display area (towards the active display area) (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing when the hold display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed).

The third change effect includes (i) an effect in which, at the timing of a start winning, the pending display corresponding to that start winning is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, and an effect in which the display mode of the pending display changes at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). Furthermore, the third change effect does not include an effect (hereinafter referred to as an "action effect") in which, like the first and second change effects, the display mode is changed by acting on the corresponding display (for example, an ally character throwing a bomb) while the special pattern (the corresponding decorative pattern) is being displayed in a changing state (hereinafter referred to as an "action effect" as appropriate).

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 20-38) described below and the effect mode determination table for the change effect (see Figure 20-41) described below, a configuration is adopted that allows the third change effect to be executed whether a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed or a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving states (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variation display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have extremely short variation display periods, making it difficult to secure a period in the time-saving states to execute a variation display accompanied by an action display (first variation display, second variation display). However, it is easy to secure a period in the time-saving states to execute a third variation display without an action display. Therefore, a configuration is adopted in which the third variation display can be executed whether the variation display corresponding to the first special pattern or the variation display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, this is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the third change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and a configuration in which the third change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

[Preview preview effect]
In this embodiment, a preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview effect includes a preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-read preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As the pre-read preview effect, in addition to the above-mentioned hold change effect, a first pre-read effect and a second pre-read effect can be executed.

<First preview performance>
In this embodiment, the first pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning. The first pre-reading effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the determination at the time of the start winning is a "small time-saving win" by using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The first pre-reading effect is a series of effects consisting of (A) and (B) shown below.
(A) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 2>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 5L, and this decorative pattern is fixed (the numerical pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead A performance. (B) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 1>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and these decorative patterns are fixed (the numerical pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead B performance. The first look-ahead counter will be described in detail later in Figure 20-38.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols fixed in the first pre-read A performance and the decorative symbols fixed in the first pre-read B performance are decorative symbols that include a common number symbol. Therefore, when the variable display subject to the preview is executed, the variable display is configured to start with a reach state established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C.

If it is decided to execute this first look-ahead effect during the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 20-38), then in the variable display executed when the first look-ahead counter = 1, a decorative symbol of the same type as the decorative symbol fixed in the first look-ahead A effect will be determined as the confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C. By doing this, the decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead A effect and the first look-ahead B effect will be the same type, and a reach state can be achieved in the variable display that is the subject of the preview.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the preview is determined to be a "small time-saving hit," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading effect in the variable display that is the subject of the preview will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing this, the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading effect and the decorative pattern that is finally confirmed and stopped in the variable display that is the subject of the preview can be the same type of decorative pattern, thereby achieving appropriate performance control as a pre-reading preview effect using decorative patterns.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the prediction is judged to be a "miss," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance in the variable display that is the subject of the prediction will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5L, 5C, and a decorative pattern of a different type from the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5R.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first pre-reading effect was executed as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area, but this is not limited to this form, and an effect different from the first pre-reading effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area.

For example, as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol enlargement effect in which the decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R become larger may be executed, thereby suggesting whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being previewed is a "small time-saving win."

As a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol destruction effect in which the decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are destroyed (torn apart) may be executed, thereby suggesting whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being previewed is a "small time-saving win."

(Example of the first look-ahead effect)
Figures 20-34 and 20-35 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the first pre-reading presentation.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, time-saving mode a), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. Furthermore, the display result of the reserved memory that is third in the variable order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning presentation determination process (see Figure 20-38), it is decided to execute the first look-ahead presentation, and the first look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in Figure 20-34 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 20-28).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the first look-ahead A effect of the first look-ahead effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "772").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading A effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading A effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "772") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading A effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the first look-ahead B effect of the first look-ahead effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E toward the active display area 02TM03E by one.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "771").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-34 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-35 (9), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "771") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-35 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, which is a pre-reading preview effect, and erases the fixed icon 02TM41 from each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, as the number of second hold memories has reached 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-35 (11), the effect control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in Figure 20-35 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying a variable display of the small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-35 (13), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

<Second predictive performance>
In this embodiment, the second pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning. The second pre-reading effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that indicates that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the determination at the time of the start winning is a "small time-saving win" without using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the second pre-reading effect, a second pre-reading image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the display result of the variable display being predicted will be a "small time-saving win." In this example, the second pre-reading image is an image that includes a portion of an image (in this example, "777") that imitates the combination of third decorative symbols that indicates that the display result when stopped will be a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Below, the image that imitates the third decorative symbol included in this second pre-reading image will be referred to as the "pseudo-third decorative symbol" as appropriate. However, this pseudo-third decorative symbol is a different image from the third decorative symbol, as it does not correspond to the variable display currently in progress.

In this embodiment, the pseudo-third decorative pattern is an image that includes a number pattern and a base pattern, but does not include a light effect display. However, this is not limited to this form, and the pseudo-third decorative pattern may be a decorative pattern that includes at least one of a number pattern, a base pattern, and a light effect display.

In the above embodiment, an example of an image including part of the pseudo-third decorative pattern was shown as the second preview image, but this is not limiting, and other images may also be used as the second preview image.

For example, the second pre-read image may be an image containing the letter "V" or the word "FEVER," which suggests that the display result will be a "small time-saving win." It may also be an image containing an ally character related to the success or victory effects in a super reach.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead effect is executed in the variable display when the value of the second look-ahead counter, which is set when it is decided to execute the second look-ahead effect during the start winning effect determination process, becomes 1 or 2. However, this is not limited to this form, and the second look-ahead effect may be executed in the variable display when the second look-ahead counter is set to any of the values 1, 2, 3, and 4. The second look-ahead counter will be described in detail later in Figure 20-38.

In this embodiment, when the second preview image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, the second preview image has a lower display priority than other effect images (such as the third decorative symbol and the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" at the top of the screen). Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the other effect images and the second preview image are being displayed in that order.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second preview image may be configured as an image with a higher display priority (display layer) than other effect images. In this case, by making the second preview image a transparent image, the second image is displayed in front of other effect images, but because the second preview image is transparent, it is possible to view effect images (other effect images, etc.) related to the currently executing variable display.

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] and the second pre-reading presentation is executed and the second pre-reading image is displayed on the image display device 5, the visibility of the second pre-reading image changes depending on the display mode (enlarged/reduced display) of the third decorative pattern. When the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the second pre-reading image decreases. In other words, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second pre-reading image decreases. Furthermore, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the second pre-reading image increases. In other words, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second pre-reading image increases.

(Example of the second look-ahead effect)
Figures 20-36 and 20-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the second pre-reading presentation.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, time-saving mode a), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. Furthermore, the display result of the reserved memory that is third in the variable order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning presentation determination process (see Figure 20-38), it is decided to execute the second look-ahead presentation, and the second look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in Figure 20-36 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 20-28).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "415").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, displaying the second look-ahead image 02TM42 across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second preview performance and erases the second preview image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "415") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "342").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, displaying the second look-ahead image 02TM42 across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-36 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second preview performance and erases the second preview image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-37 (9), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "342") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-37 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as the number of second hold memories has reached 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-37 (11), the effect control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in Figure 20-37 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying a variable display of the small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-37 (13), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

[Start-up winning effect determination process]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 the result of the winning judgment, which is whether or not a jackpot will be awarded, and a pattern designation command indicating the result of the jackpot type determination, a variable category command indicating the result of the variable pattern determination, which is the winning judgment, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) specifying that the reserved memory number has increased by one.

Figure 20-38 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the effect when a start win occurs. The effect control CP 120 executes the process for determining the effect when a start win occurs during the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in Figure 18.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether a set of start winning commands (e.g., a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a first reserved memory count addition designation command or a second reserved memory count addition designation command) based on the occurrence of a start winning at the start winning slot has been newly received (step S02TM4010).

Specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a set of symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory count addition designation commands (first reserved memory count addition designation command or second reserved memory count addition designation command) have been newly stored in the start-up winning command storage area. If a set of start-up winning commands has not been newly received (NO in step S02TM4010), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the process.

If a new command for a set of start winnings has been received (YES in step S02TM4010), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the variable display different from the variable display for the start winnings is either a "big win" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4015).

Variable displays that are different from the variable display for the start winning are currently running variable displays and variable displays for reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in the processing of step S02TM4015, at the time of the start winning, it is determined whether the display result of the currently running variable display or the variable display for reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning is a "big win" or a "small time-saving win."

If the display result of the variable display that differs from the variable display of the initial winning is either a "big win" or a "time-saving small win" (YES in step S02TM4015), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the display result of the variable display that differs from the variable display of the starting winning is neither a "big win" nor a "small time-saving win" (NO in step S02TM4015), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the change pre-read prohibition flag described below is set (step S02TM4020). If the change pre-read prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4020), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

In this embodiment, the change pre-read prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that at least one change effect (pending change effect, active change effect) will be executed. When the change pre-read prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4030 to S02TM4080 is skipped, so that when it has been determined that a change effect will be executed for a pending memory whose execution is pending or a currently executing active display, the execution of a change effect that changes the pending display or active display for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning combination can be restricted. This change pre-read prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display corresponding to the start winning combination combination determination process when the change pre-read prohibition flag was set has ended.

If the change pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the final display mode determination table for the active display (see Figure 20-39 (A)) (step S02TM4030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (step S02TM4040). If the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

If the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and active display based on the change pattern determination table (see Figures 20-39 (B1) to 20-40 (B4)) (step S02TM4050).

Here, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), that means the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode. If the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode, a change effect is performed on the pending display or active display, and it is displayed in a mode other than the normal mode. In other words, since at least one change effect is executed, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it is necessary to determine which change pattern to use to change the pending display or active display. Therefore, if the result is NO in step S02TM4040, the change pattern for the pending display and active display is determined in the processing of step S02TM4050 based on the change pattern determination table.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the change effect based on the effect mode determination table for change effects (see Figures 20-41 (1) and (2)) (step S02TM4060).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the change read-ahead counter (described below) (step S02TM4070) and sets the change read-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM1080).

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance is executed. In this example, the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the change performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "change look-ahead counter," the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the first look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "first look-ahead counter," and the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the second look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "second look-ahead counter."

If step S02TM4020 is YES, if step S02TM4040 is YES, or after step S02TM4080, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or greater (step S02TM4090). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or greater, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (step S02TM4090 is NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or greater, i.e., if the jackpot occurrence count value is between 3 and 10,000 (YES in step S02TM4090), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or greater (step S02TM4100). If the value of the second reserved memory count is not 3 or greater (NO in step S02TM4100), i.e., if the value of the second reserved memory count is between 0 and 2, the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or greater (YES in step S02TM4100), i.e., if the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or 4, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the symbol designation command is either a "miss" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4110). If the display result specified by the symbol designation command is neither a "miss" nor a "time-saving small win" (NO in step S02TM4110), i.e., if the display result specified by the symbol designation command is either a "big win" or a "normal small win," the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the first pre-read prohibition flag, described below, is set (step S02TM4120). If the first pre-read prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4120), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

In this embodiment, the first pre-read prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that the first pre-read effect will be executed. When the first pre-read prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4130 to S02TM4160 is skipped, so that when it has been determined that the first pre-read effect will be executed for a pending memory whose execution is on hold, the execution of the first pre-read effect can be restricted for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning. This first pre-read prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the first pre-read prohibition flag was set has ended.

If the first pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first pre-read performance based on the first pre-read performance execution determination table (see Figure 20-39 (B1)) (step S02TM4130).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (step S02TM4140). If it has not decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4140), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4140), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S02TM4150), sets the first look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4160), and proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If step S02TM4120 is YES, if step S02TM4140 is NO, or after step S02TM4160, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the second pre-read prohibition flag described below is set (step S02TM4170). If the second pre-read prohibition flag is set (step S02TM4170 is YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends processing.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that the second look-ahead effect will be executed. When the second look-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4180 to S02TM4210 is skipped, so that when it has been determined that the second look-ahead effect will be executed for a pending memory whose execution is on hold, the execution of the second look-ahead effect can be restricted for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning. This second look-ahead prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the second look-ahead prohibition flag was set has ended.

If the second pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4170), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second pre-read performance based on the second pre-read performance execution determination table (see Figure 20-39 (B2)) (step S02TM4180).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (step S02TM4190). If it has not decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4190), the performance control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If it has been decided to execute the second look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4190), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S02TM4200), sets the second look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4210), and then ends processing.

In this way, in the processing of step S02TM4015, if the display result of a variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither a "jackpot" nor a "small time-saving win," the processing to determine whether or not to execute a change effect for the corresponding display (hold display, active display) (steps S02TM4020 to S02TM4080) and the processing to determine whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect or the second look-ahead effect (steps S02TM4090 to S02TM4210) are skipped. This prevents inappropriate effect control from being executed, such as deciding to execute a look-ahead preview effect in a variable display corresponding to a new start winning, when there is a variable display that has already been determined to be a "jackpot" or a "small time-saving win."

[Tables referenced in the start winning performance determination process]
20-39 to 20-42 are specific examples of tables referenced in any of the processes in the start winning effect determination process. FIG. 20-39(A) is an example of a final display mode determination table for the active display referenced when determining the final display mode of the active display in step S02TM4030. FIG. 20-39(B1) to 20-40(B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables referenced when determining the change patterns of the pending display and active display in step S02TM4050. FIG. 20-41 is an example of a change effect effect mode determination table referenced when determining the effect mode of the change effect in step S02TM4060. FIG. 20-42(1) is an example of a first look-ahead effect execution/non-execution determination table referenced when determining whether to execute the first look-ahead effect in step S02TM4130. Figure 20-42 (2) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect in step S02TM4180.

<Active Display Final Display Mode Determination Table>
20-39(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 20-39(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of active display can be determined as one of "normal mode,""bluemode," and "red mode," and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in Figure 20-39 (A), if the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "miss" (i.e., the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "miss"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that initial winning (new pending memory) will be the normal mode (white circle display) 90% of the time, the blue mode (blue circle display) 8% of the time, and the red mode (red circle display) 2% of the time.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "jackpot" (i.e., the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "jackpot"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that initial winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode 75% of the time, the blue mode 15% of the time, and the red mode 10% of the time.

<Change Pattern Determination Table>
20-39 (B1) and (B2), and 20-40 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of change pattern determination tables for the pending display and the active display. When the number of pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to a start winning, (i) the timing when the nth pending display corresponding to that start winning is displayed in the pending display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to that start winning shifts to a higher position in the variable ranking in the pending display area (toward the active display area) (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to that start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to that start winning is displayed), the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on that start winning may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In the explanations of Figures 20-39 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 20-40 (B3) and (B4), active shift refers to the pending display shifting from the pending display area to the active display area (as a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of the initial winning is displayed).

In this embodiment, a hold change effect can be executed at any of the timings (i) to (iii) described above, in which the display information (hold display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a different manner from its normal manner. In this example, this hold change effect includes (i) an effect in which, at the timing of the start winning, the mode of the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in a different manner from its normal manner, and an effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). It should be noted that the hold change effect is not limited to this form, and may also include an effect in which the display mode is changed by acting on the hold display (for example, by piercing an arrow into the hold display) during the variable display of a special pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to it).

Figures 20-39 (B1) and (B2), as well as Figures 20-40 (B3) and (B4), show the display mode of the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display at each of the timings (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. In the change patterns shown in the figures, "Normal" indicates the normal mode, which is a white circular display, "Blue" indicates the blue mode, which is a blue circular display, and "Red" indicates the red mode, which is a red circular display.

([For 1 reserved item] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "1," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one reserved item shown in Figure 20-39 (B1). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 101 to 105 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the predicted target remains in normal mode at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a normal → normal change pattern.

Similarly, change pattern 102 is normal → blue, change pattern 103 is blue → blue, change pattern 104 is blue → red, and change pattern 105 is red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, i.e., "miss," "big hit," or "small hit"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 101 is determined 5% of the time, change pattern 102 is determined 5% of the time, and change pattern 103 is determined 90% of the time.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 102 at a rate of 2%, change pattern 103 at a rate of 10%, change pattern 104 at a rate of 8%, and change pattern 105 at a rate of 70%.

([For 2 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "2," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two reserved memories shown in Figure 20-39 (B2). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 201 to 208 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 201 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode at the time of the first hold shift, and does not change to normal mode at the time of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, change pattern 205 is normal → blue-red, change pattern 206 is blue → blue → red, change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, and change pattern 208 is red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, i.e., "miss," "big hit," or "small hit"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 201 is determined 10%, change pattern 202 5%, change pattern 203 5%, and change pattern 204 80% of the time.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 201 is determined at 10%, change pattern 202 at 2%, change pattern 203 at 2%, change pattern 204 at 10%, change pattern 205 at 1%, change pattern 206 at 8%, change pattern 207 at 8%, and change pattern 208 at 60%.

([For 3 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "3," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for three reserved memories shown in Figure 20-40 (B3). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 301 to 308 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 301 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode at the time of the first hold shift, remains in normal mode at the time of the second hold shift, and remains in normal mode at the time of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, and change pattern 308 is red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, i.e., "miss," "big hit," or "small hit"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 301 is determined with a probability of 6%, change pattern 302 with a probability of 2%, change pattern 303 with a probability of 2%, and change pattern 304 with a probability of 90%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 302 at 2%, change pattern 303 at 2%, change pattern 304 at 10%, change pattern 305 at 1%, change pattern 306 at 8%, change pattern 307 at 8%, and change pattern 308 at 60%.

([For 4 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "4," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for four reserved memories shown in Figure 20-40 (B4). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 401 to 412 corresponding to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 401 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, change pattern 412 is red → red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, either "miss" or "jackpot"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 402 at a rate of 10%, change pattern 403 at a rate of 10%, change pattern 404 at a rate of 10%, and change pattern 405 at a rate of 60%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 401 20%, change pattern 402 5%, change pattern 403 5%, change pattern 404 5%, change pattern 405 20%, change pattern 406 2%, change pattern 407 2%, change pattern 408 2%, change pattern 409 7%, change pattern 410 6%, change pattern 411 6%, and change pattern 412 20%.

<Determination table for change effect presentation mode>
20-41(1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode determination table for the change effect. As shown in Fig. 20-41(1) and (2), in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the effect mode for the change effect is assigned depending on the change timing in the change pattern.

Figure 20-41 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [first special symbol].

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal → blue," it is decided to execute the first change effect 20% of the time, the second change effect 0% of the time, and the third change effect 80% of the time.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red," it is decided to execute the first change effect 15% of the time, the second change effect 80% of the time, and the third change effect 5% of the time.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is decided to execute the first change effect 40% of the time, the second change effect 50% of the time, and the third change effect 10% of the time.

Figure 20-41 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [second special symbol].

If the change timing in the change pattern is "normal → blue," it is determined that the third change effect will be executed with a 100% probability.

If the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red," it is determined that the third change effect will be executed with a 100% probability.

If the change timing in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is determined that the third change effect will be executed with a 100% probability.

<First look-ahead effect presentation mode determination table>
20-42(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 20-42(1), in this embodiment, a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol specification command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 90% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and a 10% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

Also, if the display result is a "small time-saving win," there is a 70% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and a 30% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

<Determination table for second look-ahead effect>
20-42(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 20-42(2), in this embodiment, a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the second look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 95% chance that the second look-ahead effect will not be executed, and a 5% chance that the second look-ahead effect will be executed.

Also, if the display result is a "small time-saving win," there is an 80% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and a 20% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

As such, when the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Furthermore, when the display result is a "time-saving small win," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, among the look-ahead preview effects, the symbol enlargement effect may be executed at a higher rate than the reserved look-ahead preview effect. Furthermore, the combined execution rate of the first look-ahead effect and the symbol enlargement effect may be higher than the combined execution rate of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead preview effect.

[Jackpot count display]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the presentation mode during the time-saving state a is switched when the count value of the jackpot occurrence counter (hereinafter referred to as the ``jackpot occurrence count value'' as appropriate) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (hereinafter referred to as the ``mode switching determination value'' as appropriate).

In this example, the mode switching judgment value is set to "3." When the number of jackpots since the first jackpot is 1 to 2 (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is < mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to "Dream Rush." When the number of jackpots since the first jackpot is 3 or more (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is >= mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to "Super High-Speed Hyper Rush."

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or less than the mode switching threshold, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time. The jackpot count display can not only notify the player of the number of jackpots that have occurred since the first jackpot (jackpot occurrence count value), but also the number of remaining jackpots required until the mode switching threshold is reached (mode switching threshold value - jackpot occurrence count value). Therefore, the jackpot count display can effectively show the player how many remaining jackpots must occur before the game switches to [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], which has a high probability of executing a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display period (fast fluctuation speed).

In addition, in this embodiment, a required number of jackpots notification effect can be executed during the ending period of a jackpot, which notifies the number of remaining jackpots required to reach the mode switching threshold without using a jackpot count display. The required number of jackpots notification effect displays the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching threshold across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The required number of jackpots display includes the text "n more jackpots until the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (n = 1, 2) (see Figure 20-51 (8) and Figure 20-56 (23)).

In this example, when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count of 1, two more jackpots are required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count of 1 occurs will be referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [2 times]" as appropriate. Also, when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count of 2, one more jackpot is required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count of 2 occurs will be referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [1 time]" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left or center of the screen of the image display device 5 during a round period in a specific type of jackpot game state (in this example, "10Ra time-saving jackpot," "10Rb time-saving jackpot," or "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot") or during a small jackpot game period in a specific type of small jackpot game state (in this example, "time-saving small jackpot"). Additionally, during the period when the presentation mode in the a time-saving state is controlled to [Dream RUSH] (waiting period for variable display start, variable display period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

The jackpot count display is composed of four sections, from the bottom to the top of the screen: the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section. The letters "V" and "WIN" are displayed in the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display. The letters "PREMIUM FEVER" are displayed in the arrival section of the jackpot count display. Below, the first count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "jackpot count display (first count section)" or the "first count section" as appropriate. The same applies to the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section of the jackpot count display. At least one of the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "count section" as appropriate.

<Display mode of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, the display size of the reaching portion of the jackpot count display is larger than that of any of the other count portions. Furthermore, the display size of the third count portion of the jackpot count display is larger than that of the first and second count portions, and the display size of the second count portion is larger than that of the first count portion. That is, the display sizes increase in the order of the first count portion, the second count portion, the third count portion, and the reaching portion. Therefore, the information displayed in the count portion (such as the letter "V" and the letter "WIN") increases in size (highlighted) in the order of the information displayed in the first count portion, the information displayed in the second count portion, and the information displayed in the third count portion. Furthermore, the information displayed in the reaching portion (such as the letter "PREMIUM FEVER") increases in size (highlighted) in the order of the information displayed in any of the count portions (such as the letter "V" and the letter "WIN").

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display was varied by varying the display size, but this is not the only method, and other methods may also be used to vary the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which each section of the jackpot count display can emit light, the degree of emphasis of each section of the jackpot count display can be varied by increasing the luminance of the light in the order of the first count section, second count section, third count section, and reach section.

Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which each section of the jackpot count display can flash, the degree of emphasis of each section of the jackpot count display can be varied by shortening the flashing interval in the order of the first count section, second count section, third count section, and arrival section.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis was varied by varying the display mode of each part of the jackpot count display, but this is not limited to this form. The degree of emphasis may also be varied by varying the display mode of the entire jackpot count display.

For example, if the transparency of the jackpot count display can be set to any value, when the jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 90%, when the jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 50%, and when the jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 0%.

In this embodiment, the count sections of the jackpot count display (first count section, second count section, third count section) can be displayed in three different display modes: the initial mode, the first change mode, and the second change mode. In this embodiment, the effect that changes the count sections from the initial mode to the first change mode is called a V change effect, and the effect that changes the count sections from the first change mode to the second change mode is called a WIN change effect.

The series of V change effects and WIN change effects executed for the first count section will be referred to as the "first stage effects" as appropriate, the series of V change effects and WIN change effects executed for the second count section will be referred to as the "second stage effects" as appropriate, and the series of V change effects and WIN change effects executed for the third count section will be referred to as the "third stage effects" as appropriate.

When the count section is displayed in its initial state, the information displayed on the count section is the white letter "V." When the count section is displayed in its first variable state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "V." When the count section is displayed in its second variable state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "WIN."

In this embodiment, when a V-change effect is performed on the count section, the jackpot occurrence display (in this example, the red letter "V" shown in Figure 20-51 (5)) related to the occurrence of a jackpot displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 acts on the white letter "V" displayed on the count section in the initial state, and changes to the red letter "V" displayed on the count section in the first change state.

In addition, the arrival section of the jackpot count display can be displayed in two different display modes: an initial mode and a change mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the arrival section from the initial mode to the change mode is referred to as the arrival section change effect.

When the destination is displayed in its initial state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in white text; when the destination is displayed in its variable state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in red text.

<[When hitting a jackpot] Timing of the jackpot count display and change>
In this embodiment, if it is decided in the jackpot performance determination process (see Figure 20-43) to display a jackpot count display, the jackpot count display can be displayed in the jackpot game state every time a jackpot occurs where the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3, and the display mode of each count section corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value is changed in the order of initial mode to first change mode to second change mode.

In this embodiment, jackpots with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more are jackpots that occur mainly when the machine is in a time-saving mode (time-saving mode a, time-saving mode b) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving mode, the probability of a jackpot occurring when the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than the probability of a jackpot occurring when the display result is a "jackpot," resulting in a "small jackpot via a V prize (see Figure 20-2 (B2)). Therefore, in this example, when explaining the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more, an example of a jackpot occurring when a small jackpot occurs will be used; however, the same applies to a jackpot occurring when the display result is a "jackpot," so an explanation will be omitted.

(1) <When the jackpot count value = 1>
(1-1) During the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the end of the right-hand hit notification of the first round to the end of the second round), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, each count section and the arrival section are both displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 20-51 (5)).

(1-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), a jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from its initial state to its first change state. Furthermore, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in their initial states (see Figure 20-51 (6)).

(1-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round when the first predetermined period has elapsed to the second predetermined period), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in their initial modes (see Figure 20-51 (7)).

(2) <When a jackpot occurs with a jackpot count value of 2>
(2-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing of V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the jackpot round period), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second changing mode, and the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-56 (20)).

(2-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), a jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from its initial state to its first change state. Furthermore, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in their initial states (see Figure 20-56 (21)).

(2-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round when the first predetermined period has elapsed to the second predetermined period when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. Furthermore, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in their initial modes (see Figure 20-56 (22)).

(3) <When the jackpot count value = 3>
(3-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing of V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the jackpot round period), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second changing mode, and the third count section and the arrival section are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-59 (11)).

(3-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), a jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from its initial state to its first change state. Furthermore, the first and second count sections continue to be displayed in the second change state, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in its initial state (see Figure 20-59 (12)).

(3-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round when the first predetermined period has elapsed to the second predetermined period when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a second change effect is executed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. The first and second count sections continue to be displayed in the second change mode, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-59 (13)).

(3-4) Next, during the jackpot round period of the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round after the first and second predetermined periods have elapsed to the third predetermined period), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a reaching portion change effect is executed on the reaching portion, causing the reaching portion to change from its initial state to a changing state. The first, second, and third count portions continue to be displayed in the second changing state (see Figure 20-59 (14)).

<Timing of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the time-saving state A, which is controlled after a jackpot occurs and the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this example, in the time-saving state A = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 during the waiting period for the variable display start and the variable display period, based on the jackpot count display flag described below being set (see Figures 20-58 (1) and (2), and Figures 20-61 (1) to (3)).

However, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2, even during the variable display period when the jackpot count display flag is set, the jackpot count display is erased from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 and is not displayed while the super reach effect is being executed (see Figures 20-58 (3) and (8), and Figures 20-61 (4) to (7)). If the super reach effect develops, the display result will be a "time-saving small hit" (via a small hit) and an effect will be displayed to notify whether a jackpot will occur or not, or the display result will be a "normal small hit" and an effect will be displayed to notify whether the state will fall back to normal. Information (jackpot count display) that notifies the player of the current number of jackpots (jackpot occurrence count value) has a lower priority than information related to the Super Reach effect that notifies the display results of the currently running variable display (Super Reach effect image), so the jackpot count display is not displayed when the Super Reach effect is progressing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super reach effect is being developed, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot count display may also be displayed when the super reach effect is being developed.

<Display mode of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the a time-saving state, which is controlled after a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the same display mode as the display mode just before it was erased when it was displayed during the jackpot before being controlled to the a time-saving state.

In this example, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs and the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display format as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 1) (the first count section is displayed in the second change format, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section are all displayed in their initial format (see Figure 20-51 (7))).

In addition, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display format as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 2) (the first and second count sections are displayed in the second change format, and the third count section and arrival section are displayed in the initial format (see Figure 20-56 (22))).

[Jackpot performance determination process]
Fig. 20-43 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-43 in the jackpot effect process (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, it determines the effects to be executed during a jackpot (and the effects not to be executed) by the jackpot effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-43.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is a "3R regular jackpot" (step S02TM5010).

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is a "3R regular jackpot" (YES in step S02TM5010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the jackpot type is not a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM5010), that is, if the jackpot type is one of the following jackpot types: a "10Ra pattern time-saving jackpot," a "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot," or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot," the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM5020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3, the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM5030) and sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM5040).

The jackpot count display flag is a type of flag that is set when it is decided that the jackpot count display will be displayed at the start of a jackpot or when a V win occurs during a small jackpot. This jackpot count display flag indicates that the jackpot count display will be displayed in the jackpot game state, small jackpot game state, or time-saving state, and is cleared at the same time that the first flag or second flag described above is cleared (reset).

After processing step S02TM5040, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (step S02TM5050).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (YES in step S02TM5050), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the first stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the first count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5060), decides to execute the presentation announcing the required number of jackpots [2 times] (step S02TM5070), and then ends the processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 1 (NO in step S02TM5050), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (step S02TM5080).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (YES in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the second stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the second count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5090), decides to execute the presentation announcing the required number of jackpots [1 time] (step S02TM5100), and then ends the processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 2 (NO in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (step S02TM5110). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 (NO in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (YES in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the third stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the third count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5120), decides to execute the arrival section change presentation (step S02TM5130), and then ends the processing.

[Small hit performance determination process]
Fig. 20-44 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small win. The effect control CPU 120 executes the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-44 in the small win effect processing (step S174) of the effect control process processing shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a small win start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during the small win (and the effect not to be executed) by the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-44.

In this example, during the small win release process, which is executed when the game is controlled to a small win gaming state, if a V win occurs, the process is executed to update the large win occurrence count value, which is specified numerical data, by adding 1.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the V prize flag is set (step S02TM6010). If the V prize flag is not set (NO in step S02TM6010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM6010), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM6020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3 (a jackpot via a small jackpot on the first hit (jackpot occurrence count value = 1) is irregular), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM6030), sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM6040), and ends processing.

[Processing for determining effects when waiting for fluctuation start]
Fig. 20-45 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the variable display start waiting period. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-45 during the variable display start waiting period (step S170) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo command, it determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display start waiting period by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-45.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM7010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM7010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM7010), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM7020) and ends processing.

[Performance decision process at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts displaying the variation of the special pattern, it sends a display result designation command that designates the display result, a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) begins to change, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 00 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, miss, type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, etc.); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the change time of the special symbol and the effect content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.). Based on this, the effect control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special symbol will be changed and to specify the change time of the special symbol and the effect content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol has ended and the display result has been determined, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a symbol determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 20-46 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed when the variation starts. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in Figure 20-46 during the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set of commands described above in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command, and determines the effects to be executed (and the effects not to be executed) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern using the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in Figure 20-46.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM8010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM8010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM8010), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020).

In this way, this fluctuation start effect determination process determines whether or not the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the fluctuation start waiting effect determination process (see Figure 20-45) should continue to be displayed at the start of fluctuation.

[Fluctuation performance determination processing]
Fig. 20-47 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the execution period of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-47 in the effect processing during variable display (step S172) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the execution period of the variable display by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-47.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM9010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM9010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM9010), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020) and determines whether the timing has come for the variation pattern to develop into a super reach (step S02TM9030).

The CPU 103 can acquire information regarding the elapsed time of the currently executing variable display during the special symbol variable processing (S112) of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 16, which includes processing for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to vary and processing for determining whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable time corresponding to the variable pattern. Then, in step S02TM9030, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on that information, whether the current variable time is the timing for development into a super reach in the variable pattern.

If it is not time for the variation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (NO in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If it is time for the variation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (YES in step S02TM9030), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display (step S02TM9040) and ends the process.

In this way, this during-variation effect determination process determines whether the jackpot count display that was decided to be displayed in the variation start waiting effect determination process (see Figure 20-45) should continue to be displayed during variation, or whether it should be erased during variation.

[Example of presentation when the first hit is a "3R regular jackpot"]
An example of the presentation that occurs when the first "3R normal jackpot" occurs while the machine is controlled in [normal mode] will be explained using Figures 20-48 to 20-49.

Figure 20-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the first "3R regular jackpot" hit when controlled in "normal mode," and Figure 20-49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image associated with the first "3R regular jackpot" hit when controlled in "normal mode."

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, resulting in a "jackpot" ("3R symbol normal jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode."

First, as shown in Figure 20-49 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," the presentation control CPU 120 receives a pattern confirmation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 20-48), and confirms and stops the combination of confirmed decorative symbols (in this example, "222") that results in a "jackpot" (a 3R normal jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special symbol stop processing (see Figures 20-22).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-49 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in Figure 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to "normal mode" and displays the jackpot start image (in this example, the word "FEVER") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-49 (3), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in Figure 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, and a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00000") indicating the total number of prize balls awarded.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win at the second start winning slot or the large winning slot (here, the large winning slot).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-49 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round of play in the jackpot game state (timing T4 shown in Figure 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end command, displays a jackpot end image (in this example, a total prize ball count display (the letters "TOTAL 00450") showing the total number of prize balls awarded, and an ally character) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared during the jackpot end process (see Figure 20-23).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-49 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state (timing T5 shown in Figure 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode] and displays a combination of fixed decorative symbols (in this example, "222") that is common to the combination of fixed decorative symbols that were fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, a combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, a background image corresponding to [normal mode] (in this example, a clear background image including the sun and mountains) is displayed as the background image.

[Example of presentation when the first hit is "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Big Hit"]
An example of the presentation when the first hit of the "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot" occurs when the machine is controlled in [Normal Mode] will be explained using Figures 20-50 to 20-52.

Figure 20-50 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the first "10Ra time-saving jackpot" when controlled in [normal mode], and Figures 20-51 and 20-52 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with the first "10Ra time-saving jackpot" when controlled in [normal mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, resulting in a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush].

First, as shown in Figure 20-51 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," the presentation control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 20-50), and determines and stops the determined decorative symbol combination (in this example, "555") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot) in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "555") is determined and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special symbol stop processing (see Figures 20-22).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-51 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in Figure 20-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to "normal mode" and displays the jackpot start image (in this example, the words "Dream Fever") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a round of play (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as explained in FIG. 20-49 (3), and also displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that indicates a right hit to enter the jackpot, and the letters and arrow image are more emphasized than in the constant right-hit promotion image.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the jackpot round game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. However, this jackpot round game start image has a lower display priority than the highlighted right hit promotion image. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the highlighted right hit promotion image and the jackpot round game start image are displayed in that order. However, in this example, the display area for the jackpot round game start image and the highlighted right hit promotion image are the same (the entire screen of the image display device 5), so the player can only see the highlighted right hit promotion image.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-51 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right-hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T4 shown in Figure 20-50). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot round game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round game start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the text "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, a jackpot right-hit promotion image that includes the text "Aim for the attacker!!" to enter the jackpot slot and an arrow image indicating a right hit, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-51 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot round game start image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the initial jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in Figure 20-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence indication (in this example, a red "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-51 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V-change presentation on the first count section, changing the first count section from its initial state (white "V") to the first change state (red "V") (timing T6 shown in Figure 20-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 00300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-51 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a WIN change effect on the first count section, changing the first count section from the first change state (white "V") to the second change state (red "V") (timing T7 shown in Figure 20-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 00330").

Next, as shown in Figure 20-51 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T8 shown in Figure 20-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation, and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 the required number of jackpots (the text "2 more jackpots until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-52 (9), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpots notification presentation, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T9 shown in Figure 20-50).

[Example of presentation when the first hit is a "10Rb time-saving jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when the initial hit of "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [Normal mode], and then when controlled in [Invincible RUSH], a hit of "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" occurs will be explained using Figures 20-53 to 20-56.

Figure 20-53 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the first "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [Normal Mode], and then when controlled in [Invincible Rush], a jackpot of "10Rb time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs. Figures 20-54 to 20-56 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of related effect images when the first "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [Normal Mode], and then when controlled in [Invincible Rush], a jackpot of "10Rb time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs.

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, which results in a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, the presentation mode is controlled to [Invincible Rush], and during this [Invincible Rush], a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which results in a "time-saving small jackpot", and a V win occurs during the small jackpot, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

First, as shown in Figure 20-54 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," the presentation control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 20-53), and determines and stops the determined decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Rb time-limited jackpot) in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special symbol stop processing (see Figures 20-22).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-54 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in Figure 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to "normal mode," executes the first part of the 3000 notification presentation, and displays the words "Dream Fever" across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-54 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the second part of the 3000 notification presentation, and while the word "Dream Fever" is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, a cracked image is superimposed across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T3 shown in Figure 20-53). The cracked image has a higher display priority than the word "Dream Fever". Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the cracked image and the word "Dream Fever" are displayed in that order.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-54 (4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third part of the 3000 notification effect, erases the "Dream Fever" text and crack image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in Figure 20-53).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-54 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth part of the 3000 notification effect, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the characters "3000" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in Figure 20-53).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the reel device did not move when the 3000 notification effect was executed, but this is not limited to this configuration; the reel device may also move when the 3000 notification effect is executed. For example, when the fourth part of the 3000 notification effect is executed, the movable body 02TM100 may be moved from the initial position to the maximum effect position.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-54 (6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fifth part of the 3000 notification effect, displaying the words "3000FEVER" across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T6 shown in Figure 20-53).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, the 3000 notification effect consisting of parts 1 to 5 is executed, thereby announcing that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the first jackpot and 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the next confirmed jackpot.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 20-54 (7) to 20-55 (11) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 20-51 (3) to (7) described above, so explanations will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-55 (12), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes a special notification presentation announcing that the game will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible Rush]) after the jackpot game state ends, displays the words "3000FEVER" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a caption containing the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T12 shown in Figure 20-53).

This caption display is the same image as the caption display displayed when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], and by displaying the caption display during the jackpot round before control is switched to [Invincible Rush], it is possible to notify players that control will be switched to the b time-saving state ([Invincible Rush]) after the jackpot game state ends.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 00450").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state and starts the b time-saving state (timing T13 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [Invincible Rush] and displays a combination of fixed second decorative symbols (in this example, "777") of the same type as the combination of fixed decorative symbols that were fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a promotion image for right-hit at the start of time-saving in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This promotion image for right-hit at the start of time-saving includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image indicating right-hit to win in the second start winning slot.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on the control of [Invincible Rush], displays a caption containing the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period when controlled in [Invincible Rush], a prize ball count display (in this example, the words "TOTAL 01500") (corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the immediately preceding jackpot) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the b time-saving state, which is controlled after a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so by continuing to display the prize ball count display corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the immediately preceding jackpot even after the jackpot, the special feeling of the b time-saving state is enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-55 (14), when a new start winning occurs at the second start winning slot and the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, which results in a "miss" (timing T14 shown in Figure 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-55 (15), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T14 shown in Figure 20-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "142") indicating a "miss" display result in second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, it confirms and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "142") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

After this, the variable display is executed m (m≧1) times, and all display results are "misses." Then, as shown in Figure 20-55 (16) and onwards, the display result for the next variable display is "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (16), when the CPU 103 starts displaying the variation of the second special symbol, which results in a "time-saving small win" (timing T16 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the variation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-56 (17), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in Figure 20-53), the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, indicating that the display result is a "small time-saving win." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-56 (18), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T18 shown in Figure 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win the V prize slot.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the highlighted right-hit promotion image during a jackpot game state is displayed during the jackpot round game period after the jackpot fanfare period has ended, and the highlighted right-hit promotion image during a small jackpot game state is displayed during the small jackpot fanfare period, but this is not limited to this form. The highlighted right-hit promotion image during a jackpot game state may also be displayed during the jackpot fanfare period, and the highlighted right-hit promotion image during a small jackpot game state may also be displayed during the small jackpot fanfare period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (19), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game period (timing T19 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right-hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small win game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right-hit promotion image that includes the words "Aim for V!!" to win a V and an arrow image indicating a right hit, as well as an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-56 (20), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during small win play, the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during the specified valid period (timing T20 shown in Figure 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a big win occurrence indication (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section in the second changing state, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section in the initial state.

When the CPU 103 ends the small win game state, the small win end processing (see Figure 20-24) updates the big win occurrence count value from 1 to 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (21), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win gaming state and starts the big win gaming state (timing T21 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V-change presentation for the second count section, changing the second count section from its initial state (white "V") to its first change state (red "V").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 01800") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-56 (22), the effect control CPU 120 executes a WIN change effect on the second counting section, changing the second counting section from the first change state (red "V") to the second change state (red "WIN") (timing T22 shown in Figure 20-53).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 01830").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (23), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T23 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation, and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 the required number of jackpots (the text "One more jackpot until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-56 (24), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the presentation of the required number of jackpots notification, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs during the first jackpot, a first-stage effect is executed on the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and a special notification effect is executed to notify players that they will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible Rush]) after the jackpot game state ends. If a [second jackpot] (a 10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot) occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot, a second-stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed on the second count section of the jackpot count display.

By executing a special notification effect on the [first jackpot], it is possible to notify the player that the second stage of the jackpot count display will be executed, i.e., that it is virtually certain that there will be one remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, giving the player a special feeling about the "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot."

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, the player will be able to clear more than half (2/3) of the target value (mode switch determination value of 3) on the jackpot count display, making the "10Rb time-saving jackpot" feel more special than other types of jackpots on the first hit.

In the above embodiment, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first jackpot, the first stage effects (V change effects, WIN effects) are executed on the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and if the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot) occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot, the second stage effects (V change effects, WIN effects) are executed on the second count section of the jackpot count display.

However, it is not limited to this configuration; during the "first jackpot," the first stage effect is executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display at a different timing than during the "second jackpot" (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot.

As examples of the timing at which the second stage presentation is executed in response to the jackpot count display, (1) to (3) are shown below.
(1) The jackpot round period during the first jackpot (for example, the timing immediately after the first stage performance)
(2) The jackpot ending period during the [first jackpot]. (3) The period controlled to the b time-saving state after the [first jackpot] (for example, the first fluctuation of the b time-saving state).

For example, in the case of (1) above, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first jackpot, during the [first jackpot], the first stage of the effect may be executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and then the second stage of the effect may be executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display.

In other words, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, which is controlled to the b time-saving state after a jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so even though a "second jackpot" has not actually occurred, at the time of the "first jackpot," the second stage effect may be executed along with the first stage effect on the jackpot count display.

[Example of a presentation when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3]
An example of the presentation when a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 while the [Dream Rush] is in control and the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 will be explained using Figures 20-57 to 20-59.

Figure 20-57 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" jackpot, where the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and controlled by [Dream Rush]. Figures 20-58 and 20-59 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" jackpot, where the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and controlled by [Dream Rush].

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], the display result is a "time-saving small win" ("10Ra time-saving small win via time-saving small win"), and the second special pattern variation display is executed with a variation pattern of "Super Reach A time-saving small win", a V win occurs in the small win, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and in this jackpot gaming state the jackpot occurrence count value becomes 3 (mode switching determination value). Also, the jackpot count display corresponding to the state where the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in Figure 20-58 (1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and second count section in the second changing state, and the third count section and arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (2), at the timing when the ready state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T2 shown in Figure 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 establishes the ready state by statically displaying the first decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small patterns. In other words, the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L where the first decorative pattern is statically displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R where the first decorative pattern is statically displayed, continue to display the variable small patterns without statically displaying them.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (3), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a Super Reach (timing T3 shown in Figure 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a challenge presentation, displaying the words "BOMB Challenge" and an image resembling a rock across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the first decorative pattern variation displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination made in the during-variation presentation determination process (see Figure 20-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (4), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, displaying the words "Explode the rock and get the jackpot!!" and an image resembling a rock across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T4 shown in Figure 20-57).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, displaying an ally character performing a bomb-throwing action across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in Figure 20-57).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, displaying an image simulating a bomb explosion across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T6 shown in Figure 20-57).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a successful presentation of the challenge presentation, and displays an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge (in this example, the word "SUCCESS" and the ally character making a peace sign) across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T7 shown in Figure 20-57).

Next, at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed (timing T8 shown in Figure 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating a "time-saving small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, while displaying an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge across the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-58 (8), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which indicates that the display result is a "time-saving small win." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 20-59 (9) and (10) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 20-56 (18) and (19) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (11), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during a small win game, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence indication (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing when the gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during the specified valid period (timing T11 shown in FIG. 20-57). At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has updated the jackpot occurrence count value from 2 to 3 during the small win termination process (see FIG. 20-24), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the words "3 consecutive wins!!" in the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and second count section in the second changing state, and the third count section and arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-59 (12), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win gaming state and starts the big win gaming state (timing T12 shown in Figure 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V-change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from its initial state (white letter "V") to the first change state (red letter "V").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-59 (13), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from the first change state (red "V") to the second change state (red "WIN") (timing T13 shown in Figure 20-57).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03330").

Next, as shown in Figure 20-59 (14), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation change for the arrival section, changing the arrival section from its initial state (white letters "PREMIUM FEVER") to its changed state (red letters "PREMIUM FEVER") (timing T14 shown in Figure 20-57). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays two types of ally characters on the left and right sides of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03360").

Next, as shown in Figure 20-59 (15), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 (at timing T15 shown in Figure 20-57). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays, across the entire screen of the image display device 5, an reached jackpot display (in this example, the words "PREMIUM FEVER") indicating that the jackpot occurrence count value is greater than or equal to the mode switching determination value (3).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03450").

Next, as shown in Figure 20-56 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T16 shown in Figure 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, displays the word "READY" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will begin (the "entry fluctuation" will begin).

[Example of a normal small win]
When the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the machine is under control of [Dream Rush], a "normal small hit" small hit occurs, and a V prize cannot be obtained with this small hit. An example of the presentation will be explained using Figures 20-60 to 20-62.

Figure 20-60 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with a situation where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is being exercised under [Dream Rush], and a V prize cannot be awarded for this small hit. Figures 20-61 and 20-62 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with a situation where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is being exercised under [Dream Rush], and a V prize cannot be awarded for this small hit.

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, with the display result being "normal small win" and the variation pattern being "Super Reach B normal small win," and no V win occurs in the small win, so the mode is controlled to the normal state. Also, the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in Figure 20-61 (1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 20-60), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and second count section in the second changing state, and the third count section and arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (2), the performance control CPU 120 displays a fall suggestion display 02TM400 (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing an exclamation mark and the word "WARNING") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T2 shown in Figure 20-60).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (3), at the timing when the ready state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T3 shown in Figure 20-60), the performance control CPU 120 erases the fall suggestion display 02TM400 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and establishes the ready state by statically displaying the first decorative symbol (in this example, "2") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small symbol. In other words, the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L where the first decorative symbol is statically displayed, and the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R where the first decorative symbol is statically displayed, continue to display the variable small symbol without statically displaying it.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (4), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a Super Reach (timing T4 shown in Figure 20-60), the effect control CPU 120 executes a fall-inducing effect, and when a Reach state is established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, it temporarily stops the special symbol (in this example, the decorative symbol of the word "END") in the symbol display area 5C. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a highly transparent display mode (for example, 50% transparency), suggesting that it has been temporarily stopped.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination made in the during-variation presentation determination process (see Figure 20-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (5), the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Destroy it!" and an operation prompt display 02TM31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (at timing T5 shown in Figure 20-60).

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (6), when the player operates the push button 31B (timing T6 shown in Figure 20-60), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a static special symbol in the symbol display area 5C, indicating that the display result will be a "normal small win." At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (7), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T7 shown in Figure 20-60), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "2 [END] 2") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which indicates that the display result is a "normal small win." At this time, it confirms and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "222") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 20-61 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T8 shown in Figure 20-60), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, displays a result image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This result image is an image that includes an indication of the total number of prize balls awarded (in this example, "TOTAL 03000") and an ally character.

In this small win game state, the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 opens in the first opening pattern, which opens once and for an opening time of 0.04 seconds, making it extremely difficult to achieve a V win. In this example, the small win game state ends without a V win occurring.

Next, the content shown in Figure 20-62 (9) is similar to the content shown in Figure 20-49 (5), so explanation will be omitted.

[Fire interval and hold consumption speed]
In this embodiment, a player can operate the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch a game ball from the ball-hitting device and strike it into the game area. When the game ball struck into the game area enters (wins) the start winning slot, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and the random number value is stored as reserved information. Furthermore, a process is executed to predict the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the reserved information and the number of reserved memories are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the results of the judgment, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the predictive judgment.

Therefore, the more game balls that are launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area per hour, the greater the chances of a game ball entering the starting winning slot, and the greater the chances of a lottery being held to determine whether or not a big win (small win) will occur, providing an even more advantageous gaming environment for players.

However, pachinko machines prohibit the firing of more than 101 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. In other words, it is possible to fire up to 100 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. To maximize the number of game balls that are shot into the play area, a configuration is adopted in which 100 game balls are fired from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. If this configuration is adopted, the interval between game ball launches will be 0.6 seconds per game ball (seconds/ball).

Furthermore, in order to generate a start winning by hitting a game ball into the game area, the game ball must enter a start winning hole. This pachinko game machine is configured with a winning ball device (e.g., a variable winning ball device) that forms a start winning hole (e.g., a second start winning hole) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, so when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, the following steps (1) to (3) must be taken.
(1) Pass through the passing gate → lottery for normal symbols (2) The display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol win" → the variable winning ball device is opened (3) The ball enters the variable winning ball device that has been opened. Furthermore, (X) the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills and numerous obstacle nails that change the direction and speed of the game ball's flow, and (Y) if the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes, it is taken into the outlet located at the bottom of the game area, so it is virtually impossible for all of the game balls that are launched to clear steps (1) to (3) and enter the starting winning hole.

Therefore, if the launch interval per game ball is 0.6 seconds, taking into account the above-mentioned (X) and (Y) and steps (1) to (4), the interval between game balls entering the starting winning hole (hereinafter referred to as the "winning interval") will be 0.6 + α (α > 0) seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved memory of a special pattern (a variable display whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to a starting winning that occurred during the period until the currently executed variable display ends, the variable display of the next reserved memory will begin when the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (variable display period) and the pattern determination period corresponding to this variable display have elapsed. Hereinafter, this period, which is the combination of the variable display period and the pattern determination period, until the next reserved memory begins will be referred to as the "reserved consumption period" as appropriate.

<Table showing the relationship between firing interval and hold period>
FIG. 20-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between the firing interval and the reserved consumption period in this embodiment. FIG. 20-63 shows the relationship between the firing interval, the winning interval (hereinafter referred to as [Int01] as appropriate), the variable display period, the symbol determination period, and the reserved consumption period (hereinafter referred to as [Int02] as appropriate), and the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02]. In this example, a case is described in which a player operates the ball-launching handle 30, causing 100 game balls to be launched from the ball-launching device over 60 seconds and hit into the right game area, and one of the launched game balls enters the second start winning slot.

((A) When the variable display period is less than 0.2 seconds)
As shown in Figure 20-63 (A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with an extremely short variable display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 0.05 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.55 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01] > [Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (A))
Figure 20-64 is a time chart showing the relationship between the [Int01] winning interval, the [Int02] reserved consumption period, and the number of reserved memories in case (A).

In this example, the value of "α" in the winning interval of 0.6 + α seconds is assumed to be a unique value for each winning interval. For example, the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the first starting winning shown in Figure 20-64 is 0.5 seconds, and the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the next starting winning is 1.3 seconds. The same applies to Figures 20-65 and 20-66.

As shown in Figure 20-64, in case (A), i.e., when [Int01] > [Int02], the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds) is shorter than the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds), so the reserved consumption period ends before a new start winning occurs. Therefore, the second reserved memory count becomes "1" only when a start winning occurs, but is "0" at other times.

((B) When the variable display period is 0.2 seconds)
As shown in Figure 20-63 (B), when a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.7 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01] ≦ [Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (B))
Figure 20-65 is a time chart showing the relationship between the [Int01] winning interval, the [Int02] reserved consumption period, and the number of reserved memories in case (B).

As shown in Figure 20-65, in case (B), i.e., when [Int01] ≦ [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the number of second reserved memories increases over time (the maximum number of second reserved memories is "4").

((C) When the variable display period is greater than 0.2 seconds)
When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (longer than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 1 second, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 1.5 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01] < [Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (C))
Figure 20-66 is a time chart showing the relationship between [Int01] winning interval, [Int02] reserved consumption period, and reserved memory number in case of (C).

As shown in Figure 20-66, in case (C), i.e., when [Int01] < [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (1.5 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the number of second reserved memories increases over time (the maximum number of second reserved memories is "4").

As shown in Figure 20-64, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with an extremely short period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) is primarily selected, a pachinko gaming machine with a fast reserved memory consumption speed can be realized, but since the second reserved memory cannot be accumulated, it is not possible to execute pre-reading preview effects that predict the expected probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending), which results in a decrease in interest in the pre-reading preview effects.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20-66, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (variable display period: 1 second) is primarily selected, it is possible to accumulate second reserved memory, making it possible to execute pre-execution preview effects in the variable display, etc., but it is not possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory, which leads to a decrease in interest in terms of the speed at which reserved memory is consumed.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-65, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is primarily selected, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory while also storing second reserved memory, making it possible to execute pre-execution preview effects in the variable display, etc., thereby increasing interest in terms of pre-execution preview effects and the speed at which reserved memory is consumed.

In this way, in a pachinko gaming machine capable of firing up to 100 gaming balls from the ball firing device in 60 seconds, by adopting a configuration such as this embodiment where, when controlled in [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], a high rate of execution of the "Ultra-High-Speed Miss" variable display pattern, in which the variable display period is 0.2 seconds and the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory while also being able to execute pre-execution prediction effects and the like in the variable display before execution (the variable display whose execution is on hold).

(Effect 02-1)
As shown in Figures 20-15 and 20-16, and Figures 20-18 and 20-19, in the time-saving state, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the rate at which the variable display of the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern, in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed is higher than the rate at which the variable display of the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern, in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed when the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2).

In addition, as shown in Figures 20-51, 20-55, 20-56, 20-58, and 20-59, the jackpot count display 02TM300, which indicates the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value, and the required number of jackpots ("X more times until ultra-high speed HYPERRUSH") are displayed on the image display device 5.

With this type of gaming machine, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, the variable display period is more likely to be shorter than the specified period (the 0.5-second symbol determination stop period) than when the mode switching determination value has not been reached. This increases the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the time-saving mode, making it even more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when controlled to the time-saving mode, players will be highly interested in how many times they will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and will play with a desire to maintain the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, assuming this type of variable display control is performed, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots related to the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value are displayed, providing presentation information that is in line with the player's interests and further enhancing the excitement when controlled to the time-saving mode.

(Effect 02-2)
As shown in Figures 20-1 (1) and 20-3 (A1), if the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state is an even number pattern and the control is made to a "pattern 3R normal jackpot," then the control is made to a low base state without transitioning to a time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends; if the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7 and the control is made to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," then the control is made to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends; and if the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern 7 and the control is made to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," then the control is made to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," then the control is made to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," then the control is made to a "time-saving state" after the 10R jackpot game state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to the time-shortened state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and cases where it is controlled to the time-shortened state, based on the variable display executed when the machine is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when the machine is controlled to the time-shortened state, there are cases where it is controlled to the time-shortened state a and cases where it is controlled to the time-shortened state b, so the player can be drawn to the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state.

(Effect 02-3)
As shown in Figures 20-51 to 20-52 and Figures 20-54 to 20-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number pattern (such as "555" or "777") and the 10R jackpot is controlled based on this, the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by at least one stage.

With this type of gaming machine, the jackpot occurrence count value is related to the display of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots, so players will pay attention to the display of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots. Since the display of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, players can become more interested in the variable display executed in the normal state.

(Effect 02-4)
As shown in Figures 20-54 to 20-56, when a 10R jackpot is controlled based on the display result of the decorative pattern change display executed when controlled in the normal state becoming an odd number 7 ("777"), the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by one step, and then changed by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the change display executed in the b time-saving state.

With this type of gaming machine, the player's advantage after the jackpot game state ends is associated with the number of stages at which the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display change, further increasing interest in the changes in the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display.

(Effect 02-5)
As shown in Figures 20-54 to 20-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number 7 ("777") and the system is controlled to a 10R jackpot, a 3000 notification effect is executed, suggesting that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, including the prize balls for 10 rounds of the first jackpot (1500 balls) and the prize balls for 10 rounds of the next jackpot that is essentially confirmed (1500 balls).

With this type of gaming machine, when the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, it is suggested that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded: 1,500 prize balls awarded in that jackpot gaming state, and 1,500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state b, which is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. This increases the player's sense of anticipation before the machine is controlled to the time-saving state b.

(Effect 02-6)
As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), when the game is controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when controlled to the normal state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 ("pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), when the game is controlled to a 3R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers other than 7 ("333" etc.) ("pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot"), the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] is continued after the jackpot game state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, even though the game has been controlled to the b time-saving state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol prevents the b time-saving state from ending, thereby preventing dissatisfaction among players. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite the game being controlled to the b time-saving state, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state based on this, by making it possible to control the game to the b time-saving state, it is possible to ensure the player's anticipation of being controlled to the jackpot game state regardless of the type of special symbol.

(Effect 02-7)
As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), when the game is controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when controlled to the normal state being "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," when the game is controlled to a 10R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 (such as "777") ("Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot"), the game is controlled to the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH] which is controlled to the normal state when a normal small jackpot occurs and no V prize is awarded.

With this type of gaming machine, if an irregular situation occurs in which the first special symbol variable display is executed despite the machine being controlled to the b time-saving state, resulting in a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" and the machine being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, by controlling the machine to the a time-saving state, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state regardless of the type of special symbol. Furthermore, by at least not controlling the machine to the b time-saving state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

(Effect 02-8)
As shown in Figures 20-55 to 20-56, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, the information displayed in the second count section (the letter "V" and the letter "WIN") is displayed in a larger and more emphasized size in the order of the information displayed in the first count section (the letter "V" and the letter "WIN"). Also, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, it is possible to increase the luminance of the light emitted from the second count section > the first count section, and it is also possible to shorten the blinking interval (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the manner in which the jackpot count display is displayed can indicate the number of times remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot count display.

(Effect 02-9)
As shown in Figures 20-18 and 20-19, when controlled in the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to execute a variable display of an "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the display result is a "miss" (missing symbol), and the variable display period is shorter than the symbol confirmation stop period of 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20-19, among the variable displays that are executed when controlled in the time-saving state a [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] and that result in a "miss" display, if the number of pending memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "Ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period when it is controlled in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (including a jackpot via a small jackpot).

(Effect 02-10)
As shown in Figures 20-15 and 20-16, the fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when controlled in the time-saving state [Dream Rush] a does not contain a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)."

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between the time-saving state "Dream Rush" and "Super High-Speed Hyper Rush" by the difference in the variable display period, allowing players to place emphasis on the consecutive occurrence of jackpot gaming states and to experience the uniqueness of the time-saving state "Super High-Speed Hyper Rush."

(Effect 02-11)
As shown in Figure 20-17 (1), if the display result is "miss" in the first variable display when the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed RUSH] is controlled for the first time, a variable display of the variable pattern "entry variable miss (entry effect + ultra-high speed miss)" with a variable display period of 30.2 seconds is executed.

As shown in Figures 20-18 (1) and 20-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern (30.2 seconds) of the "Entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + super-high speed miss)" has a longer fluctuation display period than any of the fluctuation patterns executed when the display result is "miss" in the fluctuation display when continuously controlled in the time-saving state a [super-high speed RUSH] ("pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds), "super-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds), "Super Reach C miss" (10 seconds), "Super Reach B miss" (20 seconds)).

As shown in Figures 20-7 to 20-10, the fluctuation display for the "entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + ultra-high speed miss)" fluctuation pattern displays accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effects and mode start indication effects.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern, can indicate to the player that they have entered the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-12)
As shown in Figures 20-17 (1), 20-18 (1), and 20-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern of the "missed entry fluctuation" (30.2 seconds) is such that in the first period from the start of fluctuation until 30 seconds have elapsed, an accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect and a mode start suggestion effect are executed, and in the second period from this first period until 0.7 seconds have elapsed, a period for displaying the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (0.2 seconds) and a period for stopping the pattern confirmation (0.5 seconds) are provided to actually notify the display result.

In addition, as shown in Figures 20-28 (2) to (5) and Figures 20-9 (18) to 20-10 (21), the display of the decorative symbols that actually notify the display results during the second period has the same presentation pattern as the "ultra-fast miss" (0.2 seconds) change pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern indicates to the player that they have entered the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and even though the actual fluctuation display period is not as short as the "ultra-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, the player can feel that the fluctuation display period has become extremely short since the first fluctuation display upon entering the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-13)
As shown in Figure 20-6, an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed in which the unit pseudo-fluctuation display period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds, and as shown in Figures 20-7 to 20-10, in the fluctuation pattern of ``entry fluctuation miss'' (30.2 seconds), in the first period from the start of the fluctuation until 30 seconds have passed, a mode start notification effect is executed after the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first period from the start of the fluctuation pattern of "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds) until 30 seconds have elapsed is effectively utilized to enter the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER
The player is made aware that the variable display period will be shortened when the state shifts to the time-saving state [hyper-high speed HYPER RUSH], and is informed that the mode will shift to a presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving state [hyper-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-14)
As shown in Figures 20-34 and 20-35, in the central area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first pre-reading performance is being performed using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display being performed (a fixed icon including the word "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that has not been fixed and stopped).

In addition, as shown in Figures 20-36 and 20-37, a second pre-reading effect is executed to display a second pre-reading image (an image including part of a pseudo-third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result of the stopped display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 will be a "small time-saving win").

As shown in Figures 20-42 (1) and (2), when the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Furthermore, when the display result is a "time-saving small win," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small jackpot). Furthermore, the first suggestive effect, which is executed with a relatively high probability, is an effect that uses decorative symbols and is executed in a symbol display area that is easy for players to notice, allowing the player to experience the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] while increasing the sense of anticipation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-15)
Among the pre-reading notice effects, the symbol enlargement effect has a higher execution rate than the reserved pre-reading notice effect (not shown). Also, the combined execution rate (percentage) of the first pre-reading effect and the symbol enlargement effect is higher than the combined execution rate of the second pre-reading effect and the reserved pre-reading notice effect (not shown). With this gaming machine, the player can experience the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-16)
As shown in Figure 20-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is different from the manner in which it scrolls up and down on the screen, but rather moves from the back of the screen to the front (the manner in which the third decorative symbol is enlarged and then reduced). When the variable display that becomes a "miss" is executed continuously,
(1) The third decorative pattern is displayed (enlarged) in a manner that is larger in size and has a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed variable display,
(2) It is displayed (reduced display) in a smaller size and with a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that stopped in response to the last variable display executed, and (3) it is displayed in the same size and with the same transparency as the third decorative pattern that stopped in response to the last variable display executed (stopped display).

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a "miss" are executed consecutively, the period during which the third decorative symbol is displayed within the area the player is focusing on can be extended, and the transparency of the third decorative symbol changes within the area the player is focusing on, giving the player a stronger sense of the high speed of the variable display in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-17)
As shown in Figure 20-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is different from the manner in which it scrolls up and down on the screen, but is a manner in which it moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the third decorative symbol is enlarged and then reduced). When the variable display that becomes a "miss" is executed consecutively, the combination of the third decorative symbol is as follows:
In the case of (1) described above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the immediately preceding variable display,
In the case of (2) described above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
In the case of (3) described above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
is displayed.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled in time-saving mode a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small win). Furthermore, at least a portion of the third decorative symbol used in the previously executed "super high-speed miss" variable display is also used in the later executed "super high-speed miss" variable display, thereby providing a sense of speed through the "super high-speed miss" variable display while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive amount of presentation information presented in conjunction with the "super high-speed miss" variable display.

(Effect 02-18)
As shown in Figure 20-28, when the time-saving state [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, the third decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area is composed of a number pattern, a base pattern added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponding to the outline of the number pattern, and a radial light effect display added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and displayed on the entire screen. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-26, when the time-saving state [Dream RUSH] is controlled, the first decorative pattern is composed only of a number pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative symbols are more emphasized in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], making them easier to recognize when the variable display period is short, and highlighting the sense of speed when the decorative symbols are displayed.

(Effect 02-19)
As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] is in effect and the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo-fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 20-11, 20-12, and 20-13, when the fluctuation display of the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is executed, a uniform-speed pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in which unit pseudo fluctuations (temporary stop and re-fluctuating decorative patterns) are executed four times with a cycle of [period equivalent to fluctuation display 0.2 seconds + period equivalent to pattern confirmation stop 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds].

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," an extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small win). Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a variable display with a "pseudo variable miss" variable display pattern with a long variable display period is executed, thereby minimizing situations where a variable display is not being executed, and by making it appear to the player as if multiple variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is not lost.

(Effect 02-20)
As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] is in effect and the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other fluctuation patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to minimize the loss of frequency and sense of speed in the variable display during time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-21)
As shown in Figure 20-15, when the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is being controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is not selected, and the "long fluctuation miss" (10 seconds) fluctuation pattern can be selected.

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clearly identify the characteristics of the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and also to avoid situations where the fluctuation display is not being executed as much as possible, even when controlled in the time-saving mode a [Dream RUSH].

(Effect 02-22)
As shown in Figures 20-27, a first logo periodic change performance that changes the first logo display and a second logo periodic change performance that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the change period in the second logo periodic change performance (0.5 s) is shorter than the change period in the first logo periodic change performance (5 s).

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small jackpot). Furthermore, in the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], where the variable display of the "Ultra-High-Speed Miss" variable pattern is likely to be executed, the high frequency of changes in the second logo display emphasizes the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-23)
As shown in Figures 20-27, a first logo cyclic change effect that changes the first logo display and a second logo cyclic change effect that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the light emission pattern changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display, and the light emission pattern changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display.

With this type of gaming machine, the first logo display can notify that the machine is in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area, while the second logo display can notify that the machine is in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area.

(Effect 02-24)
When the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is in effect, a first system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning slot. The first system display is a moving image including the words "hit right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

In addition, when controlled in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotional image for winning the second start winning slot. The second system display is a moving image that includes the words "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

The arrow movement period in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the arrow movement period in the first system display is 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the first system display and second system display notify the player of the area into which the gaming ball should be launched, and further emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-25)
When controlled in the time-saving state [Dream Rush], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed, along with a first rotation corresponding display as a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

In addition, when controlled in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as a second rotation-compatible display, which is a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

The rotation period of the second rotation-compatible display is set to 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation-compatible display is set to 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display (hold display, active display) rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to the time-saving state a, and when it is controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the time-saving state a [Dream RUSH], further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

(Effect 02-26)
As shown in FIG. 20-14, in the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], when the display result shows a "jackpot" and the variable display of the "direct jackpot" variable pattern is executed, the jackpot round game is started in association with the start of the jackpot game state without executing the pattern matching effect.

With this type of gaming machine, when the machine is in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win). Furthermore, in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to not display the decorative symbols in a static state when the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot gaming state is emphasized, giving the impression that the machine has been suddenly controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-27)
As shown in FIG. 20-5, in the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small win" is executed, a pattern matching effect is executed, and the combination of third decorative patterns that indicates the display result will be a "time-saving small win" is displayed/confirmed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-14, when a variable display is executed in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] that results in a "jackpot" (not including jackpots via small jackpots), the symbol alignment effect is not executed, and the third decorative symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," an extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (including a jackpot via a small jackpot). Furthermore, in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small jackpot" is executed, the third decorative symbol is displayed stationary in the symbol display area, clarifying the flow of the game and directing the player's attention to playing so that the game ball passes through the V-winning area 870. On the other hand, when a variable display that results in a "jackpot" is executed, the third decorative pattern is not statically displayed, so the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot gaming state is emphasized, giving the impression that the jackpot gaming state has been suddenly controlled.

(Effect 02-28)
As shown in Figures 20-15 (2) and 20-16 (2), in the time-saving state [Dream Rush] a, when the display result is a "jackpot," a variable display of the variable pattern of the "Super Reach A Jackpot" is executed, and based on the display result being a "jackpot," a success effect including a pattern matching effect is executed, and the combination of first decorative patterns indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small hit" is displayed/confirmed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] is made clear by the difference in the decorative symbol display, creating a special feeling when the display result in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] becomes a "jackpot."

(Effect 02-29)
In both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush], the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot pattern (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the period from when the jackpot game state begins until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state can be made even shorter when controlled to the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and when controlled to the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], preventing the player from having to wait the period from when the display result is announced until the prize balls are awarded. In particular, in the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so the special variable prize ball device 7 can be controlled to the open state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see the entire process from the start of the fluctuation to the transition to the jackpot round game as a single flow.

(Effect 02-30)
The special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and when a jackpot occurs based on the result of the variable display of the second special pattern being a "jackpot" in the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] or the time-saving state b [invincible RUSH], it is possible to light up the special variable winning ball device 7 at a timing controlled to the jackpot game state (not shown).

When the machine is in the time-saving mode, the second special symbol changes display frequently, and the display result is often judged as a "small win," resulting in a big win. However, when the machine is in the time-saving mode and the display result is judged as a "big win," players are left feeling disappointed that they would have won better in the normal mode.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot," and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!") is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to draw the player's attention from the image display device 5 toward the big winning opening, thereby reducing the disappointment felt when a jackpot has occurred due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot."

(Effect 02-31)
As shown in Figures 20-32 and 20-33, a series of second change effects are executed, which are comprised of: (2A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (2B) a maximum movement effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum movement position → initial position; (2C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (2D) a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) in which a second action effect is executed in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display), thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display (normal mode → red mode).

With this type of gaming machine, the second action effect of the second action change effect and the second corresponding display change effect of the second action change effect are executed through coordination between the movable body 02TM100, the image related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (ally character 02TM30B), and the corresponding display (hold display, active display). This increases the excitement when the corresponding display changes compared to when only an effect that simply acts on the corresponding display or an effect that changes the corresponding display is executed.

(Effect 02-32)
As shown in Figures 20-29 to 20-31 and 20-58, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that appears in the super reach A performance (challenge performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that succeeds in the challenge in the success performance in the challenge performance are the same character. Also, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that appears in the super reach D performance (battle performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that defeats the enemy character in the victory performance in the battle performance are the same character (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character displayed on the image display device 5 creates a sense of unity in the series of presentations, and also makes the player realize that the ally character is an important character to the player, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the ally character.

(Effect 02-33)
As shown in Figure 20-41 (1), when the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed, the probability (95%, 90%) that the first or second change effect is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to a red mode is higher than the probability (20%) that the first or second change effect is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display changes to a blue mode.

As shown in Figures 20-30 and 20-31, a series of first change effects are executed, consisting of: (1A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (1B) an intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → intermediate action position → initial position; (1C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) in which a first action effect in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display is executed, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

This type of gaming machine can diversify the effects that change the display mode of the corresponding display, and can create a sense of anticipation for the first action effect to be executed when the movable body 02TM100 moves.

(Effect 02-34)
As shown in Figures 20-30 and 20-31, in the first change effect, a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) is executed to change the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (1D) first action effect. Also, as shown in Figures 20-32 and 20-33, in the second change effect, a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) is executed to change the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (2D) second action effect.

As shown in Figure 20-41 (1), when the display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to red while the first special pattern variable display is being executed, the probability that the second variable effect will be executed (50% to 80%) is higher than the probability that the first variable effect will be executed (15% to 40%).

This type of gaming machine can diversify the action effects in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, and can also draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. Furthermore, by executing an action effect in which a highly visible ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the corresponding display will change to a more promising form.

(Effect 02-35)
As shown in Figure 20-30 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the intermediate performance position to the initial position, the first change performance (1C) character appearance performance is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in Figure 20-32 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the maximum effect position to the initial position, the second transformation effect (2C) character appearance effect is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

This type of gaming machine can emphasize the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B, and the coordination between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B can highlight the dramatic effects of the ally character.

(Effect 02-36)
As shown in Figures 20-30 and 20-31, (1A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (1B) an intermediate action effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate action position → initial position, (1C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) is executed in which a first action effect is executed in which the ally character throws a bomb at the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 20-32 and 20-33, (2A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (2B) a maximum movement effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → maximum movement position → initial position, and (2C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (2D) a second action effect is executed in which the ally character throws three bombs at the corresponding display, thereby executing a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display.

With this type of gaming machine, the change precursor effect can make the player look forward to the movement of the movable body 02TM100 and the appearance of an ally character. It can also make the player interested in whether the first action effect or the second action effect will be executed.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, (i) a gaming machine equipped with a [Type 1 jackpot] that controls to a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "jackpot," and (ii) a [Type 2 jackpot] that controls to a small jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "small jackpot," making it possible for the gaming medium to enter the V prize area in the V prize device, and controls to a jackpot gaming state based on the gaming medium entering the V prize area. In other words, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [Type 1 + Type 2 mixed machine] that has the patterns of [Type 1 jackpot] and [Type 2 jackpot] as the pattern for controlling to a jackpot gaming state (i + ii), but is not limited to this form, and the various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to gaming machines with different playability.

For example, the effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine with the gameplay characteristics of a [V-type probability variable machine]. A [V-type probability variable machine] is provided with a normal state, which is a low-probability state, and a probability variable state, which is a high-probability state (a gaming state in which probability variable control is executed). In addition, probability variable states are provided as A-type probability variable state and B-type probability variable state. Jackpot types are provided as a "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, an "A-type probability variable jackpot" in which A-type probability variable control is executed, and a "B-type probability variable jackpot" in which B-type probability variable control is executed. Different tables are referenced when determining the jackpot type depending on the type of probability variable state.

In the A special state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, but there is a 75% chance that it will be a special jackpot, and a 25% chance that it will be a regular jackpot. On the other hand, in the B special state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, and there is a 100% chance that it will be a special jackpot. For example, in the A special state, there is a 75% chance that it will be a 10R special jackpot, and a 25% chance that it will be a regular jackpot with no payout, while in the B special state, there is a 100% chance that it will be a 10R special jackpot. In other words, in the A time-saving state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, but there is a 75% chance that prize balls will actually be awarded and the time-saving state will continue after the jackpot, while in the B time-saving state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, prize balls will actually be awarded, and the time-saving state will continue after the jackpot.

For example, the following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state. Each jackpot type differs in content regarding whether or not time-saving control and probability variable control (probability variable control A, probability variable control B) are executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
(X1) "3R normal jackpot" (40%)
Time-saving control is not executed, and probability variable control is not executed either (X2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (40%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed (X3) "10Rb probability variable jackpot" (20%)
Time-saving control is executed, and b-variable control is also executed.

a The following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state.
(Y1) "Normal jackpot without balls" (25%)
Time-saving control is not executed, and probability variable control is not executed either. (Y2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (75%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed.

b The following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state.
(Z1) "10Ra certain jackpot" (100%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed.

In such a V-type gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display was displayed during a predetermined period in the jackpot game state or the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this form. The jackpot count display may also be displayed during a period different from the predetermined period in the jackpot game state or the time-saving state.

For example, the jackpot count display may be displayed during the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot game state, or may also be displayed during the period after the game develops into a super reach in the time-saving state.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state b is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", an example is shown in which a variation display of a "high-speed normal small win" variation pattern, which has a presentation mode common to the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss", is executed. However, this is not limited to this form, and when the time-saving state b is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", a variation display of a variation pattern with a presentation mode different from the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss" may be executed.

For example, when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled in the b time-saving state, a "long normal small win" variation pattern may be set. This "long normal small win" variation pattern may have a variation display period of 10,000 ms, and may indicate that a "normal small win" has occurred in the b time-saving state by displaying a special pattern S (a decorative pattern including the letters "SAFE") in the pattern display area 5C of the image display device 5. By indicating that a normal small win has occurred in the b time-saving state, it is possible to give the player a sense of value, as if it were better that the game state in which the normal small win occurred was the b time-saving state rather than the a time-saving state, which would cause the game to fall back to the normal state, and further enhance the sense of exclusivity of the b time-saving state.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which either the first change effect or the second change effect could be used when changing the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) to blue or red. However, this is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which only either the first change effect or the second change effect can be used when changing the display mode of the corresponding display to blue or red.

For example, when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to blue at a rate of 100%, and when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to red at a rate of 100%. Also, even when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed, and even when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving mode is controlled to the a time-saving mode, if the display result is "normal small hit," an example is shown in which a configuration is made such that a V win is extremely difficult in the small hit gaming state, causing the game to fall back to the normal state without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. However, this is not limited to this form. When the time-saving mode is controlled to the a time-saving mode, if the display result is "normal small hit," a configuration is made such that a V win is easy in the small hit gaming state, and the game may be controlled to the jackpot gaming state and then fall back to the normal state.

For example, even in the case of a "normal small win," the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is configured to open in the second opening pattern, generating a big win and awarding 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls). However, in this case of a "normal small win," the game state is controlled to normal after the big win game state ends. With this configuration, prize balls can be awarded even in the case of a normal small win, reducing the disappointment felt by the player when the game state is controlled to normal after a big win game state.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded on the first hit, and 1500 prize balls are also awarded for jackpots that occur during the b time-saving state. However, this is not limited to this example. If a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded on the first hit, and fewer than 1500 prize balls may be awarded for jackpots that occur during the b time-saving state.

For example, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, 1,500 prize balls will be awarded on the first hit, and 1,000 prize balls will be awarded on any jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state. In this case, a 2500 notification may be executed on the first hit to notify players that a total of 2,500 prize balls (1,500 + 1,000) will be awarded.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases when the display size of the third decorative pattern is the same in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. In the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect, the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation may increase when the display size of the third decorative pattern is a different display size.

For example, in an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation, the display size of the third decorative pattern may be increased or decreased as the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is hidden, while the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displayed. However, this is not limited to this form. When the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be hidden, and the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r may also be hidden.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern was displayed only when controlled to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], but this is not limited to this, and the "ultra-high speed miss" fluctuation pattern may also be displayed when controlled to a presentation mode other than [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern can be displayed when controlled by [Dream Rush]. In this case, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [Dream Rush] will be lower than the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [ultra-fast Hyper Rush].

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern can be executed during a predetermined period when controlled by [Dream Rush], and the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern cannot be executed during a period different from the predetermined period when controlled by [Dream Rush].

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], during the period from fluctuation 1 to 50, it is possible to display fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, but during the period from fluctuation 51 onwards when controlled by [Dream Rush], it is not possible to display fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern.

(10) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the mode switching determination value was set to 3, but this is not limiting, and the mode switching determination value may be set to a value other than 3.

For example, the mode switching determination value may be set to 5, which is greater than 3, or may be set to 2, which is less than 3.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fanfare effect execution period (0.1 seconds) was shorter than the jackpot symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) in both cases, whether a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] or based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH]. However, this is not limited to this example, and the fanfare effect execution period may be longer than the jackpot symbol symbol determination period in both cases, whether a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] or based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

For example, in both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the display changes executed in the time-saving mode a [Dream Rush], and where a jackpot occurs based on the display changes executed in the time-saving mode a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush], the period for determining the jackpot symbol is set to 0.5 seconds and the period for the fanfare effect is set to 1.0 seconds, so that the period for the fanfare effect is longer than the period for determining the jackpot symbol.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the number of pending memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is approximately 90% (900/997), and the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected is approximately 10% (97/997). This shows an example in which the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is much greater than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected, but this is not limiting, and the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected does not have to be much greater than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected.

For example, when controlled in time-saving state a [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the probability that the "Super-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern will be selected is 25%, and the probability that other fluctuation patterns A to D will be selected is around 20% each, and may be less than 25% (totaling 100%).

The feature 02TM described above includes the following components:

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
a display means (image display device 5),
In the special state (time-shortened state), when the number of times that the game has been controlled to the advantageous state continuously exceeds a predetermined number of times (mode switching judgment value="2" which is 1 less than 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value is ≥ 3), the rate at which a variable display with a variable display period shorter than a predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds) is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display with a variable display period shorter than a predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern) is executed when the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (mode switching judgment value="2" which is 1 less than 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of displaying on the display means, when the number of times in the special state has not exceeded the predetermined number of times, a specific display (jackpot count display 02TM300, "X more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") regarding the number of times to control the advantageous state until the number of times exceeds the predetermined number of times.

With this type of gaming machine, when the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number, the variable display period becomes shorter than the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the predetermined number of times is not exceeded. This increases the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the special state, creating an even more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, when controlled to a special state, players will be highly interested in how many times the advantageous state is controlled, and will play with a desire to maintain the advantageous state. Furthermore, assuming that such variable display control is performed, a specific display is displayed regarding the number of times the advantageous state is controlled until the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds the predetermined number, providing presentation information that is in line with the player's interests and further increasing the excitement when controlled to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine according to means 1,
The special states (time-saving states) include a first special state (a time-saving state) and a second special state (b time-saving state: invincible rush) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state.
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific display result (a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific display results include a first specific display result (a combination of even-numbered symbols), a second specific display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols excluding 7) different from the first specific display result, and a third specific display result (a combination of 7 symbols) different from both the first specific display result and the second specific display result,
The state control means
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (3R normal jackpot) based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state has become the first specific display result, the game is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends (the game is controlled to the low base state without transitioning to the time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Ra time-shortened jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the second specific display result, the game can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the a time-shortened state after the 10R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result, the game can be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the b time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends, and cases where it is controlled to the special state, based on the variable display executed when controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when controlled to the special state, there are cases where it is controlled to the first special state and cases where it is controlled to the second special state, so the player can be drawn to the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine according to means 2,
The specific display can be displayed on the display means in the special state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state) and the advantageous state,
The performance execution means
When the number of times is updated, the mode of the specific display can be changed in stages (the jackpot count display 02TM300 can be updated in stages from the first stage to the third stage, and the remaining number of times of "X times left until the super-high speed HYPER RUSH" can be updated),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becomes the second specific display result or the third specific display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols), the mode of the specific display can be changed by at least a predetermined step (one step) when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot).

With this type of gaming machine, the number of times the game has been controlled to a consecutive advantageous state is related to the appearance of the specific display, which draws the player's attention to the appearance of the specific display. Since the appearance of the specific display changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, this increases the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
The gaming machine of means 3,
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled in the normal state being the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned), the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled in the normal state being the second specific display result (odd number symbols aligned excluding 7) (in the a time-shortened state, the normal state is controlled when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, but in the b time-shortened state, the normal state is not controlled even when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, so the next big win is almost certain).
When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned), the effect execution means can change the mode of the specific display by more steps than the predetermined steps (updating by one step during a jackpot game state due to 7 symbols aligned, and updating by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time-shortening state).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the player's level of advantage after the advantageous state ends is associated with the number of stages at which the special display changes, further increasing interest in changes in the special display's appearance.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4,
When the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is entered based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols lined up), it is possible to award a predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize slot) in the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is entered based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state, it is possible to award the predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize slot) in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing an award effect (a 3000 notification effect displaying the letters "3000FEVER") that suggests that the specified gaming value will be awarded multiple times (1500 x 2 times) when controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result.

This type of gaming machine suggests that when the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, the gaming value awarded will include the predetermined gaming value awarded in that advantageous state and the predetermined gaming value awarded in the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state controlled after the advantageous state ends, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation before the machine is controlled to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decorative identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern),
the ornamental identification information variable display means is capable of variable display of the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to variable display of the special identification information;
The special identification information includes a first special identification information (first special design) and a second special identification information (second special design),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the second special symbol),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-shortened state (high base state), the start condition for the second special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the first special symbol),
When the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned), when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (3R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result (odd number symbols aligned other than 7), it can be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (it is possible to continue the b time-shortened state (invincible rush)).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine can prevent a situation where a special state is controlled to be reached but the special state ends because the variable display of the first special identification information is executed, thereby avoiding dissatisfaction among players. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite the game being controlled to the second special state and the game is controlled to an advantageous state based on this, by making it possible to control to the second special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of anticipation that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 6,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decorative identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern),
the ornamental identification information variable display means is capable of variable display of the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to variable display of the special identification information;
The special identification information includes a first special identification information (first special design) and a second special identification information (second special design),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the second special symbol),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-shortened state (high base state), the start condition for the second special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the first special symbol),
a state control means for controlling the state control to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols lined up), and when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result or the third specific display result (7 odd symbols lined up), after the advantageous state ends, the state control means is capable of controlling the state control to the first special state (a time-shortened state: a time-shortened state in which the state control means is controlled to the normal state when a normal small win occurs and no V win occurs) after the advantageous state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, when an irregular situation occurs in which the first special identification information is variable displayed despite the machine being controlled to the second special state, and the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the second or third specific display result, by making it possible to control the machine to at least the first special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of anticipation that the machine will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information. Furthermore, by preventing the machine from being controlled to at least the second special state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The specific display (jackpot count display) can be displayed on the display means in a first emphasis mode (a mode in which only the first count section is emphasized) and a second emphasis mode (a mode in which the first count section and the second count section are emphasized) that is emphasized more than the first emphasis mode (having higher visibility than the first emphasis mode),
If the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (2),
When the number of times does not exceed a first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the first highlighted manner,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the number of times exceeds the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the second emphasis mode.

With this type of gaming machine, the special display can indicate the number of times remaining until the number of consecutive times controlled to an advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special display.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-shortened state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing symbol) different from the specific display result can be executed, and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds),
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of means 10 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 9,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (a time-shortened state in the Dream Rush mode) after the advantageous state ends,
The state control means can control the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) when the number of times the advantageous state has been continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number (2),
In the predetermined state (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2: in the time-saving state of Dream Rush mode), the special variable display is not executed (the loss fluctuation pattern determination table does not include a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast loss (0.2 seconds)").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between predetermined states and special states by the difference in the variable display period, allowing players to emphasize the succession of advantageous states and to experience the uniqueness of special states.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 10,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance is provided.
The state control means is configured to control the special state (jackpot occurrence count value=3 to 10000: ultra-high speed HYPER) after the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when the predetermined state (jackpot occurrence count value=1 to 2: time-shortened state of Dream RUSH mode) is ended.
It can be controlled to a time-saving state in RUSH mode,
When the variable display means is controlled to the special state based on the variable display executed when it is controlled to the predetermined state, it is capable of executing a special variable display (a variable display of a "break-in variable miss (break-in performance + ultra-high speed miss)" variable pattern with a variable display period longer than that of the special variable display, as a first variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (a losing pattern),
The variable display period of the special variable display is longer than the variable display period (any of the variable patterns of pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds), ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds), Super Reach C miss (10 seconds), Super Reach B miss (20 seconds)) of the first variable display in which the display result becomes the predetermined display result (missing pattern), which is executed when the special state is again controlled (when the time-shortening state a of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode continues) after the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when controlled in the special state ends,
The effect execution means is capable of executing suggestion effects (acceleration pseudo-variation effect, mode start suggestion effect) that suggest that the game will be controlled to the special state in response to the special variable display (entry variation miss (30.2 seconds)).

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display, which has a longer variable display period than the special variable display, can indicate to the player that they have entered a special state.

The gaming machine of means 12 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect during a first period (from the start of variation to 30 seconds from the start of variation) of a period including the variable display period of the special variable display (variable display period of 30.2 seconds) and the fixed period from the end of the special variable display to the start of the next variable display (pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds), and is capable of displaying the predetermined display result (losing pattern) in a manner common to the special variable display (variably displaying decorative patterns in a manner common to the variable pattern of an ultra-high speed loss (0.2 seconds)) during a second period (30 seconds from the start of variation to 30.2 seconds from the start of variation (remaining variable display period of 0.2 seconds) + pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) after the first period.

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display indicates to the player that a special state has been entered, and even though the actual variable display period is not as short as that of the special variable display, the player can feel that the variable display period has become extremely short since the first variable display upon entering the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 12,
A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
The decorative identification information variable display means is
During the variable display period of the decoration identification information, a re-variable display (unit pseudo-variation) can be performed in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed;
In the first period, it is possible to execute multiple re-variable displays (unit pseudo-variations), and it is possible to make the variable display period of the subsequent re-variable displays shorter than the variable display period of the previous re-variable displays (it is possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variation effect in which the variable display equivalent period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds),
The effect execution means notifies the user that a transition to a performance mode corresponding to the special state will occur during the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) (the mode start notification effect can be executed after the execution of the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the first period can be effectively used to make the player aware that the variable display period will be shortened when a special state is entered, and to notify the player that a transition to a presentation mode corresponding to the special state will occur.

The gaming machine of means 14 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A reserved storage means (RAM 102) for storing information on variable displays that are not being executed as reserved storage;
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes a jackpot determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
a display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-shortened state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing symbol) different from the specific display result can be executed, and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds),
Among the variable displays that are executed when controlled to the special state and whose display result becomes the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and higher than the total of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area (a central area of the screen including the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) and a second display area (an area on the edge of the screen excluding the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) that is closer to the periphery of the screen than the first display area and is narrower than the first display area;
The effect execution means is capable of executing, on the display means, a suggestion effect (a first look-ahead effect, a second look-ahead effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, with the reserved memory as the target, during a variable display prior to the reserved memory;
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (a first pre-reading effect in which a fixed icon including the word "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that has not been fixed and stopped) that is executed in the first display area and uses decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a second suggestive effect (a second pre-reading effect in which a second pre-reading image including an image of seven patterns aligned) that is different from the first suggestive effect and that is executed in the second display area,
The execution rate of the first suggestive effect is higher than the execution rate of the second suggestive effect (the execution rate of the first pre-reading effect is higher than the execution rate of the second pre-reading effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result during the period controlled to the special state is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, the first suggestive effect, which is executed with a relatively high probability, is an effect that uses decorative identification information and is executed in the first display area, which is easily noticed by the player, allowing the player to realize how short the variable display period in the special state is, while also increasing the player's sense of anticipation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 15 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 14,
There are multiple types of the first suggestion effect (first pre-reading effect, giant pattern effect), and there are multiple types of the second suggestion effect (second pre-reading effect, reserved pre-reading effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that the total execution rate of all types of the first suggestive effects (execution rate of the first look-ahead effect + execution rate of the symbol enlargement effect) is higher than the total execution rate of all types of the second suggestive effects (execution rate of the second look-ahead effect + execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect), or the execution rate of any type of first suggestive effect (execution rate of the first look-ahead effect) is higher than the execution rate of any type of second suggestive effect (execution rate of the second look-ahead effect, execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect).

This type of gaming machine allows players to experience the shortness of the variable display period in special states.

The gaming machine of means 16 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 14 or 15,
In the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode),
The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative design) is different from the manner in which the decoration identification information scrolls up and down on the screen, and is a manner in which the decoration identification information moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the decorative design expands rapidly),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result (losing pattern) are executed consecutively, decorative identification information corresponding to a subsequent variable display is displayed in a manner that is larger in size and more transparent than the decorative identification information stopped in correspondence with the previous variable display, and then the size of the decorative identification information becomes smaller.

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a predetermined display result are executed consecutively, the period during which the decorative identification information is displayed within the range that the player is focusing on can be extended, and the transparency of the decorative identification information changes within the range that the player is focusing on, giving a stronger sense of the high speed of the variable display in special states.

The gaming machine of means 17 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
a display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-shortened state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing symbol) different from the specific display result can be executed, and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds),
Among the variable displays that are executed when controlled to the special state and whose display result becomes the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and higher than the total of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
When the special variable display is executed continuously (when the "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is continuous), it is possible to execute the special variable display using the decoration identification information used for the previous special variable display and the decoration identification information that results in the display of the special variable display (the combination of decorative symbols that was confirmed and stopped in the previous ultra-high speed miss variation temporarily expands and becomes more transparent when the subsequent ultra-high speed miss variation begins, and then, when the combination of decorative symbols shrinks, the combination of decorative symbols changes to the combination of decorative symbols that was confirmed and stopped in the ultra-high speed miss variation).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, if the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, the decoration identification information used for a previously executed special variable display is also used for a later executed special variable display, giving the player a sense of speed while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive amount of presentation information presented in conjunction with the special variable display.

The gaming machine of means 18 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 17,
When the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), it is capable of displaying, in response to the stopped decorative identification information (decorative pattern), first additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a base pattern that is added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponds to the outline of the number pattern) that is added to the background side of the decorative identification information, and second additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and is displayed on the entire screen) that emphasizes the decorative identification information and is displayed outside the area of the first additional information,
When the game is controlled to a predetermined state (time-saving state a in Dream Rush mode) different from the special state, at least the second additional information is not displayed in response to the stopped decoration identification information (either the base design and the light effect display are not displayed, or the base design is displayed while the light effect display is not displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative identification information is more emphasized in special states, making it easier to recognize the decorative identification information when the variable display period is short, and also highlighting the sense of speed when the decorative identification information is variably displayed.

The gaming machine of means 19 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A reserve memory means (RAM 102) for storing the number of variable displays for which the start condition (entry into the start winning slot) has been met but the start condition (the variable display of the special symbol has not been executed and the game is not controlled to either the big win game state or the small win game state) has not been met as the reserve memory number;
a display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the device is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) and the reserved memory number is not 0, the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period of 0.5 seconds for the pattern) can be executed;
Among the variable displays that are controlled to the special state and are executed when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and whose display result is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
When the device is controlled to the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed as a variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (when the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern whose variable display period is longer than the "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern),
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the special variable display, it is possible to perform special control (constant speed pseudo-variable presentation) in which variable display of decorative identification information (temporary stopping and re-variation of decorative patterns) is performed multiple times, with the variable display period being the same as the variable display period of the decorative identification information when the special variable display is executed (a period of [variable display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + pattern confirmation stop equivalent period 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds]).

With this type of gaming machine, if the display result during the period controlled to the special state is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding situations where no variable display is being executed as much as possible, and by making it appear to the player as if multiple special variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the special state is not lost.

The gaming machine of means 20 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 19,
Of the variable displays whose display result becomes the predetermined display result and which are executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 under the control of the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special variable display is executed at the highest rate (when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variation patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to minimize the loss of frequency and speed in the variable display during special states.

The gaming machine of means 21 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 19 or 20,
When the game is controlled to a predetermined state (time-saving state a in Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the special control is not executed, and a predetermined variable display having a variable display period longer than the special variable display can be executed (the "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern is not selected, and the "long variable miss (10 seconds)" variable pattern can be selected).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clearly identify the characteristics of the special variable display in a special state, and to avoid situations where the variable display is not being executed as much as possible, even when controlled to a specified state.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
a display means (image display device 5),
The special states include a first special state (a time-saving state in the Dream Rush mode) and a second special state (a time-saving state in the ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled to the second special state, a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second) is higher than the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second);
The performance execution means
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display (first logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change effect (first logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display (second logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change effect (a second logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The cycle in which the appearance of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than the cycle in which the appearance of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect (the cycle in which the appearance of the second logo change effect changes (0.5 seconds) is shorter than the cycle in which the appearance of the first logo change effect changes (5 seconds)).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the second special state, where the special variable display is executed with a high probability, the cycle in which the second special display changes appearance is short, emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 23 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 22,
A game area (2) from which a game medium is shot is provided,
The gaming area includes a first gaming area (left gaming area) and a second gaming area (right gaming area),
When controlled in the normal state (low base state), it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the first game area than into the second game area (the conditions for starting the special symbol variable display are more likely to be met),
When the special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) is controlled, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the second game area than into the first game area (the conditions for starting the special symbol variable display are more likely to be met),
In the first specific change performance, the state of the first special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display),
In the second specific change presentation, the state of the second special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the first special display can notify the player that the machine is in the first special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium ball is the second gaming area, and the second special display can notify the player that the machine is in the second special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium is the second gaming area.

The gaming machine of means 24 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 22 or 23,
A game area (2) from which a game medium is shot is provided,
The gaming area includes a first gaming area (left gaming area) and a second gaming area (right gaming area),
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), an instruction display (a first system display and a second system display including the characters "right hit" and a right-facing arrow) instructing to launch the game medium into the second game area can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
The mode of the instruction display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the right-pointing arrow periodically moves from left to right),
The rate of change of the mode of the instruction display in the second special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is greater than the rate of change of the mode of the instruction display in the first special state (time-saving state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) (the movement period of the arrow in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the movement period of the arrow in the first system display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the instruction display notifies the player of the area into which the gaming medium should be fired, and further emphasizes the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 25 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 22 to 24,
a storage means (RAM 102) for storing information (holding information) about a variable display for which the starting condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and information about a variable display for which the start condition is satisfied (information about the variable display being executed);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance,
The performance execution means
A corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
When controlled in the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), it is possible to rotate the corresponding display,
When controlled in the second special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rotation speed of the corresponding display is faster than when controlled in the first special state (time-saving state a in the DREAM RUSH mode) (the rotation period of the second rotation corresponding display is 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation corresponding display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to a special state, and when it is controlled to the second special state, the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the first special state, further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

The gaming machine of means 26 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result becomes a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
The performance execution means
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed so that the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decorative identification information (a "symbol matching effect" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
In the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to prevent the decorative identification information from being displayed statically (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start the round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing the "symbol matching effect").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the special state, it is possible to not freeze the decorative identification information when controlled to an advantageous state, so the flow of play from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly controlled.

The gaming machine of means 27 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of the special pattern) becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when controlled to the special state,
When controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result becomes a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result, which are executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
The performance execution means
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed so that the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decorative identification information (a "symbol matching effect" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special state (time-saving state a in ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the special display result (small win symbol), it is possible to statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a jackpot via a small win, it is possible to execute a "symbol alignment effect"), and when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to not statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start a round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing a "symbol alignment effect").

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the special state, when a variable display that results in a special display result is executed, the decorative identification information is frozen, clarifying the flow of the game and directing the player's attention to playing so that the gaming medium passes through the specific area. On the other hand, when a variable display that results in a specific display result is executed, the decorative identification information is not frozen, thereby not interrupting the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state, and emphasizing the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly achieved.

The gaming machine of means 28 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 26 or 27,
The state control means can control the special state (the "a" time-saving state of the "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode") to a predetermined state (the "a" time-saving state of the "Dream RUSH mode") different from the special state (the "a" time-saving state of the "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode"),
In the predetermined state, when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop the display of decorative identification information (a "symbol matching effect" can be executed when a symbol jackpot occurs).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the predetermined state and the special state can be clearly defined by the difference in the display of the decorative identification information, creating a sense of exclusivity when the display result in the special state becomes a specific display result.

The gaming machine of means 29 comprises:
29. The gaming machine according to claim 28,
The device is provided with a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state,
The execution rate of a variable display executed in the special state (time-shortening state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (a losing symbol) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds) is higher than the execution rate of a variable display executed in the predetermined state (time-shortening state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (a losing symbol) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period,
After the start effect corresponding to the start of the advantageous state ends, the special variable means is controlled to the second state (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened after the fanfare effect ends),
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the predetermined state, and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the special state, the execution period of the start effect is shorter than the determination period of the specific display result (when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the Dream Rush mode, and when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush mode, in either case, the execution period of the fanfare effect is shorter than the determination period of the jackpot symbol).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the period from when the advantageous state begins until the special variable means is controlled to the second state can be made even shorter when controlled to a predetermined state and when controlled to a special state, preventing the player from having to wait the period from when the display result is notified until the game value is awarded. In particular, in the special state, control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so the special variable means can be controlled to the second state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see a continuous flow from when the variable display begins until the game value is awarded in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 30 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 26 to 29,
a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first state;
A special light emitting means (a light emitting device provided around the special variable winning ball device 7 or on the opening and closing part) is provided corresponding to the position of the special variable means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when controlled to the special state,
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than when controlled to the normal state (low base state),
The performance execution means
When controlled in the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special light-emitting means is caused to emit light (the light-emitting device of the special variable winning ball device 7 is caused to emit light) when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result (when a symbol jackpot occurs), and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the gaming medium passing through the specific area while controlled in the special state (when a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs), and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result, in response to the special variable means being controlled in the second state, an instruction display (an indication of "Aim at the attacker!!") instructing the special variable means to fire the gaming medium can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).

With this type of gaming machine, when controlled to a special state, the special light-emitting means will light up and the instruction display will be displayed in either the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a special state or the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that they have been controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result. In other words, even though the machine has been controlled to a special state and is in a situation where it is easy to be controlled to an advantageous state via a special state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed that an advantageous state based on a specific display result, which can occur with the same probability even in a normal state, has occurred.

The gaming machine of means 31 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
Movable parts (movable body 02TM100),
Display means (image display device 5);
A storage means (RAM 102) for storing information relating to variable display;
a determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
Corresponding information corresponding to the variable display (a reserved display corresponding to an unexecuted variable display (reserved memory), an active display corresponding to an executed variable display) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
The display modes of the corresponding display include a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (red mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
The performance execution means
A state change effect can be executed to change the corresponding display from the first state to the second state based on the determination result of the determination means,
It is possible to execute a movable role effect (maximum movement effect) that moves the movable role object from a first position (initial position) to a second position (maximum performance position),
After the movable role performance is performed, in response to the movable role being moved from the second position to the first position, a related display (the same ally character 02TM30B as the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the movable role can be displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is capable of executing an action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display (a second action change effect in which the ally character 02TM30C throws three bombs at the pending display or active display), and also executing a state change effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect (a second corresponding display change effect in which the pending display or active display that is hit by the bomb changes from a normal state to a red state).

With this type of gaming machine, the action effects and state change effects are executed through coordination between the movable role device, the related display associated with the movable role device, and the corresponding display, thereby increasing the excitement when the corresponding display changes compared to when only effects that act on the corresponding display or effects that change the corresponding display are executed.

The gaming machine of means 32 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 31,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape that imitates a specific character (ally character),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character,
The performance execution means
A battle presentation in which the specific character battles (a battle presentation in which a friendly character battles an enemy character) can be executed on the display means (image display device 5),
When the battle presentation is executed, a victory presentation in which the specific character wins (a victory presentation in which a friendly character wins against an enemy character) can be executed when the advantageous state is achieved.

With this type of gaming machine, the relationship between the movable device and the specific character displayed on the display means can create a sense of unity in the series of presentations, and can also make the player realize that the specific character is an important character, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the specific character.

The gaming machine of means 33 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 31 or 32,
As a display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display), there is a predetermined mode (blue mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode (normal mode) and a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
The effect execution means is capable of executing, as the effect change effect, a first effect change effect (a change from a normal effect to a blue effect) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first effect to the predetermined effect, and a second effect change effect (a change from a normal effect to a red effect) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first effect to the second effect,
When the second aspect change effect is executed, the rate at which the action effect (the first action effect or the second action effect in which an ally character throws a bomb toward a pending display or an active display) targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the second aspect change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the action effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the first aspect change effect is executed when the first aspect change effect is executed;
The performance execution means
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) can be moved from the first position (initial position) to a predetermined position (intermediate performance position) between the first position and the second position (maximum performance position),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to display the related display (ally character 02TM30B) in response to moving the movable role object from the predetermined position to the first position, to execute the action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display, and to execute the first state change effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect.

This type of gaming machine allows for a variety of different behavioral changes, and creates a sense of anticipation for the action that will occur when the movable device operates.

The gaming machine of means 34 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 33,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing, as the effect, a first effect (a first effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward a pending display or an active display) and a second effect (a second effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward a pending display or an active display) that is more visible than the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second mode change effect is executed, the rate at which the second action effect is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the second mode change effect is higher than the rate at which the second action effect is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the first mode change effect is executed when the first mode change effect is executed.

This type of gaming machine can diversify action effects and draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. Furthermore, by executing highly visible action effects, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation as the corresponding display changes to a more promising form.

The gaming machine of means 35 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 34,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating the face of the specific character (the ally character of the movable body 02TM100),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the face of the specific character,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of continuously displaying the related display (ally character 02TM30B) on the display means (image display device 5) after the movable role performance is executed, when the movable role is moving from the second position (maximum performance position) to the first position (initial position) and when the movable role has moved to the first position (initial position).

This type of gaming machine can emphasize the relationship between the movable role object and the related display, and by linking the movable role object and the related display, it is possible to highlight the dramatic effects of specific characters.

The gaming machine of means 36 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 35,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
As the action effect, a first action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward the pending display or the active display) and a second action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward the pending display or the active display) that is more visible than the first action effect can be executed,
After executing a suggestion effect (a change precursor effect) that suggests that the action effect will be executed, the movable role effect (intermediate action effect) is executed, and the first action effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, after executing the suggestive performance, the movable role performance (maximum movement performance) is executed, and the second action performance is executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the suggestive effects can make the player anticipate the movement of the movable device and the appearance of a specific character. It can also make the player curious as to whether the first or second action effect will be executed.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a movable body;
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium entering the start area,
The specific identification information can be variably displayed,
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that control will be made into the advantageous state in a first reach, and when the first command is received, it is possible to execute a previous reach that is different from the first reach before executing the first reach, and then execute the first reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the first reach, and when the second command is received, it is possible to execute the first reach after executing the pre-stage reach before executing the first reach,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be achieved in a second reach, and when the third command is received, it is possible to execute the second reach without executing the preceding reach before executing the second reach,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach will not be controlled to the advantageous state, and when the fourth command is received, it is possible to execute the second reach without executing the previous reach before executing the second reach,
an execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach is shorter than an execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach,
the execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach is longer than the execution time of the title display corresponding to the previous reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are:
a first part from the start of a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach to the display in a specific area;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area;
a third part that ends the display of the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The title display corresponding to the preceding reach is:
a first part from when the title display corresponding to the previous reach starts to when the title is displayed in a specific area;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the previous reach is displayed in the specific area;
a third part that ends the display of the title display corresponding to the previous reach,
The display means
displaying a title display corresponding to the first reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the previous reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
the development pattern to the first reach includes a first pattern in which the movable body develops by moving, and a second pattern in which the movable body develops without moving ,
The display means
After notification that the control will be made to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the first reach ,
the display means displays the title display corresponding to the first reach in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the previous reach ,
a state control means for controlling the game between a normal state and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
The performance control means
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change performance that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
A gaming machine in which the period during which the appearance of the second special display changes in the second specific change presentation is shorter than the period during which the appearance of the first special display changes in the first specific change presentation.